diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
263 files changed, 8365 insertions, 2043 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb index e2bc700a6f9c..831f15d9672f 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -32,10 +32,9 @@ Date: January 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.25 Contact: Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com> Description: - If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is enabled then this file - is present. When read, it returns the total time (in msec) - that the USB device has been connected to the machine. This - file is read-only. + If CONFIG_PM is enabled, then this file is present. When read, + it returns the total time (in msec) that the USB device has been + connected to the machine. This file is read-only. Users: PowerTOP <powertop@lists.01.org> https://01.org/powertop/ @@ -45,10 +44,9 @@ Date: January 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.25 Contact: Sarah Sharp <sarah.a.sharp@intel.com> Description: - If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is enabled then this file - is present. When read, it returns the total time (in msec) - that the USB device has been active, i.e. not in a suspended - state. This file is read-only. + If CONFIG_PM is enabled, then this file is present. When read, + it returns the total time (in msec) that the USB device has been + active, i.e. not in a suspended state. This file is read-only. Tools can use this file and the connected_duration file to compute the percentage of time that a device has been active. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp index b9688de8455b..7049a2b50359 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-ib_srp @@ -55,12 +55,12 @@ Description: Interface for making ib_srp connect to a new target. only safe with partial memory descriptor list support enabled (allow_ext_sg=1). * comp_vector, a number in the range 0..n-1 specifying the - MSI-X completion vector. Some HCA's allocate multiple (n) - MSI-X vectors per HCA port. If the IRQ affinity masks of - these interrupts have been configured such that each MSI-X - interrupt is handled by a different CPU then the comp_vector - parameter can be used to spread the SRP completion workload - over multiple CPU's. + MSI-X completion vector of the first RDMA channel. Some + HCA's allocate multiple (n) MSI-X vectors per HCA port. If + the IRQ affinity masks of these interrupts have been + configured such that each MSI-X interrupt is handled by a + different CPU then the comp_vector parameter can be used to + spread the SRP completion workload over multiple CPU's. * tl_retry_count, a number in the range 2..7 specifying the IB RC retry count. * queue_size, the maximum number of commands that the @@ -88,6 +88,13 @@ Description: Whether ib_srp is allowed to include a partial memory descriptor list in an SRP_CMD when communicating with an SRP target. +What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/ch_count +Date: April 1, 2015 +KernelVersion: 3.19 +Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Number of RDMA channels used for communication with the SRP + target. + What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/cmd_sg_entries Date: May 19, 2011 KernelVersion: 2.6.39 @@ -95,6 +102,12 @@ Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org Description: Maximum number of data buffer descriptors that may be sent to the target in a single SRP_CMD request. +What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/comp_vector +Date: September 2, 2013 +KernelVersion: 3.11 +Contact: linux-rdma@vger.kernel.org +Description: Completion vector used for the first RDMA channel. + What: /sys/class/scsi_host/host<n>/dgid Date: June 17, 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci index ee6c04036492..b3bc50f650ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci @@ -281,3 +281,16 @@ Description: opt-out of driver binding using a driver_override name such as "none". Only a single driver may be specified in the override, there is no support for parsing delimiters. + +What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../numa_node +Date: Oct 2014 +Contact: Prarit Bhargava <prarit@redhat.com> +Description: + This file contains the NUMA node to which the PCI device is + attached, or -1 if the node is unknown. The initial value + comes from an ACPI _PXM method or a similar firmware + source. If that is missing or incorrect, this file can be + written to override the node. In that case, please report + a firmware bug to the system vendor. Writing to this file + taints the kernel with TAINT_FIRMWARE_WORKAROUND, which + reduces the supportability of your system. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb index 614d451cee41..e5cc7633d013 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb @@ -104,16 +104,15 @@ What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/usb2_hardware_lpm Date: September 2011 Contact: Andiry Xu <andiry.xu@amd.com> Description: - If CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device - is plugged in to a xHCI host which support link PM, it will - perform a LPM test; if the test is passed and host supports - USB2 hardware LPM (xHCI 1.0 feature), USB2 hardware LPM will - be enabled for the device and the USB device directory will - contain a file named power/usb2_hardware_lpm. The file holds - a string value (enable or disable) indicating whether or not - USB2 hardware LPM is enabled for the device. Developer can - write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to the file to enable/disable the - feature. + If CONFIG_PM is set and a USB 2.0 lpm-capable device is plugged + in to a xHCI host which support link PM, it will perform a LPM + test; if the test is passed and host supports USB2 hardware LPM + (xHCI 1.0 feature), USB2 hardware LPM will be enabled for the + device and the USB device directory will contain a file named + power/usb2_hardware_lpm. The file holds a string value (enable + or disable) indicating whether or not USB2 hardware LPM is + enabled for the device. Developer can write y/Y/1 or n/N/0 to + the file to enable/disable the feature. What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../removable Date: February 2012 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net index e1b2e785bba8..beb8ec4dabbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net @@ -216,3 +216,11 @@ Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org Description: Indicates the interface protocol type as a decimal value. See include/uapi/linux/if_arp.h for all possible values. + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/phys_switch_id +Date: November 2014 +KernelVersion: 3.19 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Indicates the unique physical switch identifier of a switch this + port belongs to, as a string. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ibft b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ibft index c2b7d1154bec..cac3930bdb04 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ibft +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ibft @@ -20,4 +20,4 @@ Date: November 2007 Contact: Konrad Rzeszutek <ketuzsezr@darnok.org> Description: The /sys/firmware/ibft/ethernetX directory will contain files that expose the iSCSI Boot Firmware Table NIC data. - This can this can the IP address, MAC, and gateway of the NIC. + Usually this contains the IP address, MAC, and gateway of the NIC. diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes index 1de131bb49fb..74bdda9272a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/Changes +++ b/Documentation/Changes @@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ o <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html> Ip-route2 --------- -o <ftp://ftp.tux.org/pub/net/ip-routing/iproute2-2.2.4-now-ss991023.tar.gz> +o <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/> OProfile -------- diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle index 3171822c22a5..618a33c940df 100644 --- a/Documentation/CodingStyle +++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle @@ -392,7 +392,12 @@ The goto statement comes in handy when a function exits from multiple locations and some common work such as cleanup has to be done. If there is no cleanup needed then just return directly. -The rationale is: +Choose label names which say what the goto does or why the goto exists. An +example of a good name could be "out_buffer:" if the goto frees "buffer". Avoid +using GW-BASIC names like "err1:" and "err2:". Also don't name them after the +goto location like "err_kmalloc_failed:" + +The rationale for using gotos is: - unconditional statements are easier to understand and follow - nesting is reduced @@ -403,9 +408,10 @@ The rationale is: int fun(int a) { int result = 0; - char *buffer = kmalloc(SIZE); + char *buffer; - if (buffer == NULL) + buffer = kmalloc(SIZE, GFP_KERNEL); + if (!buffer) return -ENOMEM; if (condition1) { @@ -413,14 +419,25 @@ int fun(int a) ... } result = 1; - goto out; + goto out_buffer; } ... -out: +out_buffer: kfree(buffer); return result; } +A common type of bug to be aware of it "one err bugs" which look like this: + +err: + kfree(foo->bar); + kfree(foo); + return ret; + +The bug in this code is that on some exit paths "foo" is NULL. Normally the +fix for this is to split it up into two error labels "err_bar:" and "err_foo:". + + Chapter 8: Commenting Comments are good, but there is also a danger of over-commenting. NEVER @@ -845,6 +862,49 @@ next instruction in the assembly output: : /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */); + Chapter 20: Conditional Compilation + +Wherever possible, don't use preprocessor conditionals (#if, #ifdef) in .c +files; doing so makes code harder to read and logic harder to follow. Instead, +use such conditionals in a header file defining functions for use in those .c +files, providing no-op stub versions in the #else case, and then call those +functions unconditionally from .c files. The compiler will avoid generating +any code for the stub calls, producing identical results, but the logic will +remain easy to follow. + +Prefer to compile out entire functions, rather than portions of functions or +portions of expressions. Rather than putting an ifdef in an expression, factor +out part or all of the expression into a separate helper function and apply the +conditional to that function. + +If you have a function or variable which may potentially go unused in a +particular configuration, and the compiler would warn about its definition +going unused, mark the definition as __maybe_unused rather than wrapping it in +a preprocessor conditional. (However, if a function or variable *always* goes +unused, delete it.) + +Within code, where possible, use the IS_ENABLED macro to convert a Kconfig +symbol into a C boolean expression, and use it in a normal C conditional: + + if (IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_SOMETHING)) { + ... + } + +The compiler will constant-fold the conditional away, and include or exclude +the block of code just as with an #ifdef, so this will not add any runtime +overhead. However, this approach still allows the C compiler to see the code +inside the block, and check it for correctness (syntax, types, symbol +references, etc). Thus, you still have to use an #ifdef if the code inside the +block references symbols that will not exist if the condition is not met. + +At the end of any non-trivial #if or #ifdef block (more than a few lines), +place a comment after the #endif on the same line, noting the conditional +expression used. For instance: + +#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING +... +#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */ + Appendix I: References diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl index 0230a96f0564..71f9246127ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl @@ -57,6 +57,7 @@ !Esound/core/pcm.c !Esound/core/pcm_lib.c !Esound/core/pcm_native.c +!Iinclude/sound/pcm.h </sect1> <sect1><title>PCM Format Helpers</title> !Esound/core/pcm_misc.c @@ -64,6 +65,10 @@ <sect1><title>PCM Memory Management</title> !Esound/core/pcm_memory.c </sect1> + <sect1><title>PCM DMA Engine API</title> +!Esound/core/pcm_dmaengine.c +!Iinclude/sound/dmaengine_pcm.h + </sect1> </chapter> <chapter><title>Control/Mixer API</title> <sect1><title>General Control Interface</title> @@ -91,12 +96,38 @@ !Esound/core/info.c </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter><title>Compress Offload</title> + <sect1><title>Compress Offload API</title> +!Esound/core/compress_offload.c +!Iinclude/uapi/sound/compress_offload.h +!Iinclude/uapi/sound/compress_params.h +!Iinclude/sound/compress_driver.h + </sect1> + </chapter> + <chapter><title>ASoC</title> + <sect1><title>ASoC Core API</title> +!Iinclude/sound/soc.h +!Esound/soc/soc-core.c +!Esound/soc/soc-cache.c +!Esound/soc/soc-devres.c +!Esound/soc/soc-io.c +!Esound/soc/soc-pcm.c + </sect1> + <sect1><title>ASoC DAPM API</title> +!Esound/soc/soc-dapm.c + </sect1> + <sect1><title>ASoC DMA Engine API</title> +!Esound/soc/soc-generic-dmaengine-pcm.c + </sect1> + </chapter> <chapter><title>Miscellaneous Functions</title> <sect1><title>Hardware-Dependent Devices API</title> !Esound/core/hwdep.c </sect1> <sect1><title>Jack Abstraction Layer API</title> +!Iinclude/sound/jack.h !Esound/core/jack.c +!Esound/soc/soc-jack.c </sect1> <sect1><title>ISA DMA Helpers</title> !Esound/core/isadma.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile index df2962d9e11e..8bf7c6191296 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/Makefile @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ GENFILES := $(addprefix $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR)/, $(MEDIA_TEMP)) PHONY += cleanmediadocs cleanmediadocs: - -@rm `find $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR) -type l` $(GENFILES) $(OBJIMGFILES) 2>/dev/null + -@rm -f `find $(MEDIA_OBJ_DIR) -type l` $(GENFILES) $(OBJIMGFILES) 2>/dev/null $(obj)/media_api.xml: $(GENFILES) FORCE diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 948ddaab592e..3018564ddfd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ struct dtv_properties { </para> <informaltable><tgroup cols="1"><tbody><row><entry align="char"> -<para>This ioctl call sets one or more frontend properties. This call only - requires read-only access to the device.</para> +<para>This ioctl call sets one or more frontend properties. This call + requires read/write access to the device.</para> </entry> </row></tbody></tgroup></informaltable> <para>SYNOPSIS diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml index d2eb79e41a01..7ff01a23c2fe 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/biblio.xml @@ -178,6 +178,75 @@ Signal - NTSC for Studio Applications"</title> 1125-Line High-Definition Production"</title> </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="srgb"> + <abbrev>sRGB</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission +(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>IEC 61966-2-1 ed1.0 "Multimedia systems and equipment - Colour measurement +and management - Part 2-1: Colour management - Default RGB colour space - sRGB"</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="sycc"> + <abbrev>sYCC</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission +(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>IEC 61966-2-1-am1 ed1.0 "Amendment 1 - Multimedia systems and equipment - Colour measurement +and management - Part 2-1: Colour management - Default RGB colour space - sRGB"</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="xvycc"> + <abbrev>xvYCC</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission +(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>IEC 61966-2-4 ed1.0 "Multimedia systems and equipment - Colour measurement +and management - Part 2-4: Colour management - Extended-gamut YCC colour space for video +applications - xvYCC"</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="adobergb"> + <abbrev>AdobeRGB</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Adobe Systems Incorporated (<ulink url="http://www.adobe.com">http://www.adobe.com</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>Adobe© RGB (1998) Color Image Encoding Version 2005-05</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="oprgb"> + <abbrev>opRGB</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>International Electrotechnical Commission +(<ulink url="http://www.iec.ch">http://www.iec.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>IEC 61966-2-5 "Multimedia systems and equipment - Colour measurement +and management - Part 2-5: Colour management - Optional RGB colour space - opRGB"</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="itu2020"> + <abbrev>ITU BT.2020</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>International Telecommunication Union (<ulink +url="http://www.itu.ch">http://www.itu.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>ITU-R Recommendation BT.2020 (08/2012) "Parameter values for ultra-high +definition television systems for production and international programme exchange" +</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="tech3213"> + <abbrev>EBU Tech 3213</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>European Broadcast Union (<ulink +url="http://www.ebu.ch">http://www.ebu.ch</ulink>)</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>E.B.U. Standard for Chromaticity Tolerances for Studio Monitors"</title> + </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="iec62106"> <abbrev>IEC 62106</abbrev> <authorgroup> @@ -266,4 +335,20 @@ in the frequency range from 87,5 to 108,0 MHz</title> <subtitle>Version 1, Revision 2</subtitle> </biblioentry> + <biblioentry id="poynton"> + <abbrev>poynton</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Charles Poynton</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>Digital Video and HDTV, Algorithms and Interfaces</title> + </biblioentry> + + <biblioentry id="colimg"> + <abbrev>colimg</abbrev> + <authorgroup> + <corpauthor>Erik Reinhard et al.</corpauthor> + </authorgroup> + <title>Color Imaging: Fundamentals and Applications</title> + </biblioentry> + </bibliography> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml index 07ffc76553ba..0a2debfa68f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/compat.xml @@ -2566,6 +2566,10 @@ fields changed from _s32 to _u32. <para>Added compound control types and &VIDIOC-QUERY-EXT-CTRL;. </para> </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> <title>V4L2 in Linux 3.18</title> <orderedlist> <listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index d15aaf83f56f..4f0ba58c9bd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -195,53 +195,59 @@ <title>Sample Pipeline Configuration</title> <tgroup cols="3"> <colspec colname="what"/> - <colspec colname="sensor-0" /> - <colspec colname="frontend-0" /> - <colspec colname="frontend-1" /> - <colspec colname="scaler-0" /> - <colspec colname="scaler-1" /> + <colspec colname="sensor-0 format" /> + <colspec colname="frontend-0 format" /> + <colspec colname="frontend-1 format" /> + <colspec colname="scaler-0 format" /> + <colspec colname="scaler-0 compose" /> + <colspec colname="scaler-1 format" /> <thead> <row> <entry></entry> - <entry>Sensor/0</entry> - <entry>Frontend/0</entry> - <entry>Frontend/1</entry> - <entry>Scaler/0</entry> - <entry>Scaler/1</entry> + <entry>Sensor/0 format</entry> + <entry>Frontend/0 format</entry> + <entry>Frontend/1 format</entry> + <entry>Scaler/0 format</entry> + <entry>Scaler/0 compose selection rectangle</entry> + <entry>Scaler/1 format</entry> </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> <row> <entry>Initial state</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry>-</entry> - <entry>-</entry> - <entry>-</entry> - <entry>-</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> </row> <row> - <entry>Configure frontend input</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry><emphasis>2048x1536</emphasis></entry> - <entry><emphasis>2046x1534</emphasis></entry> - <entry>-</entry> - <entry>-</entry> + <entry>Configure frontend sink format</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry><emphasis>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</emphasis></entry> + <entry><emphasis>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</emphasis></entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> + <entry>(default)</entry> </row> <row> - <entry>Configure scaler input</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry>2046x1534</entry> - <entry><emphasis>2046x1534</emphasis></entry> - <entry><emphasis>2046x1534</emphasis></entry> + <entry>Configure scaler sink format</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry><emphasis>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</emphasis></entry> + <entry><emphasis>0,0/2046x1534</emphasis></entry> + <entry><emphasis>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</emphasis></entry> </row> <row> - <entry>Configure scaler output</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry>2048x1536</entry> - <entry>2046x1534</entry> - <entry>2046x1534</entry> - <entry><emphasis>1280x960</emphasis></entry> + <entry>Configure scaler sink compose selection</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>2048x1536/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>2046x1534/SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <entry><emphasis>0,0/1280x960</emphasis></entry> + <entry><emphasis>1280x960/SGRBG8_1X8</emphasis></entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> @@ -249,19 +255,30 @@ <para> <orderedlist> - <listitem><para>Initial state. The sensor output is set to its native 3MP - resolution. Resolutions on the host frontend and scaler input and output - pads are undefined.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>The application configures the frontend input pad resolution to - 2048x1536. The driver propagates the format to the frontend output pad. - Note that the propagated output format can be different, as in this case, - than the input format, as the hardware might need to crop pixels (for - instance when converting a Bayer filter pattern to RGB or YUV).</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>The application configures the scaler input pad resolution to - 2046x1534 to match the frontend output resolution. The driver propagates - the format to the scaler output pad.</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>The application configures the scaler output pad resolution to - 1280x960.</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>Initial state. The sensor source pad format is + set to its native 3MP size and V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG8_1X8 + media bus code. Formats on the host frontend and scaler sink + and source pads have the default values, as well as the + compose rectangle on the scaler's sink pad.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para>The application configures the frontend sink + pad format's size to 2048x1536 and its media bus code to + V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG_1X8. The driver propagates the format to + the frontend source pad.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para>The application configures the scaler sink pad + format's size to 2046x1534 and the media bus code to + V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG_1X8 to match the frontend source size and + media bus code. The media bus code on the sink pad is set to + V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG_1X8. The driver propagates the size to the + compose selection rectangle on the scaler's sink pad, and the + format to the scaler source pad.</para></listitem> + + <listitem><para>The application configures the size of the compose + selection rectangle of the scaler's sink pad 1280x960. The driver + propagates the size to the scaler's source pad + format.</para></listitem> + </orderedlist> </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml index e5e8325aa3d7..1c17f802b471 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/io.xml @@ -1422,7 +1422,10 @@ one of the <constant>V4L2_FIELD_NONE</constant>, <constant>V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM</constant>, or <constant>V4L2_FIELD_INTERLACED</constant> formats is acceptable. Drivers choose depending on hardware capabilities or e. g. the -requested image size, and return the actual field order. &v4l2-buffer; +requested image size, and return the actual field order. Drivers must +never return <constant>V4L2_FIELD_ANY</constant>. If multiple +field orders are possible the driver must choose one of the possible +field orders during &VIDIOC-S-FMT; or &VIDIOC-TRY-FMT;. &v4l2-buffer; <structfield>field</structfield> can never be <constant>V4L2_FIELD_ANY</constant>.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml index df5b23d46552..ccf6053c1ae4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -296,343 +296,1003 @@ in the 2-planar version or with each component in its own buffer in the <section id="colorspaces"> <title>Colorspaces</title> - <para>[intro]</para> + <para>'Color' is a very complex concept and depends on physics, chemistry and +biology. Just because you have three numbers that describe the 'red', 'green' +and 'blue' components of the color of a pixel does not mean that you can accurately +display that color. A colorspace defines what it actually <emphasis>means</emphasis> +to have an RGB value of e.g. (255, 0, 0). That is, which color should be +reproduced on the screen in a perfectly calibrated environment.</para> - <!-- See proposal by Billy Biggs, video4linux-list@redhat.com -on 11 Oct 2002, subject: "Re: [V4L] Re: v4l2 api", and -http://vektor.theorem.ca/graphics/ycbcr/ and -http://www.poynton.com/notes/colour_and_gamma/ColorFAQ.html --> + <para>In order to do that we first need to have a good definition of +color, i.e. some way to uniquely and unambiguously define a color so that someone +else can reproduce it. Human color vision is trichromatic since the human eye has +color receptors that are sensitive to three different wavelengths of light. Hence +the need to use three numbers to describe color. Be glad you are not a mantis shrimp +as those are sensitive to 12 different wavelengths, so instead of RGB we would be +using the ABCDEFGHIJKL colorspace...</para> - <para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Gamma Correction</term> - <listitem> - <para>[to do]</para> - <para>E'<subscript>R</subscript> = f(R)</para> - <para>E'<subscript>G</subscript> = f(G)</para> - <para>E'<subscript>B</subscript> = f(B)</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Construction of luminance and color-difference -signals</term> - <listitem> - <para>[to do]</para> - <para>E'<subscript>Y</subscript> = -Coeff<subscript>R</subscript> E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ Coeff<subscript>G</subscript> E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ Coeff<subscript>B</subscript> E'<subscript>B</subscript></para> - <para>(E'<subscript>R</subscript> - E'<subscript>Y</subscript>) = E'<subscript>R</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>R</subscript> E'<subscript>R</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>G</subscript> E'<subscript>G</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>B</subscript> E'<subscript>B</subscript></para> - <para>(E'<subscript>B</subscript> - E'<subscript>Y</subscript>) = E'<subscript>B</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>R</subscript> E'<subscript>R</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>G</subscript> E'<subscript>G</subscript> -- Coeff<subscript>B</subscript> E'<subscript>B</subscript></para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Re-normalized color-difference signals</term> - <listitem> - <para>The color-difference signals are scaled back to unity -range [-0.5;+0.5]:</para> - <para>K<subscript>B</subscript> = 0.5 / (1 - Coeff<subscript>B</subscript>)</para> - <para>K<subscript>R</subscript> = 0.5 / (1 - Coeff<subscript>R</subscript>)</para> - <para>P<subscript>B</subscript> = -K<subscript>B</subscript> (E'<subscript>B</subscript> - E'<subscript>Y</subscript>) = - 0.5 (Coeff<subscript>R</subscript> / Coeff<subscript>B</subscript>) E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.5 (Coeff<subscript>G</subscript> / Coeff<subscript>B</subscript>) E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.5 E'<subscript>B</subscript></para> - <para>P<subscript>R</subscript> = -K<subscript>R</subscript> (E'<subscript>R</subscript> - E'<subscript>Y</subscript>) = - 0.5 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.5 (Coeff<subscript>G</subscript> / Coeff<subscript>R</subscript>) E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.5 (Coeff<subscript>B</subscript> / Coeff<subscript>R</subscript>) E'<subscript>B</subscript></para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Quantization</term> - <listitem> - <para>[to do]</para> - <para>Y' = (Lum. Levels - 1) · E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + Lum. Offset</para> - <para>C<subscript>B</subscript> = (Chrom. Levels - 1) -· P<subscript>B</subscript> + Chrom. Offset</para> - <para>C<subscript>R</subscript> = (Chrom. Levels - 1) -· P<subscript>R</subscript> + Chrom. Offset</para> - <para>Rounding to the nearest integer and clamping to the range -[0;255] finally yields the digital color components Y'CbCr -stored in YUV images.</para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </para> - - <example> - <title>ITU-R Rec. BT.601 color conversion</title> - - <para>Forward Transformation</para> - - <programlisting> -int ER, EG, EB; /* gamma corrected RGB input [0;255] */ -int Y1, Cb, Cr; /* output [0;255] */ - -double r, g, b; /* temporaries */ -double y1, pb, pr; - -int -clamp (double x) -{ - int r = x; /* round to nearest */ - - if (r < 0) return 0; - else if (r > 255) return 255; - else return r; -} - -r = ER / 255.0; -g = EG / 255.0; -b = EB / 255.0; - -y1 = 0.299 * r + 0.587 * g + 0.114 * b; -pb = -0.169 * r - 0.331 * g + 0.5 * b; -pr = 0.5 * r - 0.419 * g - 0.081 * b; - -Y1 = clamp (219 * y1 + 16); -Cb = clamp (224 * pb + 128); -Cr = clamp (224 * pr + 128); - -/* or shorter */ - -y1 = 0.299 * ER + 0.587 * EG + 0.114 * EB; - -Y1 = clamp ( (219 / 255.0) * y1 + 16); -Cb = clamp (((224 / 255.0) / (2 - 2 * 0.114)) * (EB - y1) + 128); -Cr = clamp (((224 / 255.0) / (2 - 2 * 0.299)) * (ER - y1) + 128); - </programlisting> - - <para>Inverse Transformation</para> - - <programlisting> -int Y1, Cb, Cr; /* gamma pre-corrected input [0;255] */ -int ER, EG, EB; /* output [0;255] */ - -double r, g, b; /* temporaries */ -double y1, pb, pr; - -int -clamp (double x) -{ - int r = x; /* round to nearest */ - - if (r < 0) return 0; - else if (r > 255) return 255; - else return r; -} - -y1 = (Y1 - 16) / 219.0; -pb = (Cb - 128) / 224.0; -pr = (Cr - 128) / 224.0; - -r = 1.0 * y1 + 0 * pb + 1.402 * pr; -g = 1.0 * y1 - 0.344 * pb - 0.714 * pr; -b = 1.0 * y1 + 1.772 * pb + 0 * pr; - -ER = clamp (r * 255); /* [ok? one should prob. limit y1,pb,pr] */ -EG = clamp (g * 255); -EB = clamp (b * 255); - </programlisting> - </example> - - <table pgwide="1" id="v4l2-colorspace" orient="land"> - <title>enum v4l2_colorspace</title> - <tgroup cols="11" align="center"> - <colspec align="left" /> - <colspec align="center" /> - <colspec align="left" /> - <colspec colname="cr" /> - <colspec colname="cg" /> - <colspec colname="cb" /> - <colspec colname="wp" /> - <colspec colname="gc" /> - <colspec colname="lum" /> - <colspec colname="qy" /> - <colspec colname="qc" /> - <spanspec namest="cr" nameend="cb" spanname="chrom" /> - <spanspec namest="qy" nameend="qc" spanname="quant" /> - <spanspec namest="lum" nameend="qc" spanname="spam" /> + <para>Color exists only in the eye and brain and is the result of how strongly +color receptors are stimulated. This is based on the Spectral +Power Distribution (SPD) which is a graph showing the intensity (radiant power) +of the light at wavelengths covering the visible spectrum as it enters the eye. +The science of colorimetry is about the relationship between the SPD and color as +perceived by the human brain.</para> + + <para>Since the human eye has only three color receptors it is perfectly +possible that different SPDs will result in the same stimulation of those receptors +and are perceived as the same color, even though the SPD of the light is +different.</para> + + <para>In the 1920s experiments were devised to determine the relationship +between SPDs and the perceived color and that resulted in the CIE 1931 standard +that defines spectral weighting functions that model the perception of color. +Specifically that standard defines functions that can take an SPD and calculate +the stimulus for each color receptor. After some further mathematical transforms +these stimuli are known as the <emphasis>CIE XYZ tristimulus</emphasis> values +and these X, Y and Z values describe a color as perceived by a human unambiguously. +These X, Y and Z values are all in the range [0…1].</para> + + <para>The Y value in the CIE XYZ colorspace corresponds to luminance. Often +the CIE XYZ colorspace is transformed to the normalized CIE xyY colorspace:</para> + + <para>x = X / (X + Y + Z)</para> + <para>y = Y / (X + Y + Z)</para> + + <para>The x and y values are the chromaticity coordinates and can be used to +define a color without the luminance component Y. It is very confusing to +have such similar names for these colorspaces. Just be aware that if colors +are specified with lower case 'x' and 'y', then the CIE xyY colorspace is +used. Upper case 'X' and 'Y' refer to the CIE XYZ colorspace. Also, y has nothing +to do with luminance. Together x and y specify a color, and Y the luminance. +That is really all you need to remember from a practical point of view. At +the end of this section you will find reading resources that go into much more +detail if you are interested. +</para> + + <para>A monitor or TV will reproduce colors by emitting light at three +different wavelengths, the combination of which will stimulate the color receptors +in the eye and thus cause the perception of color. Historically these wavelengths +were defined by the red, green and blue phosphors used in the displays. These +<emphasis>color primaries</emphasis> are part of what defines a colorspace.</para> + + <para>Different display devices will have different primaries and some +primaries are more suitable for some display technologies than others. This has +resulted in a variety of colorspaces that are used for different display +technologies or uses. To define a colorspace you need to define the three +color primaries (these are typically defined as x, y chromaticity coordinates +from the CIE xyY colorspace) but also the white reference: that is the color obtained +when all three primaries are at maximum power. This determines the relative power +or energy of the primaries. This is usually chosen to be close to daylight which has +been defined as the CIE D65 Illuminant.</para> + + <para>To recapitulate: the CIE XYZ colorspace uniquely identifies colors. +Other colorspaces are defined by three chromaticity coordinates defined in the +CIE xyY colorspace. Based on those a 3x3 matrix can be constructed that +transforms CIE XYZ colors to colors in the new colorspace. +</para> + + <para>Both the CIE XYZ and the RGB colorspace that are derived from the +specific chromaticity primaries are linear colorspaces. But neither the eye, +nor display technology is linear. Doubling the values of all components in +the linear colorspace will not be perceived as twice the intensity of the color. +So each colorspace also defines a transfer function that takes a linear color +component value and transforms it to the non-linear component value, which is a +closer match to the non-linear performance of both the eye and displays. Linear +component values are denoted RGB, non-linear are denoted as R'G'B'. In general +colors used in graphics are all R'G'B', except in openGL which uses linear RGB. +Special care should be taken when dealing with openGL to provide linear RGB colors +or to use the built-in openGL support to apply the inverse transfer function.</para> + + <para>The final piece that defines a colorspace is a function that +transforms non-linear R'G'B' to non-linear Y'CbCr. This function is determined +by the so-called luma coefficients. There may be multiple possible Y'CbCr +encodings allowed for the same colorspace. Many encodings of color +prefer to use luma (Y') and chroma (CbCr) instead of R'G'B'. Since the human +eye is more sensitive to differences in luminance than in color this encoding +allows one to reduce the amount of color information compared to the luma +data. Note that the luma (Y') is unrelated to the Y in the CIE XYZ colorspace. +Also note that Y'CbCr is often called YCbCr or YUV even though these are +strictly speaking wrong.</para> + + <para>Sometimes people confuse Y'CbCr as being a colorspace. This is not +correct, it is just an encoding of an R'G'B' color into luma and chroma +values. The underlying colorspace that is associated with the R'G'B' color +is also associated with the Y'CbCr color.</para> + + <para>The final step is how the RGB, R'G'B' or Y'CbCr values are +quantized. The CIE XYZ colorspace where X, Y and Z are in the range +[0…1] describes all colors that humans can perceive, but the transform to +another colorspace will produce colors that are outside the [0…1] range. +Once clamped to the [0…1] range those colors can no longer be reproduced +in that colorspace. This clamping is what reduces the extent or gamut of the +colorspace. How the range of [0…1] is translated to integer values in the +range of [0…255] (or higher, depending on the color depth) is called the +quantization. This is <emphasis>not</emphasis> part of the colorspace +definition. In practice RGB or R'G'B' values are full range, i.e. they +use the full [0…255] range. Y'CbCr values on the other hand are limited +range with Y' using [16…235] and Cb and Cr using [16…240].</para> + + <para>Unfortunately, in some cases limited range RGB is also used +where the components use the range [16…235]. And full range Y'CbCr also exists +using the [0…255] range.</para> + + <para>In order to correctly interpret a color you need to know the +quantization range, whether it is R'G'B' or Y'CbCr, the used Y'CbCr encoding +and the colorspace. +From that information you can calculate the corresponding CIE XYZ color +and map that again to whatever colorspace your display device uses.</para> + + <para>The colorspace definition itself consists of the three +chromaticity primaries, the white reference chromaticity, a transfer +function and the luma coefficients needed to transform R'G'B' to Y'CbCr. While +some colorspace standards correctly define all four, quite often the colorspace +standard only defines some, and you have to rely on other standards for +the missing pieces. The fact that colorspaces are often a mix of different +standards also led to very confusing naming conventions where the name of +a standard was used to name a colorspace when in fact that standard was +part of various other colorspaces as well.</para> + + <para>If you want to read more about colors and colorspaces, then the +following resources are useful: <xref linkend="poynton" /> is a good practical +book for video engineers, <xref linkend="colimg" /> has a much broader scope and +describes many more aspects of color (physics, chemistry, biology, etc.). +The <ulink url="http://www.brucelindbloom.com">http://www.brucelindbloom.com</ulink> +website is an excellent resource, especially with respect to the mathematics behind +colorspace conversions. The wikipedia <ulink url="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CIE_1931_color_space#CIE_xy_chromaticity_diagram_and_the_CIE_xyY_color_space">CIE 1931 colorspace</ulink> article +is also very useful.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Defining Colorspaces in V4L2</title> + <para>In V4L2 colorspaces are defined by three values. The first is the colorspace +identifier (&v4l2-colorspace;) which defines the chromaticities, the transfer +function, the default Y'CbCr encoding and the default quantization method. The second +is the Y'CbCr encoding identifier (&v4l2-ycbcr-encoding;) to specify non-standard +Y'CbCr encodings and the third is the quantization identifier (&v4l2-quantization;) +to specify non-standard quantization methods. Most of the time only the colorspace +field of &v4l2-pix-format; or &v4l2-pix-format-mplane; needs to be filled in. Note +that the default R'G'B' quantization is always full range for all colorspaces, +so this won't be mentioned explicitly for each colorspace description.</para> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-colorspace"> + <title>V4L2 Colorspaces</title> + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + &cs-def; <thead> <row> - <entry morerows="1">Identifier</entry> - <entry morerows="1">Value</entry> - <entry morerows="1">Description</entry> - <entry spanname="chrom">Chromaticities<footnote> - <para>The coordinates of the color primaries are -given in the CIE system (1931)</para> - </footnote></entry> - <entry morerows="1">White Point</entry> - <entry morerows="1">Gamma Correction</entry> - <entry morerows="1">Luminance E'<subscript>Y</subscript></entry> - <entry spanname="quant">Quantization</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Red</entry> - <entry>Green</entry> - <entry>Blue</entry> - <entry>Y'</entry> - <entry>Cb, Cr</entry> + <entry>Identifier</entry> + <entry>Details</entry> </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M</constant></entry> - <entry>1</entry> - <entry>NTSC/PAL according to <xref linkend="smpte170m" />, -<xref linkend="itu601" /></entry> - <entry>x = 0.630, y = 0.340</entry> - <entry>x = 0.310, y = 0.595</entry> - <entry>x = 0.155, y = 0.070</entry> - <entry>x = 0.3127, y = 0.3290, - Illuminant D<subscript>65</subscript></entry> - <entry>E' = 4.5 I for I ≤0.018, -1.099 I<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 < I</entry> - <entry>0.299 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.587 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.114 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>219 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-smpte-170m" />.</entry> </row> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant></entry> - <entry>2</entry> - <entry>1125-Line (US) HDTV, see <xref -linkend="smpte240m" /></entry> - <entry>x = 0.630, y = 0.340</entry> - <entry>x = 0.310, y = 0.595</entry> - <entry>x = 0.155, y = 0.070</entry> - <entry>x = 0.3127, y = 0.3290, - Illuminant D<subscript>65</subscript></entry> - <entry>E' = 4 I for I ≤0.0228, -1.1115 I<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.1115 for 0.0228 < I</entry> - <entry>0.212 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.701 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.087 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>219 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_REC709</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-rec709" />.</entry> </row> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_REC709</constant></entry> - <entry>3</entry> - <entry>HDTV and modern devices, see <xref -linkend="itu709" /></entry> - <entry>x = 0.640, y = 0.330</entry> - <entry>x = 0.300, y = 0.600</entry> - <entry>x = 0.150, y = 0.060</entry> - <entry>x = 0.3127, y = 0.3290, - Illuminant D<subscript>65</subscript></entry> - <entry>E' = 4.5 I for I ≤0.018, -1.099 I<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 < I</entry> - <entry>0.2125 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.7154 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.0721 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>219 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-srgb" />.</entry> </row> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_BT878</constant></entry> - <entry>4</entry> - <entry>Broken Bt878 extents<footnote> - <para>The ubiquitous Bt878 video capture chip -quantizes E'<subscript>Y</subscript> to 238 levels, yielding a range -of Y' = 16 … 253, unlike Rec. 601 Y' = 16 … -235. This is not a typo in the Bt878 documentation, it has been -implemented in silicon. The chroma extents are unclear.</para> - </footnote>, <xref linkend="itu601" /></entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>0.299 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.587 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.114 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry><emphasis>237</emphasis> E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128 (probably)</entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_ADOBERGB</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-adobergb" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_BT2020</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-bt2020" />.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant></entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-smpte-240m" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_M</constant></entry> - <entry>5</entry> - <entry>M/NTSC<footnote> - <para>No identifier exists for M/PAL which uses -the chromaticities of M/NTSC, the remaining parameters are equal to B and -G/PAL.</para> - </footnote> according to <xref linkend="itu470" />, <xref - linkend="itu601" /></entry> - <entry>x = 0.67, y = 0.33</entry> - <entry>x = 0.21, y = 0.71</entry> - <entry>x = 0.14, y = 0.08</entry> - <entry>x = 0.310, y = 0.316, Illuminant C</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>0.299 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.587 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.114 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>219 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-sysm" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_BG</constant></entry> - <entry>6</entry> - <entry>625-line PAL and SECAM systems according to <xref -linkend="itu470" />, <xref linkend="itu601" /></entry> - <entry>x = 0.64, y = 0.33</entry> - <entry>x = 0.29, y = 0.60</entry> - <entry>x = 0.15, y = 0.06</entry> - <entry>x = 0.313, y = 0.329, -Illuminant D<subscript>65</subscript></entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>0.299 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.587 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.114 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>219 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16</entry> - <entry>224 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-sysbg" />.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG</constant></entry> - <entry>7</entry> - <entry>JPEG Y'CbCr, see <xref linkend="jfif" />, <xref linkend="itu601" /></entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>?</entry> - <entry>0.299 E'<subscript>R</subscript> -+ 0.587 E'<subscript>G</subscript> -+ 0.114 E'<subscript>B</subscript></entry> - <entry>256 E'<subscript>Y</subscript> + 16<footnote> - <para>Note JFIF quantizes -Y'P<subscript>B</subscript>P<subscript>R</subscript> in range [0;+1] and -[-0.5;+0.5] to <emphasis>257</emphasis> levels, however Y'CbCr signals -are still clamped to [0;255].</para> - </footnote></entry> - <entry>256 P<subscript>B,R</subscript> + 128</entry> + <entry>See <xref linkend="col-jpeg" />.</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-ycbcr-encoding"> + <title>V4L2 Y'CbCr Encodings</title> + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + &cs-def; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Identifier</entry> + <entry>Details</entry> </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> <row> - <entry><constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant></entry> - <entry>8</entry> - <entry>[?]</entry> - <entry>x = 0.640, y = 0.330</entry> - <entry>x = 0.300, y = 0.600</entry> - <entry>x = 0.150, y = 0.060</entry> - <entry>x = 0.3127, y = 0.3290, - Illuminant D<subscript>65</subscript></entry> - <entry>E' = 4.5 I for I ≤0.018, -1.099 I<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 < I</entry> - <entry spanname="spam">n/a</entry> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_DEFAULT</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the default Y'CbCr encoding as defined by the colorspace.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the BT.601 Y'CbCr encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the Rec. 709 Y'CbCr encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the extended gamut xvYCC BT.601 encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the extended gamut xvYCC Rec. 709 encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SYCC</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the extended gamut sYCC encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the default non-constant luminance BT.2020 Y'CbCr encoding.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020_CONST_LUM</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the constant luminance BT.2020 Yc'CbcCrc encoding.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> + + <table pgwide="1" frame="none" id="v4l2-quantization"> + <title>V4L2 Quantization Methods</title> + <tgroup cols="2" align="left"> + &cs-def; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Identifier</entry> + <entry>Details</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_DEFAULT</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the default quantization encoding as defined by the colorspace. +This is always full range for R'G'B' and usually limited range for Y'CbCr.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_FULL_RANGE</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the full range quantization encoding. I.e. the range [0…1] +is mapped to [0…255] (with possible clipping to [1…254] to avoid the +0x00 and 0xff values). Cb and Cr are mapped from [-0.5…0.5] to [0…255] +(with possible clipping to [1…254] to avoid the 0x00 and 0xff values).</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_LIM_RANGE</constant></entry> + <entry>Use the limited range quantization encoding. I.e. the range [0…1] +is mapped to [16…235]. Cb and Cr are mapped from [-0.5…0.5] to [16…240]. +</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Detailed Colorspace Descriptions</title> + <section> + <title id="col-smpte-170m">Colorspace SMPTE 170M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE170M</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="smpte170m" /> standard defines the colorspace used by NTSC and PAL and by SDTV +in general. The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. +The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and +the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>SMPTE 170M Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.630</entry> + <entry>0.340</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.310</entry> + <entry>0.595</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.155</entry> + <entry>0.070</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <para>The red, green and blue chromaticities are also often referred to +as the SMPTE C set, so this colorspace is sometimes called SMPTE C as well.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The transfer function defined for SMPTE 170M is the same as the +one defined in Rec. 709. Normally L is in the range [0…1], but for the extended +gamut xvYCC encoding values outside that range are allowed.</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = -1.099(-L)<superscript>0.45</superscript> + 0.099 for L ≤ -0.018</para> + <para>L' = 4.5L for -0.018 < L < 0.018</para> + <para>L' = 1.099L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for L ≥ 0.018</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = -((L' - 0.099) / -1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≤ -0.081</para> + <para>L = L' / 4.5 for -0.081 < L' < 0.081</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.099) / 1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.081</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with +the following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.299R' + 0.587G' + 0.114B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.169R' - 0.331G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.419G' - 0.081B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. This conversion to Y'CbCr is identical to the one +defined in the <xref linkend="itu601" /> standard and this colorspace is sometimes called BT.601 as well, even +though BT.601 does not mention any color primaries.</para> + <para>The default quantization is limited range, but full range is possible although +rarely seen.</para> + <para>The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding as described above is the +default for this colorspace, but it can be overridden with <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant>, +in which case the Rec. 709 Y'CbCr encoding is used.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The xvYCC 601 encoding (<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>, <xref linkend="xvycc" />) is similar +to the BT.601 encoding, but it allows for R', G' and B' values that are outside the range +[0…1]. The resulting Y', Cb and Cr values are scaled and offset:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = (219 / 255) * (0.299R' + 0.587G' + 0.114B') + (16 / 255)</para> + <para>Cb = (224 / 255) * (-0.169R' - 0.331G' + 0.5B')</para> + <para>Cr = (224 / 255) * (0.5R' - 0.419G' - 0.081B')</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are clamped +to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The non-standard xvYCC 709 encoding can also be used by selecting +<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant>. The xvYCC encodings always use full range +quantization.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-rec709">Colorspace Rec. 709 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_REC709</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="itu709" /> standard defines the colorspace used by HDTV in general. The default +Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is +limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>Rec. 709 Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.640</entry> + <entry>0.330</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.300</entry> + <entry>0.600</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.150</entry> + <entry>0.060</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <para>The full name of this standard is Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function. Normally L is in the range [0…1], but for the extended +gamut xvYCC encoding values outside that range are allowed.</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = -1.099(-L)<superscript>0.45</superscript> + 0.099 for L ≤ -0.018</para> + <para>L' = 4.5L for -0.018 < L < 0.018</para> + <para>L' = 1.099L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for L ≥ 0.018</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = -((L' - 0.099) / -1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≤ -0.081</para> + <para>L = L' / 4.5 for -0.081 < L' < 0.081</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.099) / 1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.081</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the following +<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.2126R' + 0.7152G' + 0.0722B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.1146R' - 0.3854G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.4542G' - 0.0458B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5].</para> + <para>The default quantization is limited range, but full range is possible although +rarely seen.</para> + <para>The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_709</constant> encoding described above is the default +for this colorspace, but it can be overridden with <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>, in which +case the BT.601 Y'CbCr encoding is used.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The xvYCC 709 encoding (<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV709</constant>, <xref linkend="xvycc" />) +is similar to the Rec. 709 encoding, but it allows for R', G' and B' values that are outside the range +[0…1]. The resulting Y', Cb and Cr values are scaled and offset:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = (219 / 255) * (0.2126R' + 0.7152G' + 0.0722B') + (16 / 255)</para> + <para>Cb = (224 / 255) * (-0.1146R' - 0.3854G' + 0.5B')</para> + <para>Cr = (224 / 255) * (0.5R' - 0.4542G' - 0.0458B')</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are clamped +to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The non-standard xvYCC 601 encoding can also be used by +selecting <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant>. The xvYCC encodings always use full +range quantization.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-srgb">Colorspace sRGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="srgb" /> standard defines the colorspace used by most webcams and computer graphics. The +default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SYCC</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization +is full range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>sRGB Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.640</entry> + <entry>0.330</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.300</entry> + <entry>0.600</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.150</entry> + <entry>0.060</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <para>These chromaticities are identical to the Rec. 709 colorspace.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function. Note that negative values for L are only used by the Y'CbCr conversion.</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = -1.055(-L)<superscript>1/2.4</superscript> + 0.055 for L < -0.0031308</para> + <para>L' = 12.92L for -0.0031308 ≤ L ≤ 0.0031308</para> + <para>L' = 1.055L<superscript>1/2.4</superscript> - 0.055 for 0.0031308 < L ≤ 1</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = -((-L' + 0.055) / 1.055)<superscript>2.4</superscript> for L' < -0.04045</para> + <para>L = L' / 12.92 for -0.04045 ≤ L' ≤ 0.04045</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.055) / 1.055)<superscript>2.4</superscript> for L' > 0.04045</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the following +<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SYCC</constant> encoding as defined by <xref linkend="sycc" />:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.2990R' + 0.5870G' + 0.1140B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.1687R' - 0.3313G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.4187G' - 0.0813B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are clamped +to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SYCC</constant> quantization is always +full range. Although this Y'CbCr encoding looks very similar to the <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant> +encoding, it is not. The <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_XV601</constant> scales and offsets the Y'CbCr +values before quantization, but this encoding does not do that.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-adobergb">Colorspace Adobe RGB (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_ADOBERGB</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="adobergb" /> standard defines the colorspace used by computer graphics +that use the AdobeRGB colorspace. This is also known as the <xref linkend="oprgb" /> standard. +The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr +quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference +are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>Adobe RGB Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.6400</entry> + <entry>0.3300</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.2100</entry> + <entry>0.7100</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.1500</entry> + <entry>0.0600</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = L<superscript>1/2.19921875</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L'<superscript>2.19921875</superscript></para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the +following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.299R' + 0.587G' + 0.114B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.169R' - 0.331G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.419G' - 0.081B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. This transform is identical to one defined in +SMPTE 170M/BT.601. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-bt2020">Colorspace BT.2020 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_BT2020</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="itu2020" /> standard defines the colorspace used by Ultra-high definition +television (UHDTV). The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020</constant>. +The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and +the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>BT.2020 Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.708</entry> + <entry>0.292</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.170</entry> + <entry>0.797</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.131</entry> + <entry>0.046</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function (same as Rec. 709):</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = 4.5L for 0 ≤ L < 0.018</para> + <para>L' = 1.099L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 ≤ L ≤ 1</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L' / 4.5 for L' < 0.081</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.099) / 1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.081</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the +following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.2627R' + 0.6789G' + 0.0593B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.1396R' - 0.3604G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.4598G' - 0.0402B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.</para> + <para>There is also an alternate constant luminance R'G'B' to Yc'CbcCrc +(<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_BT2020_CONST_LUM</constant>) encoding:</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Luma:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Yc' = (0.2627R + 0.6789G + 0.0593B)'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>B' - Yc' ≤ 0:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Cbc = (B' - Y') / 1.9404</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>B' - Yc' > 0:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Cbc = (B' - Y') / 1.5816</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>R' - Yc' ≤ 0:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Crc = (R' - Y') / 1.7184</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>R' - Yc' > 0:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Crc = (R' - Y') / 0.9936</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Yc' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cbc and Crc are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Yc'CbcCrc quantization is limited range.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-smpte-240m">Colorspace SMPTE 240M (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SMPTE240M</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="smpte240m" /> standard was an interim standard used during the early days of HDTV (1988-1998). +It has been superseded by Rec. 709. The default Y'CbCr encoding is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SMPTE240M</constant>. +The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. The chromaticities of the primary colors and the +white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>SMPTE 240M Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.630</entry> + <entry>0.340</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.310</entry> + <entry>0.595</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.155</entry> + <entry>0.070</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <para>These chromaticities are identical to the SMPTE 170M colorspace.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = 4L for 0 ≤ L < 0.0228</para> + <para>L' = 1.1115L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.1115 for 0.0228 ≤ L ≤ 1</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L' / 4 for 0 ≤ L' < 0.0913</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.1115) / 1.1115)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.0913</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the +following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_SMPTE240M</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.2122R' + 0.7013G' + 0.0865B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.1161R' - 0.3839G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.4451G' - 0.0549B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Yc' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cbc and Crc are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-sysm">Colorspace NTSC 1953 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_M</constant>)</title> + <para>This standard defines the colorspace used by NTSC in 1953. In practice this +colorspace is obsolete and SMPTE 170M should be used instead. The default Y'CbCr encoding +is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. +The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>NTSC 1953 Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.67</entry> + <entry>0.33</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.21</entry> + <entry>0.71</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.14</entry> + <entry>0.08</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (C)</entry> + <entry>0.310</entry> + <entry>0.316</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <para>Note that this colorspace uses Illuminant C instead of D65 as the +white reference. To correctly convert an image in this colorspace to another +that uses D65 you need to apply a chromatic adaptation algorithm such as the +Bradford method.</para> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The transfer function was never properly defined for NTSC 1953. The +Rec. 709 transfer function is recommended in the literature:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = 4.5L for 0 ≤ L < 0.018</para> + <para>L' = 1.099L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 ≤ L ≤ 1</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L' / 4.5 for L' < 0.081</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.099) / 1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.081</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the +following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.299R' + 0.587G' + 0.114B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.169R' - 0.331G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.419G' - 0.081B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. +This transform is identical to one defined in SMPTE 170M/BT.601.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-sysbg">Colorspace EBU Tech. 3213 (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_470_SYSTEM_BG</constant>)</title> + <para>The <xref linkend="tech3213" /> standard defines the colorspace used by PAL/SECAM in 1975. In practice this +colorspace is obsolete and SMPTE 170M should be used instead. The default Y'CbCr encoding +is <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant>. The default Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. +The chromaticities of the primary colors and the white reference are:</para> + <table frame="none"> + <title>EBU Tech. 3213 Chromaticities</title> + <tgroup cols="3" align="left"> + &cs-str; + <thead> + <row> + <entry>Color</entry> + <entry>x</entry> + <entry>y</entry> + </row> + </thead> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>Red</entry> + <entry>0.64</entry> + <entry>0.33</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Green</entry> + <entry>0.29</entry> + <entry>0.60</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>Blue</entry> + <entry>0.15</entry> + <entry>0.06</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>White Reference (D65)</entry> + <entry>0.3127</entry> + <entry>0.3290</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The transfer function was never properly defined for this colorspace. +The Rec. 709 transfer function is recommended in the literature:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L' = 4.5L for 0 ≤ L < 0.018</para> + <para>L' = 1.099L<superscript>0.45</superscript> - 0.099 for 0.018 ≤ L ≤ 1</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> + <term>Inverse Transfer function:</term> + <listitem> + <para>L = L' / 4.5 for L' < 0.081</para> + <para>L = ((L' + 0.099) / 1.099)<superscript>1/0.45</superscript> for L' ≥ 0.081</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>The luminance (Y') and color difference (Cb and Cr) are obtained with the +following <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> encoding:</term> + <listitem> + <para>Y' = 0.299R' + 0.587G' + 0.114B'</para> + <para>Cb = -0.169R' - 0.331G' + 0.5B'</para> + <para>Cr = 0.5R' - 0.419G' - 0.081B'</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + <para>Y' is clamped to the range [0…1] and Cb and Cr are +clamped to the range [-0.5…0.5]. The Y'CbCr quantization is limited range. +This transform is identical to one defined in SMPTE 170M/BT.601.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title id="col-jpeg">Colorspace JPEG (<constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG</constant>)</title> + <para>This colorspace defines the colorspace used by most (Motion-)JPEG formats. The chromaticities +of the primary colors and the white reference are identical to sRGB. The Y'CbCr encoding is +<constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> with full range quantization where +Y' is scaled to [0…255] and Cb/Cr are scaled to [-128…128] and +then clipped to [-128…127].</para> + <para>Note that the JPEG standard does not actually store colorspace information. +So if something other than sRGB is used, then the driver will have to set that information +explicitly. Effectively <constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_JPEG</constant> can be considered to be +an abbreviation for <constant>V4L2_COLORSPACE_SRGB</constant>, <constant>V4L2_YCBCR_ENC_601</constant> +and <constant>V4L2_QUANTIZATION_FULL_RANGE</constant>.</para> + </section> + </section> <section id="pixfmt-indexed"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml index 7502f784b8cc..d6d56fb6f9c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/selections-common.xml @@ -63,6 +63,22 @@ <entry>Yes</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_NATIVE_SIZE</constant></entry> + <entry>0x0003</entry> + <entry>The native size of the device, e.g. a sensor's + pixel array. <structfield>left</structfield> and + <structfield>top</structfield> fields are zero for this + target. Setting the native size will generally only make + sense for memory to memory devices where the software can + create a canvas of a given size in which for example a + video frame can be composed. In that case + V4L2_SEL_TGT_NATIVE_SIZE can be used to configure the size + of that canvas. + </entry> + <entry>Yes</entry> + <entry>Yes</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_COMPOSE</constant></entry> <entry>0x0100</entry> <entry>Compose rectangle. Used to configure scaling diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml index b2d5a0363cba..18730b96e1e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/subdev-formats.xml @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ green and 5-bit blue values padded on the high bit, transferred as 2 8-bit samples per pixel with the most significant bits (padding, red and half of the green value) transferred first will be named - <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_BE</constant>. + <constant>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_BE</constant>. </para> <para>The following tables list existing packed RGB formats.</para> @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB444-2X8-PADHI-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB444-2X8-PADHI-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> <entry>0x1001</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB444-2X8-PADHI-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB444-2X8-PADHI-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB444_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> <entry>0x1002</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -232,8 +232,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB555-2X8-PADHI-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB555-2X8-PADHI-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> <entry>0x1003</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -260,8 +260,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB555-2X8-PADHI-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB555-2X8-PADHI-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB555_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> <entry>0x1004</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -288,8 +288,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-BGR565-2X8-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-BGR565-2X8-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_BE</entry> <entry>0x1005</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-BGR565-2X8-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-BGR565-2X8-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_BGR565_2X8_LE</entry> <entry>0x1006</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -344,8 +344,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB565-2X8-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB565-2X8-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_BE</entry> <entry>0x1007</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -372,8 +372,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB565-2X8-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB565-2X8-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB565_2X8_LE</entry> <entry>0x1008</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -400,8 +400,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB666-1X18"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB666_1X18</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB666-1X18"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB666_1X18</entry> <entry>0x1009</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-14; @@ -424,8 +424,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-1X24"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_1X24</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB888-1X24"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB888_1X24</entry> <entry>0x100a</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-8; @@ -454,8 +454,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_BE</entry> <entry>0x100b</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -490,8 +490,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-RGB888-2X12-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_RGB888_2X12_LE</entry> <entry>0x100c</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -526,8 +526,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-ARGB888-1X32"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_ARGB888_1X32</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-ARGB888-1X32"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_ARGB888_1X32</entry> <entry>0x100d</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>a<subscript>7</subscript></entry> @@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ <para>For instance, a format with uncompressed 10-bit Bayer components arranged in a red, green, green, blue pattern transferred as 2 8-bit samples per pixel with the least significant bits transferred first will - be named <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB10_2X8_PADHI_LE</constant>. + be named <constant>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB10_2X8_PADHI_LE</constant>. </para> <figure id="bayer-patterns"> @@ -663,8 +663,8 @@ </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3001</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -680,8 +680,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGBRG8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGBRG8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3013</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -697,8 +697,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGRBG8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGRBG8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3002</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -714,8 +714,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SRGGB8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3014</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -731,8 +731,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-ALAW8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-ALAW8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3015</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -748,8 +748,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG10-ALAW8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGBRG10-ALAW8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGBRG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3016</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -765,8 +765,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG10-ALAW8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGRBG10-ALAW8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGRBG10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3017</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -782,8 +782,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB10-ALAW8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SRGGB10-ALAW8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB10_ALAW8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3018</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -799,8 +799,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-DPCM8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-DPCM8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x300b</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -816,8 +816,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG10-DPCM8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGBRG10-DPCM8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGBRG10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x300c</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -833,8 +833,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG10-DPCM8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGRBG10-DPCM8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGRBG10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3009</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -850,8 +850,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB10-DPCM8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SRGGB10-DPCM8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x300d</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -867,8 +867,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADHI-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADHI-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADHI_BE</entry> <entry>0x3003</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -901,8 +901,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADHI-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADHI-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADHI_LE</entry> <entry>0x3004</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -935,8 +935,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>9</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>8</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADLO-BE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADLO_BE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADLO-BE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADLO_BE</entry> <entry>0x3005</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -969,8 +969,8 @@ <entry>0</entry> <entry>0</entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADLO-LE"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADLO_LE</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-2X8-PADLO-LE"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_2X8_PADLO_LE</entry> <entry>0x3006</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -1003,8 +1003,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>3</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>2</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-1X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_1X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR10-1X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR10_1X10</entry> <entry>0x3007</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -1020,8 +1020,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG10-1X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG10_1X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGBRG10-1X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGBRG10_1X10</entry> <entry>0x300e</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -1037,8 +1037,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG10-1X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG10_1X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGRBG10-1X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGRBG10_1X10</entry> <entry>0x300a</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -1054,8 +1054,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB10-1X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB10_1X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SRGGB10-1X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB10_1X10</entry> <entry>0x300f</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -1071,8 +1071,8 @@ <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR12-1X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR12_1X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SBGGR12-1X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SBGGR12_1X12</entry> <entry>0x3008</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>b<subscript>11</subscript></entry> @@ -1088,8 +1088,8 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG12-1X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG12_1X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGBRG12-1X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGBRG12_1X12</entry> <entry>0x3010</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>g<subscript>11</subscript></entry> @@ -1105,8 +1105,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG12-1X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG12_1X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SGRBG12-1X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SGRBG12_1X12</entry> <entry>0x3011</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>g<subscript>11</subscript></entry> @@ -1122,8 +1122,8 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB12-1X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB12_1X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-SRGGB12-1X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_SRGGB12_1X12</entry> <entry>0x3012</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>r<subscript>11</subscript></entry> @@ -1175,7 +1175,7 @@ <para>For instance, a format where pixels are encoded as 8-bit YUV values downsampled to 4:2:2 and transferred as 2 8-bit bus samples per pixel in the - U, Y, V, Y order will be named <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</constant>. + U, Y, V, Y order will be named <constant>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</constant>. </para> <para><xref linkend="v4l2-mbus-pixelcode-yuv8"/> lists existing packed YUV @@ -1280,8 +1280,8 @@ </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-Y8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-Y8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_Y8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x2001</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1294,8 +1294,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UV8-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UV8_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UV8-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UV8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x2015</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1322,8 +1322,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-1_5X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1_5X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY8-1_5X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY8_1_5X8</entry> <entry>0x2002</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1406,8 +1406,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY8-1_5X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_1_5X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY8-1_5X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY8_1_5X8</entry> <entry>0x2003</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1490,8 +1490,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV8-1_5X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_1_5X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV8-1_5X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV8_1_5X8</entry> <entry>0x2004</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1574,8 +1574,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU8-1_5X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_1_5X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU8-1_5X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU8_1_5X8</entry> <entry>0x2005</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1658,8 +1658,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-2X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY8-2X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY8_2X8</entry> <entry>0x2006</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1714,8 +1714,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY8-2X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_2X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY8-2X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY8_2X8</entry> <entry>0x2007</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1770,8 +1770,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV8-2X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV8-2X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8</entry> <entry>0x2008</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1826,8 +1826,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU8-2X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_2X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU8-2X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU8_2X8</entry> <entry>0x2009</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-24; @@ -1882,8 +1882,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-Y10-1X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y10_1X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-Y10-1X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_Y10_1X10</entry> <entry>0x200a</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-22; @@ -1898,8 +1898,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY10-2X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY10_2X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY10-2X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY10_2X10</entry> <entry>0x2018</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-22; @@ -1962,8 +1962,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY10-2X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY10_2X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY10-2X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY10_2X10</entry> <entry>0x2019</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-22; @@ -2026,8 +2026,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV10-2X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV10_2X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV10-2X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV10_2X10</entry> <entry>0x200b</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-22; @@ -2090,8 +2090,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU10-2X10"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU10_2X10</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU10-2X10"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU10_2X10</entry> <entry>0x200c</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-22; @@ -2154,8 +2154,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-Y12-1X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y12_1X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-Y12-1X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_Y12_1X12</entry> <entry>0x2013</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -2172,8 +2172,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-1X16"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1X16</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY8-1X16"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x200f</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-16; @@ -2216,8 +2216,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY8-1X16"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY8_1X16</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY8-1X16"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x2010</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-16; @@ -2260,8 +2260,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV8-1X16"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_1X16</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV8-1X16"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x2011</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-16; @@ -2304,8 +2304,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU8-1X16"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU8_1X16</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU8-1X16"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x2012</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-16; @@ -2348,8 +2348,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YDYUYDYV8-1X16"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YDYUYDYV8_1X16</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YDYUYDYV8-1X16"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YDYUYDYV8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x2014</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-16; @@ -2436,8 +2436,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY10-1X20"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY10_1X20</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY10-1X20"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY10_1X20</entry> <entry>0x201a</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-12; @@ -2488,8 +2488,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY10-1X20"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY10_1X20</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY10-1X20"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY10_1X20</entry> <entry>0x201b</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-12; @@ -2540,8 +2540,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV10-1X20"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV10_1X20</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV10-1X20"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV10_1X20</entry> <entry>0x200d</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-12; @@ -2592,8 +2592,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU10-1X20"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU10_1X20</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU10-1X20"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU10_1X20</entry> <entry>0x200e</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-12; @@ -2644,8 +2644,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUV10-1X30"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUV10_1X30</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUV10-1X30"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUV10_1X30</entry> <entry>0x2016</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>-</entry> @@ -2681,8 +2681,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-AYUV8-1X32"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_AYUV8_1X32</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-AYUV8-1X32"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_AYUV8_1X32</entry> <entry>0x2017</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>a<subscript>7</subscript></entry> @@ -2718,8 +2718,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY12-2X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY12_2X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY12-2X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY12_2X12</entry> <entry>0x201c</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -2790,8 +2790,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY12-2X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY12_2X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY12-2X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY12_2X12</entry> <entry>0x201d</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -2862,8 +2862,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV12-2X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV12_2X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV12-2X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV12_2X12</entry> <entry>0x201e</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -2934,8 +2934,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU12-2X12"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU12_2X12</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU12-2X12"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU12_2X12</entry> <entry>0x201f</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-20; @@ -3006,8 +3006,8 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY12-1X24"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY12_1X24</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-UYVY12-1X24"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_UYVY12_1X24</entry> <entry>0x2020</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-8; @@ -3066,8 +3066,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-VYUY12-1X24"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_VYUY12_1X24</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-VYUY12-1X24"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_VYUY12_1X24</entry> <entry>0x2021</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-8; @@ -3126,8 +3126,8 @@ <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YUYV12-1X24"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV12_1X24</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YUYV12-1X24"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV12_1X24</entry> <entry>0x2022</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-8; @@ -3186,8 +3186,8 @@ <entry>v<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>v<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-YVYU12-1X24"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YVYU12_1X24</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-YVYU12-1X24"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YVYU12_1X24</entry> <entry>0x2023</entry> <entry></entry> &dash-ent-8; @@ -3366,8 +3366,8 @@ </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-AHSV8888-1X32"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_AHSV8888_1X32</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-AHSV8888-1X32"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_AHSV8888_1X32</entry> <entry>0x6001</entry> <entry></entry> <entry>a<subscript>7</subscript></entry> @@ -3422,7 +3422,7 @@ </para> <para>For instance, for a JPEG baseline process and an 8-bit bus width - the format will be named <constant>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</constant>. + the format will be named <constant>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</constant>. </para> <para>The following table lists existing JPEG compressed formats.</para> @@ -3441,8 +3441,8 @@ </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-JPEG-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-JPEG-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_JPEG_1X8</entry> <entry>0x4001</entry> <entry>Besides of its usage for the parallel bus this format is recommended for transmission of JPEG data over MIPI CSI bus @@ -3484,8 +3484,8 @@ interface and may change in the future.</para> </row> </thead> <tbody valign="top"> - <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPEG-1X8"> - <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPEG_1X8</entry> + <row id="MEDIA-BUS-FMT-S5C-UYVY-JPEG-1X8"> + <entry>MEDIA_BUS_FMT_S5C_UYVY_JPEG_1X8</entry> <entry>0x5001</entry> <entry> Interleaved raw UYVY and JPEG image format with embedded diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml index 493a39a8ef21..603fecef9083 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml @@ -287,6 +287,14 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009. <entry>0x00000004</entry> <entry>This input supports setting the TV standard by using VIDIOC_S_STD.</entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_NATIVE_SIZE</constant></entry> + <entry>0x00000008</entry> + <entry>This input supports setting the native size using + the <constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_NATIVE_SIZE</constant> + selection target, see <xref + linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml index 2654e097df39..773fb1258c24 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media/v4l/vidioc-enumoutput.xml @@ -172,6 +172,14 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009. <entry>0x00000004</entry> <entry>This output supports setting the TV standard by using VIDIOC_S_STD.</entry> </row> + <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_NATIVE_SIZE</constant></entry> + <entry>0x00000008</entry> + <entry>This output supports setting the native size using + the <constant>V4L2_SEL_TGT_NATIVE_SIZE</constant> + selection target, see <xref + linkend="v4l2-selections-common"/>.</entry> + </row> </tbody> </tgroup> </table> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 784793df81ed..84ef6a90131c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -3658,6 +3658,29 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { </para> <para> + The above callback can be simplified with a helper function, + <function>snd_ctl_enum_info</function>. The final code + looks like below. + (You can pass ARRAY_SIZE(texts) instead of 4 in the third + argument; it's a matter of taste.) + + <informalexample> + <programlisting> +<![CDATA[ + static int snd_myctl_enum_info(struct snd_kcontrol *kcontrol, + struct snd_ctl_elem_info *uinfo) + { + static char *texts[4] = { + "First", "Second", "Third", "Fourth" + }; + return snd_ctl_enum_info(uinfo, 1, 4, texts); + } +]]> + </programlisting> + </informalexample> + </para> + + <para> Some common info callbacks are available for your convenience: <function>snd_ctl_boolean_mono_info()</function> and <function>snd_ctl_boolean_stereo_info()</function>. diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO index 57cf5efb044d..93aa8604630e 100644 --- a/Documentation/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/HOWTO @@ -324,7 +324,6 @@ tree, they need to be integration-tested. For this purpose, a special testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are pulled on an almost daily basis: http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git - http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be expected to go into the mainline kernel at the next merge period. diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt index f13c9132e9f2..653d5d739d7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt +++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt @@ -42,7 +42,13 @@ The driver interface depends on your hardware. If your system properly provides the SMBIOS info for IPMI, the driver will detect it and just work. If you have a board with a standard interface (These will generally be either "KCS", "SMIC", or "BT", consult your hardware -manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option. +manual), choose the 'IPMI SI handler' option. A driver also exists +for direct I2C access to the IPMI management controller. Some boards +support this, but it is unknown if it will work on every board. For +this, choose 'IPMI SMBus handler', but be ready to try to do some +figuring to see if it will work on your system if the SMBIOS/APCI +information is wrong or not present. It is fairly safe to have both +these enabled and let the drivers auto-detect what is present. You should generally enable ACPI on your system, as systems with IPMI can have ACPI tables describing them. @@ -52,7 +58,8 @@ their job correctly, the IPMI controller should be automatically detected (via ACPI or SMBIOS tables) and should just work. Sadly, many boards do not have this information. The driver attempts standard defaults, but they may not work. If you fall into this -situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver'. +situation, you need to read the section below named 'The SI Driver' or +"The SMBus Driver" on how to hand-configure your system. IPMI defines a standard watchdog timer. You can enable this with the 'IPMI Watchdog Timer' config option. If you compile the driver into @@ -97,7 +104,12 @@ driver, each open file for this device ties in to the message handler as an IPMI user. ipmi_si - A driver for various system interfaces. This supports KCS, -SMIC, and BT interfaces. +SMIC, and BT interfaces. Unless you have an SMBus interface or your +own custom interface, you probably need to use this. + +ipmi_ssif - A driver for accessing BMCs on the SMBus. It uses the +I2C kernel driver's SMBus interfaces to send and receive IPMI messages +over the SMBus. ipmi_watchdog - IPMI requires systems to have a very capable watchdog timer. This driver implements the standard Linux watchdog timer @@ -476,6 +488,62 @@ for specifying an interface. Note that when removing an interface, only the first three parameters (si type, address type, and address) are used for the comparison. Any options are ignored for removing. +The SMBus Driver (SSIF) +----------------------- + +The SMBus driver allows up to 4 SMBus devices to be configured in the +system. By default, the driver will only register with something it +finds in DMI or ACPI tables. You can change this +at module load time (for a module) with: + + modprobe ipmi_ssif.o + addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[,...]] + adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]] + dbg=<flags1>,<flags2>... + slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,... + [dbg_probe=1] + +The addresses are normal I2C addresses. The adapter is the string +name of the adapter, as shown in /sys/class/i2c-adapter/i2c-<n>/name. +It is *NOT* i2c-<n> itself. + +The debug flags are bit flags for each BMC found, they are: +IPMI messages: 1, driver state: 2, timing: 4, I2C probe: 8 + +Setting dbg_probe to 1 will enable debugging of the probing and +detection process for BMCs on the SMBusses. + +The slave_addrs specifies the IPMI address of the local BMC. This is +usually 0x20 and the driver defaults to that, but in case it's not, it +can be specified when the driver starts up. + +Discovering the IPMI compliant BMC on the SMBus can cause devices on +the I2C bus to fail. The SMBus driver writes a "Get Device ID" IPMI +message as a block write to the I2C bus and waits for a response. +This action can be detrimental to some I2C devices. It is highly +recommended that the known I2C address be given to the SMBus driver in +the smb_addr parameter unless you have DMI or ACPI data to tell the +driver what to use. + +When compiled into the kernel, the addresses can be specified on the +kernel command line as: + + ipmb_ssif.addr=<i2caddr1>[,<i2caddr2>[...]] + ipmi_ssif.adapter=<adapter1>[,<adapter2>[...]] + ipmi_ssif.dbg=<flags1>[,<flags2>[...]] + ipmi_ssif.dbg_probe=1 + ipmi_ssif.slave_addrs=<addr1>[,<addr2>[...]] + +These are the same options as on the module command line. + +The I2C driver does not support non-blocking access or polling, so +this driver cannod to IPMI panic events, extend the watchdog at panic +time, or other panic-related IPMI functions without special kernel +patches and driver modifications. You can get those at the openipmi +web page. + +The driver supports a hot add and remove of interfaces through the I2C +sysfs interface. Other Pieces ------------ diff --git a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt index 8a8b82c9ca53..39cfa72732ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt +++ b/Documentation/IRQ-domain.txt @@ -151,3 +151,74 @@ used and no descriptor gets allocated it is very important to make sure that the driver using the simple domain call irq_create_mapping() before any irq_find_mapping() since the latter will actually work for the static IRQ assignment case. + +==== Hierarchy IRQ domain ==== +On some architectures, there may be multiple interrupt controllers +involved in delivering an interrupt from the device to the target CPU. +Let's look at a typical interrupt delivering path on x86 platforms: + +Device --> IOAPIC -> Interrupt remapping Controller -> Local APIC -> CPU + +There are three interrupt controllers involved: +1) IOAPIC controller +2) Interrupt remapping controller +3) Local APIC controller + +To support such a hardware topology and make software architecture match +hardware architecture, an irq_domain data structure is built for each +interrupt controller and those irq_domains are organized into hierarchy. +When building irq_domain hierarchy, the irq_domain near to the device is +child and the irq_domain near to CPU is parent. So a hierarchy structure +as below will be built for the example above. + CPU Vector irq_domain (root irq_domain to manage CPU vectors) + ^ + | + Interrupt Remapping irq_domain (manage irq_remapping entries) + ^ + | + IOAPIC irq_domain (manage IOAPIC delivery entries/pins) + +There are four major interfaces to use hierarchy irq_domain: +1) irq_domain_alloc_irqs(): allocate IRQ descriptors and interrupt + controller related resources to deliver these interrupts. +2) irq_domain_free_irqs(): free IRQ descriptors and interrupt controller + related resources associated with these interrupts. +3) irq_domain_activate_irq(): activate interrupt controller hardware to + deliver the interrupt. +3) irq_domain_deactivate_irq(): deactivate interrupt controller hardware + to stop delivering the interrupt. + +Following changes are needed to support hierarchy irq_domain. +1) a new field 'parent' is added to struct irq_domain; it's used to + maintain irq_domain hierarchy information. +2) a new field 'parent_data' is added to struct irq_data; it's used to + build hierarchy irq_data to match hierarchy irq_domains. The irq_data + is used to store irq_domain pointer and hardware irq number. +3) new callbacks are added to struct irq_domain_ops to support hierarchy + irq_domain operations. + +With support of hierarchy irq_domain and hierarchy irq_data ready, an +irq_domain structure is built for each interrupt controller, and an +irq_data structure is allocated for each irq_domain associated with an +IRQ. Now we could go one step further to support stacked(hierarchy) +irq_chip. That is, an irq_chip is associated with each irq_data along +the hierarchy. A child irq_chip may implement a required action by +itself or by cooperating with its parent irq_chip. + +With stacked irq_chip, interrupt controller driver only needs to deal +with the hardware managed by itself and may ask for services from its +parent irq_chip when needed. So we could achieve a much cleaner +software architecture. + +For an interrupt controller driver to support hierarchy irq_domain, it +needs to: +1) Implement irq_domain_ops.alloc and irq_domain_ops.free +2) Optionally implement irq_domain_ops.activate and + irq_domain_ops.deactivate. +3) Optionally implement an irq_chip to manage the interrupt controller + hardware. +4) No need to implement irq_domain_ops.map and irq_domain_ops.unmap, + they are unused with hierarchy irq_domain. + +Hierarchy irq_domain may also be used to support other architectures, +such as ARM, ARM64 etc. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt index bf778332a28f..745f429fda79 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu.txt @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ o How can the updater tell when a grace period has completed executed in user mode, or executed in the idle loop, we can safely free up that item. - Preemptible variants of RCU (CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU) get the + Preemptible variants of RCU (CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU) get the same effect, but require that the readers manipulate CPU-local counters. These counters allow limited types of blocking within RCU read-side critical sections. SRCU also uses CPU-local @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ o I hear that RCU is patented? What is with that? o I hear that RCU needs work in order to support realtime kernels? This work is largely completed. Realtime-friendly RCU can be - enabled via the CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel configuration + enabled via the CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU kernel configuration parameter. However, work is in progress for enabling priority boosting of preempted RCU read-side critical sections. This is needed if you have CPU-bound realtime threads. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index ef5a2fd4ff70..ed186a902d31 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -26,12 +26,6 @@ CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_TIMEOUT Stall-warning messages may be enabled and disabled completely via /sys/module/rcupdate/parameters/rcu_cpu_stall_suppress. -CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_VERBOSE - - This kernel configuration parameter causes the stall warning to - also dump the stacks of any tasks that are blocking the current - RCU-preempt grace period. - CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_INFO This kernel configuration parameter causes the stall warning to @@ -77,7 +71,7 @@ This message indicates that CPU 5 detected that it was causing a stall, and that the stall was affecting RCU-sched. This message will normally be followed by a stack dump of the offending CPU. On TREE_RCU kernel builds, RCU and RCU-sched are implemented by the same underlying mechanism, -while on TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel builds, RCU is instead implemented +while on PREEMPT_RCU kernel builds, RCU is instead implemented by rcu_preempt_state. On the other hand, if the offending CPU fails to print out a stall-warning @@ -89,7 +83,7 @@ INFO: rcu_bh_state detected stalls on CPUs/tasks: { 3 5 } (detected by 2, 2502 j This message indicates that CPU 2 detected that CPUs 3 and 5 were both causing stalls, and that the stall was affecting RCU-bh. This message will normally be followed by stack dumps for each CPU. Please note that -TREE_PREEMPT_RCU builds can be stalled by tasks as well as by CPUs, +PREEMPT_RCU builds can be stalled by tasks as well as by CPUs, and that the tasks will be indicated by PID, for example, "P3421". It is even possible for a rcu_preempt_state stall to be caused by both CPUs -and- tasks, in which case the offending CPUs and tasks will all @@ -205,10 +199,10 @@ o A CPU-bound real-time task in a CONFIG_PREEMPT kernel, which might o A CPU-bound real-time task in a CONFIG_PREEMPT_RT kernel that is running at a higher priority than the RCU softirq threads. This will prevent RCU callbacks from ever being invoked, - and in a CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel will further prevent + and in a CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU kernel will further prevent RCU grace periods from ever completing. Either way, the system will eventually run out of memory and hang. In the - CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU case, you might see stall-warning + CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU case, you might see stall-warning messages. o A hardware or software issue shuts off the scheduler-clock diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 910870b15acd..b63b9bb3bc0c 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats, first for rcutree and next for rcutiny. -CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats +CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats These implementations of RCU provide several debugfs directories under the top-level directory "rcu": @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ rcu/rcu_preempt rcu/rcu_sched Each directory contains files for the corresponding flavor of RCU. -Note that rcu/rcu_preempt is only present for CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU. +Note that rcu/rcu_preempt is only present for CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU. For CONFIG_TREE_RCU, the RCU flavor maps onto the RCU-sched flavor, so that activity for both appears in rcu/rcu_sched. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt index e48c57f1943b..88dfce182f66 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ rcu_read_lock() Used by a reader to inform the reclaimer that the reader is entering an RCU read-side critical section. It is illegal to block while in an RCU read-side critical section, though - kernels built with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU can preempt RCU + kernels built with CONFIG_PREEMPT_RCU can preempt RCU read-side critical sections. Any RCU-protected data structure accessed during an RCU read-side critical section is guaranteed to remain unreclaimed for the full duration of that critical section. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 482c74947de0..1fa1caa198eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -483,12 +483,10 @@ have been included in the discussion 14) Using Reported-by:, Tested-by:, Reviewed-by:, Suggested-by: and Fixes: -If this patch fixes a problem reported by somebody else, consider adding a -Reported-by: tag to credit the reporter for their contribution. Please -note that this tag should not be added without the reporter's permission, -especially if the problem was not reported in a public forum. That said, -if we diligently credit our bug reporters, they will, hopefully, be -inspired to help us again in the future. +The Reported-by tag gives credit to people who find bugs and report them and it +hopefully inspires them to help us again in the future. Please note that if +the bug was reported in private, then ask for permission first before using the +Reported-by tag. A Tested-by: tag indicates that the patch has been successfully tested (in some environment) by the person named. This tag informs maintainers that diff --git a/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt b/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ae36fcf86dc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +_DSD Device Properties Related to GPIO +-------------------------------------- + +With the release of ACPI 5.1 and the _DSD configuration objecte names +can finally be given to GPIOs (and other things as well) returned by +_CRS. Previously, we were only able to use an integer index to find +the corresponding GPIO, which is pretty error prone (it depends on +the _CRS output ordering, for example). + +With _DSD we can now query GPIOs using a name instead of an integer +index, like the ASL example below shows: + + // Bluetooth device with reset and shutdown GPIOs + Device (BTH) + { + Name (_HID, ...) + + Name (_CRS, ResourceTemplate () + { + GpioIo (Exclusive, PullUp, 0, 0, IoRestrictionInputOnly, + "\\_SB.GPO0", 0, ResourceConsumer) {15} + GpioIo (Exclusive, PullUp, 0, 0, IoRestrictionInputOnly, + "\\_SB.GPO0", 0, ResourceConsumer) {27, 31} + }) + + Name (_DSD, Package () + { + ToUUID("daffd814-6eba-4d8c-8a91-bc9bbf4aa301"), + Package () + { + Package () {"reset-gpio", Package() {^BTH, 1, 1, 0 }}, + Package () {"shutdown-gpio", Package() {^BTH, 0, 0, 0 }}, + } + }) + } + +The format of the supported GPIO property is: + + Package () { "name", Package () { ref, index, pin, active_low }} + + ref - The device that has _CRS containing GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources, + typically this is the device itself (BTH in our case). + index - Index of the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource in _CRS starting from zero. + pin - Pin in the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource. Typically this is zero. + active_low - If 1 the GPIO is marked as active_low. + +Since ACPI GpioIo() resource does not have a field saying whether it is +active low or high, the "active_low" argument can be used here. Setting +it to 1 marks the GPIO as active low. + +In our Bluetooth example the "reset-gpio" refers to the second GpioIo() +resource, second pin in that resource with the GPIO number of 31. + +ACPI GPIO Mappings Provided by Drivers +-------------------------------------- + +There are systems in which the ACPI tables do not contain _DSD but provide _CRS +with GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources and device drivers still need to work with +them. + +In those cases ACPI device identification objects, _HID, _CID, _CLS, _SUB, _HRV, +available to the driver can be used to identify the device and that is supposed +to be sufficient to determine the meaning and purpose of all of the GPIO lines +listed by the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources returned by _CRS. In other words, +the driver is supposed to know what to use the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources for +once it has identified the device. Having done that, it can simply assign names +to the GPIO lines it is going to use and provide the GPIO subsystem with a +mapping between those names and the ACPI GPIO resources corresponding to them. + +To do that, the driver needs to define a mapping table as a NULL-terminated +array of struct acpi_gpio_mapping objects that each contain a name, a pointer +to an array of line data (struct acpi_gpio_params) objects and the size of that +array. Each struct acpi_gpio_params object consists of three fields, +crs_entry_index, line_index, active_low, representing the index of the target +GpioIo()/GpioInt() resource in _CRS starting from zero, the index of the target +line in that resource starting from zero, and the active-low flag for that line, +respectively, in analogy with the _DSD GPIO property format specified above. + +For the example Bluetooth device discussed previously the data structures in +question would look like this: + +static const struct acpi_gpio_params reset_gpio = { 1, 1, false }; +static const struct acpi_gpio_params shutdown_gpio = { 0, 0, false }; + +static const struct acpi_gpio_mapping bluetooth_acpi_gpios[] = { + { "reset-gpio", &reset_gpio, 1 }, + { "shutdown-gpio", &shutdown_gpio, 1 }, + { }, +}; + +Next, the mapping table needs to be passed as the second argument to +acpi_dev_add_driver_gpios() that will register it with the ACPI device object +pointed to by its first argument. That should be done in the driver's .probe() +routine. On removal, the driver should unregister its GPIO mapping table by +calling acpi_dev_remove_driver_gpios() on the ACPI device object where that +table was previously registered. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt index c2e468fe7b0b..da6713adac8a 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt @@ -7,32 +7,14 @@ world, which changes the way some things have to be initialized. This makes a need to provide an interface for such platforms to specify available firmware operations and call them when needed. -Firmware operations can be specified using struct firmware_ops - - struct firmware_ops { - /* - * Enters CPU idle mode - */ - int (*do_idle)(void); - /* - * Sets boot address of specified physical CPU - */ - int (*set_cpu_boot_addr)(int cpu, unsigned long boot_addr); - /* - * Boots specified physical CPU - */ - int (*cpu_boot)(int cpu); - /* - * Initializes L2 cache - */ - int (*l2x0_init)(void); - }; - -and then registered with register_firmware_ops function +Firmware operations can be specified by filling in a struct firmware_ops +with appropriate callbacks and then registering it with register_firmware_ops() +function. void register_firmware_ops(const struct firmware_ops *ops) -the ops pointer must be non-NULL. +The ops pointer must be non-NULL. More information about struct firmware_ops +and its members can be found in arch/arm/include/asm/firmware.h header. There is a default, empty set of operations provided, so there is no need to set anything if platform does not require firmware operations. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README index 7945238453ed..e68d163df33d 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README +++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README @@ -37,16 +37,26 @@ SunXi family http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A20/A20%20User%20Manual%202013-03-22.pdf - Allwinner A23 - + Not Supported + + Datasheet + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20Datasheet%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf + + User Manual + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20User%20Manual%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf * Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs - Allwinner A31 (sun6i) + Datasheet - http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A31%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.00%20(2012-12-24).pdf + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf + + User Manual + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20user%20manual%20V1.1%2020130630.pdf - Allwinner A31s (sun6i) + Not Supported + + Datasheet + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf + + User Manual + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20User%20Manual%20%20V1.0%2020130322.pdf * Quad ARM Cortex-A15, Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs - Allwinner A80 - + Not Supported
\ No newline at end of file + + Datasheet + http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A80/A80_Datasheet_Revision_1.0_0404.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt b/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a3b3da2ec6ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm64/legacy_instructions.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +The arm64 port of the Linux kernel provides infrastructure to support +emulation of instructions which have been deprecated, or obsoleted in +the architecture. The infrastructure code uses undefined instruction +hooks to support emulation. Where available it also allows turning on +the instruction execution in hardware. + +The emulation mode can be controlled by writing to sysctl nodes +(/proc/sys/abi). The following explains the different execution +behaviours and the corresponding values of the sysctl nodes - + +* Undef + Value: 0 + Generates undefined instruction abort. Default for instructions that + have been obsoleted in the architecture, e.g., SWP + +* Emulate + Value: 1 + Uses software emulation. To aid migration of software, in this mode + usage of emulated instruction is traced as well as rate limited + warnings are issued. This is the default for deprecated + instructions, .e.g., CP15 barriers + +* Hardware Execution + Value: 2 + Although marked as deprecated, some implementations may support the + enabling/disabling of hardware support for the execution of these + instructions. Using hardware execution generally provides better + performance, but at the loss of ability to gather runtime statistics + about the use of the deprecated instructions. + +The default mode depends on the status of the instruction in the +architecture. Deprecated instructions should default to emulation +while obsolete instructions must be undefined by default. + +Supported legacy instructions +----------------------------- +* SWP{B} +Node: /proc/sys/abi/swp +Status: Obsolete +Default: Undef (0) + +* CP15 Barriers +Node: /proc/sys/abi/cp15_barrier +Status: Deprecated +Default: Emulate (1) diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt index 344e85cc7323..d7273a5f6456 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm64/memory.txt @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ User addresses have bits 63:48 set to 0 while the kernel addresses have the same bits set to 1. TTBRx selection is given by bit 63 of the virtual address. The swapper_pg_dir contains only kernel (global) mappings while the user pgd contains only user (non-global) mappings. -The swapper_pgd_dir address is written to TTBR1 and never written to +The swapper_pg_dir address is written to TTBR1 and never written to TTBR0. diff --git a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt index 68542fe13b85..183e41bdcb69 100644 --- a/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt +++ b/Documentation/atomic_ops.txt @@ -7,12 +7,13 @@ maintainers on how to implement atomic counter, bitops, and spinlock interfaces properly. - The atomic_t type should be defined as a signed integer. -Also, it should be made opaque such that any kind of cast to a normal -C integer type will fail. Something like the following should -suffice: + The atomic_t type should be defined as a signed integer and +the atomic_long_t type as a signed long integer. Also, they should +be made opaque such that any kind of cast to a normal C integer type +will fail. Something like the following should suffice: typedef struct { int counter; } atomic_t; + typedef struct { long counter; } atomic_long_t; Historically, counter has been declared volatile. This is now discouraged. See Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt for the complete rationale. @@ -37,6 +38,9 @@ initializer is used before runtime. If the initializer is used at runtime, a proper implicit or explicit read memory barrier is needed before reading the value with atomic_read from another thread. +As with all of the atomic_ interfaces, replace the leading "atomic_" +with "atomic_long_" to operate on atomic_long_t. + The second interface can be used at runtime, as in: struct foo { atomic_t counter; }; diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index 2101e718670d..6b972b287795 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -827,10 +827,6 @@ but in the event of any barrier requests in the tag queue we need to ensure that requests are restarted in the order they were queue. This may happen if the driver needs to use blk_queue_invalidate_tags(). -Tagging also defines a new request flag, REQ_QUEUED. This is set whenever -a request is currently tagged. You should not use this flag directly, -blk_rq_tagged(rq) is the portable way to do so. - 3.3 I/O Submission The routine submit_bio() is used to submit a single io. Higher level i/o diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index 10c949b293e4..f935fac1e73b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -312,10 +312,10 @@ the "cpuset" cgroup subsystem, the steps are something like: 2) mkdir /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset 3) mount -t cgroup -ocpuset cpuset /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset 4) Create the new cgroup by doing mkdir's and write's (or echo's) in - the /sys/fs/cgroup virtual file system. + the /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset virtual file system. 5) Start a task that will be the "founding father" of the new job. 6) Attach that task to the new cgroup by writing its PID to the - /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset/tasks file for that cgroup. + /sys/fs/cgroup/cpuset tasks file for that cgroup. 7) fork, exec or clone the job tasks from this founding father task. For example, the following sequence of commands will setup a cgroup diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt index a9faaca1f029..106245c3aecc 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/hugetlb.txt @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Brief summary of control files hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.max_usage_in_bytes # show max "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage recorded - hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for "hugepagesize" hugetlb + hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.usage_in_bytes # show current usage for "hugepagesize" hugetlb hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.failcnt # show the number of allocation failure due to HugeTLB limit For a system supporting two hugepage size (16M and 16G) the control diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index 02ab997a1ed2..46b2b5080317 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -1,5 +1,10 @@ Memory Resource Controller +NOTE: This document is hopelessly outdated and it asks for a complete + rewrite. It still contains a useful information so we are keeping it + here but make sure to check the current code if you need a deeper + understanding. + NOTE: The Memory Resource Controller has generically been referred to as the memory controller in this document. Do not confuse memory controller used here with the memory controller that is used in hardware. @@ -52,9 +57,9 @@ Brief summary of control files. tasks # attach a task(thread) and show list of threads cgroup.procs # show list of processes cgroup.event_control # an interface for event_fd() - memory.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory + memory.usage_in_bytes # show current usage for memory (See 5.5 for details) - memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory+Swap + memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current usage for memory+Swap (See 5.5 for details) memory.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory usage memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory+Swap usage @@ -116,16 +121,16 @@ The memory controller is the first controller developed. 2.1. Design -The core of the design is a counter called the res_counter. The res_counter -tracks the current memory usage and limit of the group of processes associated -with the controller. Each cgroup has a memory controller specific data -structure (mem_cgroup) associated with it. +The core of the design is a counter called the page_counter. The +page_counter tracks the current memory usage and limit of the group of +processes associated with the controller. Each cgroup has a memory controller +specific data structure (mem_cgroup) associated with it. 2.2. Accounting +--------------------+ - | mem_cgroup | - | (res_counter) | + | mem_cgroup | + | (page_counter) | +--------------------+ / ^ \ / | \ @@ -352,9 +357,8 @@ set: 0. Configuration a. Enable CONFIG_CGROUPS -b. Enable CONFIG_RESOURCE_COUNTERS -c. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG -d. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP (to use swap extension) +b. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG +c. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_SWAP (to use swap extension) d. Enable CONFIG_MEMCG_KMEM (to use kmem extension) 1. Prepare the cgroups (see cgroups.txt, Why are cgroups needed?) diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 762ca54eb929..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/resource_counter.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,197 +0,0 @@ - - The Resource Counter - -The resource counter, declared at include/linux/res_counter.h, -is supposed to facilitate the resource management by controllers -by providing common stuff for accounting. - -This "stuff" includes the res_counter structure and routines -to work with it. - - - -1. Crucial parts of the res_counter structure - - a. unsigned long long usage - - The usage value shows the amount of a resource that is consumed - by a group at a given time. The units of measurement should be - determined by the controller that uses this counter. E.g. it can - be bytes, items or any other unit the controller operates on. - - b. unsigned long long max_usage - - The maximal value of the usage over time. - - This value is useful when gathering statistical information about - the particular group, as it shows the actual resource requirements - for a particular group, not just some usage snapshot. - - c. unsigned long long limit - - The maximal allowed amount of resource to consume by the group. In - case the group requests for more resources, so that the usage value - would exceed the limit, the resource allocation is rejected (see - the next section). - - d. unsigned long long failcnt - - The failcnt stands for "failures counter". This is the number of - resource allocation attempts that failed. - - c. spinlock_t lock - - Protects changes of the above values. - - - -2. Basic accounting routines - - a. void res_counter_init(struct res_counter *rc, - struct res_counter *rc_parent) - - Initializes the resource counter. As usual, should be the first - routine called for a new counter. - - The struct res_counter *parent can be used to define a hierarchical - child -> parent relationship directly in the res_counter structure, - NULL can be used to define no relationship. - - c. int res_counter_charge(struct res_counter *rc, unsigned long val, - struct res_counter **limit_fail_at) - - When a resource is about to be allocated it has to be accounted - with the appropriate resource counter (controller should determine - which one to use on its own). This operation is called "charging". - - This is not very important which operation - resource allocation - or charging - is performed first, but - * if the allocation is performed first, this may create a - temporary resource over-usage by the time resource counter is - charged; - * if the charging is performed first, then it should be uncharged - on error path (if the one is called). - - If the charging fails and a hierarchical dependency exists, the - limit_fail_at parameter is set to the particular res_counter element - where the charging failed. - - d. u64 res_counter_uncharge(struct res_counter *rc, unsigned long val) - - When a resource is released (freed) it should be de-accounted - from the resource counter it was accounted to. This is called - "uncharging". The return value of this function indicate the amount - of charges still present in the counter. - - The _locked routines imply that the res_counter->lock is taken. - - e. u64 res_counter_uncharge_until - (struct res_counter *rc, struct res_counter *top, - unsigned long val) - - Almost same as res_counter_uncharge() but propagation of uncharge - stops when rc == top. This is useful when kill a res_counter in - child cgroup. - - 2.1 Other accounting routines - - There are more routines that may help you with common needs, like - checking whether the limit is reached or resetting the max_usage - value. They are all declared in include/linux/res_counter.h. - - - -3. Analyzing the resource counter registrations - - a. If the failcnt value constantly grows, this means that the counter's - limit is too tight. Either the group is misbehaving and consumes too - many resources, or the configuration is not suitable for the group - and the limit should be increased. - - b. The max_usage value can be used to quickly tune the group. One may - set the limits to maximal values and either load the container with - a common pattern or leave one for a while. After this the max_usage - value shows the amount of memory the container would require during - its common activity. - - Setting the limit a bit above this value gives a pretty good - configuration that works in most of the cases. - - c. If the max_usage is much less than the limit, but the failcnt value - is growing, then the group tries to allocate a big chunk of resource - at once. - - d. If the max_usage is much less than the limit, but the failcnt value - is 0, then this group is given too high limit, that it does not - require. It is better to lower the limit a bit leaving more resource - for other groups. - - - -4. Communication with the control groups subsystem (cgroups) - -All the resource controllers that are using cgroups and resource counters -should provide files (in the cgroup filesystem) to work with the resource -counter fields. They are recommended to adhere to the following rules: - - a. File names - - Field name File name - --------------------------------------------------- - usage usage_in_<unit_of_measurement> - max_usage max_usage_in_<unit_of_measurement> - limit limit_in_<unit_of_measurement> - failcnt failcnt - lock no file :) - - b. Reading from file should show the corresponding field value in the - appropriate format. - - c. Writing to file - - Field Expected behavior - ---------------------------------- - usage prohibited - max_usage reset to usage - limit set the limit - failcnt reset to zero - - - -5. Usage example - - a. Declare a task group (take a look at cgroups subsystem for this) and - fold a res_counter into it - - struct my_group { - struct res_counter res; - - <other fields> - } - - b. Put hooks in resource allocation/release paths - - int alloc_something(...) - { - if (res_counter_charge(res_counter_ptr, amount) < 0) - return -ENOMEM; - - <allocate the resource and return to the caller> - } - - void release_something(...) - { - res_counter_uncharge(res_counter_ptr, amount); - - <release the resource> - } - - In order to keep the usage value self-consistent, both the - "res_counter_ptr" and the "amount" in release_something() should be - the same as they were in the alloc_something() when the releasing - resource was allocated. - - c. Provide the way to read res_counter values and set them (the cgroups - still can help with it). - - c. Compile and run :) diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/intel-pstate.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/intel-pstate.txt index a69ffe1d54d5..765d7fc0e692 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/intel-pstate.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/intel-pstate.txt @@ -1,17 +1,28 @@ Intel P-state driver -------------------- -This driver implements a scaling driver with an internal governor for -Intel Core processors. The driver follows the same model as the -Transmeta scaling driver (longrun.c) and implements the setpolicy() -instead of target(). Scaling drivers that implement setpolicy() are -assumed to implement internal governors by the cpufreq core. All the -logic for selecting the current P state is contained within the -driver; no external governor is used by the cpufreq core. - -Intel SandyBridge+ processors are supported. - -New sysfs files for controlling P state selection have been added to +This driver provides an interface to control the P state selection for +SandyBridge+ Intel processors. The driver can operate two different +modes based on the processor model legacy and Hardware P state (HWP) +mode. + +In legacy mode the driver implements a scaling driver with an internal +governor for Intel Core processors. The driver follows the same model +as the Transmeta scaling driver (longrun.c) and implements the +setpolicy() instead of target(). Scaling drivers that implement +setpolicy() are assumed to implement internal governors by the cpufreq +core. All the logic for selecting the current P state is contained +within the driver; no external governor is used by the cpufreq core. + +In HWP mode P state selection is implemented in the processor +itself. The driver provides the interfaces between the cpufreq core and +the processor to control P state selection based on user preferences +and reporting frequency to the cpufreq core. In this mode the +internal governor code is disabled. + +In addtion to the interfaces provided by the cpufreq core for +controlling frequency the driver provides sysfs files for +controlling P state selection. These files have been added to /sys/devices/system/cpu/intel_pstate/ max_perf_pct: limits the maximum P state that will be requested by @@ -33,7 +44,9 @@ frequency is fiction for Intel Core processors. Even if the scaling driver selects a single P state the actual frequency the processor will run at is selected by the processor itself. -New debugfs files have also been added to /sys/kernel/debug/pstate_snb/ +For legacy mode debugfs files have also been added to allow tuning of +the internal governor algorythm. These files are located at +/sys/kernel/debug/pstate_snb/ These files are NOT present in HWP mode. deadband d_gain_pct diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process index 2e0617936e8f..c24e156a6118 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process +++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process @@ -289,10 +289,6 @@ lists when they are assembled; they can be downloaded from: http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/next/ -Some information about linux-next has been gathered at: - - http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ - Linux-next has become an integral part of the kernel development process; all patches merged during a given merge window should really have found their way into linux-next some time before the merge window opens. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion b/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion index 1990ab4b4949..caef69022e9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion +++ b/Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion @@ -22,10 +22,6 @@ Beyond that, a valuable resource for kernel developers is: http://kernelnewbies.org/ -Information about the linux-next tree gathers at: - - http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ - And, of course, one should not forget http://kernel.org/, the definitive location for kernel release information. diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt index 66c2774c0c64..0d124a971801 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/cache-policies.txt @@ -47,20 +47,26 @@ Message and constructor argument pairs are: 'discard_promote_adjustment <value>' The sequential threshold indicates the number of contiguous I/Os -required before a stream is treated as sequential. The random threshold +required before a stream is treated as sequential. Once a stream is +considered sequential it will bypass the cache. The random threshold is the number of intervening non-contiguous I/Os that must be seen before the stream is treated as random again. The sequential and random thresholds default to 512 and 4 respectively. -Large, sequential ios are probably better left on the origin device -since spindles tend to have good bandwidth. The io_tracker counts -contiguous I/Os to try to spot when the io is in one of these sequential -modes. - -Internally the mq policy maintains a promotion threshold variable. If -the hit count of a block not in the cache goes above this threshold it -gets promoted to the cache. The read, write and discard promote adjustment +Large, sequential I/Os are probably better left on the origin device +since spindles tend to have good sequential I/O bandwidth. The +io_tracker counts contiguous I/Os to try to spot when the I/O is in one +of these sequential modes. But there are use-cases for wanting to +promote sequential blocks to the cache (e.g. fast application startup). +If sequential threshold is set to 0 the sequential I/O detection is +disabled and sequential I/O will no longer implicitly bypass the cache. +Setting the random threshold to 0 does _not_ disable the random I/O +stream detection. + +Internally the mq policy determines a promotion threshold. If the hit +count of a block not in the cache goes above this threshold it gets +promoted to the cache. The read, write and discard promote adjustment tunables allow you to tweak the promotion threshold by adding a small value based on the io type. They default to 4, 8 and 1 respectively. If you're trying to quickly warm a new cache device you may wish to diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt index 7eece72b1a35..8fe815046140 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/amlogic.txt @@ -2,7 +2,9 @@ Amlogic MesonX device tree bindings ------------------------------------------- Boards with the Amlogic Meson6 SoC shall have the following properties: + Required root node property: + compatible: "amlogic,meson6" -Required root node property: - -compatible = "amlogic,meson6"; +Boards with the Amlogic Meson8 SoC shall have the following properties: + Required root node property: + compatible: "amlogic,meson8"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt index 37b2cafa4e52..256b4d8bab7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arch_timer.txt @@ -22,6 +22,14 @@ to deliver its interrupts via SPIs. - always-on : a boolean property. If present, the timer is powered through an always-on power domain, therefore it never loses context. +** Optional properties: + +- arm,cpu-registers-not-fw-configured : Firmware does not initialize + any of the generic timer CPU registers, which contain their + architecturally-defined reset values. Only supported for 32-bit + systems which follow the ARMv7 architected reset values. + + Example: timer { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards index c554ed3d44fb..556c8665fdbf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/arm-boards @@ -92,3 +92,68 @@ Required nodes: - core-module: the root node to the Versatile platforms must have a core-module with regs and the compatible strings "arm,core-module-versatile", "syscon" + +ARM RealView Boards +------------------- +The RealView boards cover tailored evaluation boards that are used to explore +the ARM11 and Cortex A-8 and Cortex A-9 processors. + +Required properties (in root node): + /* RealView Emulation Baseboard */ + compatible = "arm,realview-eb"; + /* RealView Platform Baseboard for ARM1176JZF-S */ + compatible = "arm,realview-pb1176"; + /* RealView Platform Baseboard for ARM11 MPCore */ + compatible = "arm,realview-pb11mp"; + /* RealView Platform Baseboard for Cortex A-8 */ + compatible = "arm,realview-pba8"; + /* RealView Platform Baseboard Explore for Cortex A-9 */ + compatible = "arm,realview-pbx"; + +Required nodes: + +- soc: some node of the RealView platforms must be the SoC + node that contain the SoC-specific devices, withe the compatible + string set to one of these tuples: + "arm,realview-eb-soc", "simple-bus" + "arm,realview-pb1176-soc", "simple-bus" + "arm,realview-pb11mp-soc", "simple-bus" + "arm,realview-pba8-soc", "simple-bus" + "arm,realview-pbx-soc", "simple-bus" + +- syscon: some subnode of the RealView SoC node must be a + system controller node pointing to the control registers, + with the compatible string set to one of these tuples: + "arm,realview-eb-syscon", "syscon" + "arm,realview-pb1176-syscon", "syscon" + "arm,realview-pb11mp-syscon", "syscon" + "arm,realview-pba8-syscon", "syscon" + "arm,realview-pbx-syscon", "syscon" + + Required properties for the system controller: + - regs: the location and size of the system controller registers, + one range of 0x1000 bytes. + +Example: + +/dts-v1/; +#include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> +#include "skeleton.dtsi" + +/ { + model = "ARM RealView PB1176 with device tree"; + compatible = "arm,realview-pb1176"; + + soc { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "arm,realview-pb1176-soc", "simple-bus"; + ranges; + + syscon: syscon@10000000 { + compatible = "arm,realview-syscon", "syscon"; + reg = <0x10000000 0x1000>; + }; + + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/cygnus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/cygnus.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c77169bb534 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/cygnus.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +Broadcom Cygnus device tree bindings +------------------------------------ + + +Boards with Cygnus SoCs shall have the following properties: + +Required root node property: + +BCM11300 +compatible = "brcm,bcm11300", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM11320 +compatible = "brcm,bcm11320", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM11350 +compatible = "brcm,bcm11350", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM11360 +compatible = "brcm,bcm11360", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM58300 +compatible = "brcm,bcm58300", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM58302 +compatible = "brcm,bcm58302", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM58303 +compatible = "brcm,bcm58303", "brcm,cygnus"; + +BCM58305 +compatible = "brcm,bcm58305", "brcm,cygnus"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt index fc446347ab6d..b2aacbe16ed9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/cpus.txt @@ -227,6 +227,15 @@ nodes to be present and contain the properties described below. # List of phandles to idle state nodes supported by this cpu [3]. + - rockchip,pmu + Usage: optional for systems that have an "enable-method" + property value of "rockchip,rk3066-smp" + While optional, it is the preferred way to get access to + the cpu-core power-domains. + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: Specifies the syscon node controlling the cpu core + power domains. + Example 1 (dual-cluster big.LITTLE system 32-bit): cpus { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt index e935d7d4ac43..4e8b7df7fc62 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/fsl.txt @@ -74,3 +74,41 @@ Required root node properties: i.MX6q generic board Required root node properties: - compatible = "fsl,imx6q"; + + +Freescale LS1021A Platform Device Tree Bindings +------------------------------------------------ + +Required root node compatible properties: + - compatible = "fsl,ls1021a"; + +Freescale LS1021A SoC-specific Device Tree Bindings +------------------------------------------- + +Freescale SCFG + SCFG is the supplemental configuration unit, that provides SoC specific +configuration and status registers for the chip. Such as getting PEX port +status. + Required properties: + - compatible: should be "fsl,ls1021a-scfg" + - reg: should contain base address and length of SCFG memory-mapped registers + +Example: + scfg: scfg@1570000 { + compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-scfg"; + reg = <0x0 0x1570000 0x0 0x10000>; + }; + +Freescale DCFG + DCFG is the device configuration unit, that provides general purpose +configuration and status for the device. Such as setting the secondary +core start address and release the secondary core from holdoff and startup. + Required properties: + - compatible: should be "fsl,ls1021a-dcfg" + - reg : should contain base address and length of DCFG memory-mapped registers + +Example: + dcfg: dcfg@1ee0000 { + compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-dcfg"; + reg = <0x0 0x1ee0000 0x0 0x10000>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt index c7d2fa156678..b38608af66db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/gic.txt @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Main node required properties: "arm,cortex-a7-gic" "arm,arm11mp-gic" "brcm,brahma-b15-gic" + "arm,arm1176jzf-devchip-gic" - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 3. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt index 37375c7f3ccc..a8274eabae2e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/idle-states.txt @@ -317,6 +317,26 @@ follows: In such systems entry-latency-us + exit-latency-us will exceed wakeup-latency-us by this duration. + - status: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <string> + Definition: A standard device tree property [5] that indicates + the operational status of an idle-state. + If present, it shall be: + "okay": to indicate that the idle state is + operational. + "disabled": to indicate that the idle state has + been disabled in firmware so it is not + operational. + If the property is not present the idle-state must + be considered operational. + + - idle-state-name: + Usage: Optional + Value type: <string> + Definition: A string used as a descriptive name for the idle + state. + In addition to the properties listed above, a state node may require additional properties specifics to the entry-method defined in the idle-states node, please refer to the entry-method bindings diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt index 904de5781f44..a99eb9eb14c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell,berlin.txt @@ -106,11 +106,21 @@ Required subnode-properties: - groups: a list of strings describing the group names. - function: a string describing the function used to mux the groups. +* Reset controller binding + +A reset controller is part of the chip control registers set. The chip control +node also provides the reset. The register set is not at the same offset between +Berlin SoCs. + +Required property: +- #reset-cells: must be set to 2 + Example: chip: chip-control@ea0000 { compatible = "marvell,berlin2-chip-ctrl"; #clock-cells = <1>; + #reset-cells = <2>; reg = <0xea0000 0x400>; clocks = <&refclk>, <&externaldev 0>; clock-names = "refclk", "video_ext0"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt index fa252261dfaf..3be40139cfbb 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek.txt @@ -1,10 +1,14 @@ -Mediatek MT6589 Platforms Device Tree Bindings +MediaTek mt65xx & mt81xx Platforms Device Tree Bindings -Boards with a SoC of the Mediatek MT6589 shall have the following property: +Boards with a MediaTek mt65xx/mt81xx SoC shall have the following property: Required root node property: -compatible: must contain "mediatek,mt6589" +compatible: Must contain one of + "mediatek,mt6589" + "mediatek,mt6592" + "mediatek,mt8127" + "mediatek,mt8135" Supported boards: @@ -12,3 +16,12 @@ Supported boards: - bq Aquaris5 smart phone: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mundoreader,bq-aquaris5", "mediatek,mt6589"; +- Evaluation board for MT6592: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt6592-evb", "mediatek,mt6592"; +- MTK mt8127 tablet moose EVB: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt8127-moose", "mediatek,mt8127"; +- MTK mt8135 tablet EVB: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "mediatek,mt8135-evbp1", "mediatek,mt8135"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt index ddd9bcdf889c..4f6a82cef1d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt @@ -132,6 +132,9 @@ Boards: - AM335X Bone : Low cost community board compatible = "ti,am335x-bone", "ti,am33xx", "ti,omap3" +- AM335X OrionLXm : Substation Automation Platform + compatible = "novatech,am335x-lxm", "ti,am33xx" + - OMAP5 EVM : Evaluation Module compatible = "ti,omap5-evm", "ti,omap5" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt index 857f12636eb2..eaa3d1a0eb05 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt @@ -1,6 +1,10 @@ Rockchip platforms device tree bindings --------------------------------------- +- MarsBoard RK3066 board: + Required root node properties: + - compatible = "haoyu,marsboard-rk3066", "rockchip,rk3066a"; + - bq Curie 2 tablet: Required root node properties: - compatible = "mundoreader,bq-curie2", "rockchip,rk3066a"; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt index 2168ed31e1b0..43589d2466a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung-boards.txt @@ -1,11 +1,20 @@ -* Samsung's Exynos4210 based SMDKV310 evaluation board - -SMDKV310 evaluation board is based on Samsung's Exynos4210 SoC. +* Samsung's Exynos SoC based boards Required root node properties: - compatible = should be one or more of the following. - (a) "samsung,smdkv310" - for Samsung's SMDKV310 eval board. - (b) "samsung,exynos4210" - for boards based on Exynos4210 SoC. + - "samsung,monk" - for Exynos3250-based Samsung Simband board. + - "samsung,rinato" - for Exynos3250-based Samsung Gear2 board. + - "samsung,smdkv310" - for Exynos4210-based Samsung SMDKV310 eval board. + - "samsung,trats" - for Exynos4210-based Tizen Reference board. + - "samsung,universal_c210" - for Exynos4210-based Samsung board. + - "samsung,smdk4412", - for Exynos4412-based Samsung SMDK4412 eval board. + - "samsung,trats2" - for Exynos4412-based Tizen Reference board. + - "samsung,smdk5250" - for Exynos5250-based Samsung SMDK5250 eval board. + - "samsung,xyref5260" - for Exynos5260-based Samsung board. + - "samsung,smdk5410" - for Exynos5410-based Samsung SMDK5410 eval board. + - "samsung,smdk5420" - for Exynos5420-based Samsung SMDK5420 eval board. + - "samsung,sd5v1" - for Exynos5440-based Samsung board. + - "samsung,ssdk5440" - for Exynos5440-based Samsung board. Optional: - firmware node, specifying presence and type of secure firmware: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt index 6256ec31666d..2fdff5a806cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ste-nomadik.txt @@ -10,6 +10,12 @@ Required root node property: src Boards with the Nomadik SoC include: +Nomadik NHK-15 board manufactured by ST Microelectronics: + +Required root node property: + +compatible="st,nomadik-nhk-15"; + S8815 "MiniKit" manufactured by Calao Systems: Required root node property: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..42941fdefb11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +Allwinner sunXi Platforms Device Tree Bindings + +Each device tree must specify which Allwinner SoC it uses, +using one of the following compatible strings: + + allwinner,sun4i-a10 + allwinner,sun5i-a10s + allwinner,sun5i-a13 + allwinner,sun6i-a31 + allwinner,sun7i-a20 + allwinner,sun8i-a23 + allwinner,sun9i-a80 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ux500/power_domain.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ux500/power_domain.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5679d1742d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/ux500/power_domain.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +* ST-Ericsson UX500 PM Domains + +UX500 supports multiple PM domains which are used to gate power to one or +more peripherals on the SOC. + +The implementation of PM domains for UX500 are based upon the generic PM domain +and use the corresponding DT bindings. + +==PM domain providers== + +Required properties: + - compatible: Must be "stericsson,ux500-pm-domains". + - #power-domain-cells : Number of cells in a power domain specifier, must be 1. + +Example: + pm_domains: pm_domains0 { + compatible = "stericsson,ux500-pm-domains"; + #power-domain-cells = <1>; + }; + +==PM domain consumers== + +Required properties: + - power-domains: A phandle and PM domain specifier. Below are the list of + valid specifiers: + + Index Specifier + ----- --------- + 0 DOMAIN_VAPE + +Example: + sdi0_per1@80126000 { + compatible = "arm,pl18x", "arm,primecell"; + power-domains = <&pm_domains DOMAIN_VAPE> + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt index 1e6111333fa8..2493a5a31655 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/sata_rcar.txt @@ -3,16 +3,21 @@ Required properties: - compatible : should contain one of the following: - "renesas,sata-r8a7779" for R-Car H1 - - "renesas,sata-r8a7790" for R-Car H2 - - "renesas,sata-r8a7791" for R-Car M2 + ("renesas,rcar-sata" is deprecated) + - "renesas,sata-r8a7790-es1" for R-Car H2 ES1 + - "renesas,sata-r8a7790" for R-Car H2 other than ES1 + - "renesas,sata-r8a7791" for R-Car M2-W + - "renesas,sata-r8a7793" for R-Car M2-N - reg : address and length of the SATA registers; - interrupts : must consist of one interrupt specifier. +- clocks : must contain a reference to the functional clock. Example: -sata: sata@fc600000 { - compatible = "renesas,sata-r8a7779"; - reg = <0xfc600000 0x2000>; +sata0: sata@ee300000 { + compatible = "renesas,sata-r8a7791"; + reg = <0 0xee300000 0 0x2000>; interrupt-parent = <&gic>; - interrupts = <0 100 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupts = <0 105 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&mstp8_clks R8A7791_CLK_SATA0>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/btmrvl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/btmrvl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..58f964bb0a52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/btmrvl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +btmrvl +------ + +Required properties: + + - compatible : must be "btmrvl,cfgdata" + +Optional properties: + + - btmrvl,cal-data : Calibration data downloaded to the device during + initialization. This is an array of 28 values(u8). + + - btmrvl,gpio-gap : gpio and gap (in msecs) combination to be + configured. + +Example: + +GPIO pin 13 is configured as a wakeup source and GAP is set to 100 msecs +in below example. + +btmrvl { + compatible = "btmrvl,cfgdata"; + + btmrvl,cal-data = /bits/ 8 < + 0x37 0x01 0x1c 0x00 0xff 0xff 0xff 0xff 0x01 0x7f 0x04 0x02 + 0x00 0x00 0xba 0xce 0xc0 0xc6 0x2d 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 + 0x00 0x00 0xf0 0x00>; + btmrvl,gpio-gap = <0x0d64>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/bcma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/bcma.txt index 62a48348ac15..edd44d802139 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/bcma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/bcma.txt @@ -8,6 +8,11 @@ Required properties: The cores on the AXI bus are automatically detected by bcma with the memory ranges they are using and they get registered afterwards. +Automatic detection of the IRQ number is not working on +BCM47xx/BCM53xx ARM SoCs. To assign IRQ numbers to the cores, provide +them manually through device tree. Use an interrupt-map to specify the +IRQ used by the devices on the bus. The first address is just an index, +because we do not have any special register. The top-level axi bus may contain children representing attached cores (devices). This is needed since some hardware details can't be auto @@ -22,6 +27,22 @@ Example: ranges = <0x00000000 0x18000000 0x00100000>; #address-cells = <1>; #size-cells = <1>; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0x000fffff 0xffff>; + interrupt-map = + /* Ethernet Controller 0 */ + <0x00024000 0 &gic GIC_SPI 147 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + + /* Ethernet Controller 1 */ + <0x00025000 0 &gic GIC_SPI 148 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + /* PCIe Controller 0 */ + <0x00012000 0 &gic GIC_SPI 126 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0x00012000 1 &gic GIC_SPI 127 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0x00012000 2 &gic GIC_SPI 128 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0x00012000 3 &gic GIC_SPI 129 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0x00012000 4 &gic GIC_SPI 130 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0x00012000 5 &gic GIC_SPI 131 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; chipcommon { reg = <0x00000000 0x1000>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt index e2d501d20c9a..1eceefb20f01 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/brcm,gisb-arb.txt @@ -2,7 +2,11 @@ Broadcom GISB bus Arbiter controller Required properties: -- compatible: should be "brcm,gisb-arb" +- compatible: + "brcm,gisb-arb" or "brcm,bcm7445-gisb-arb" for 28nm chips + "brcm,bcm7435-gisb-arb" for newer 40nm chips + "brcm,bcm7400-gisb-arb" for older 40nm chips and all 65nm chips + "brcm,bcm7038-gisb-arb" for 130nm chips - reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers - interrupt-parent: specifies the phandle to the parent interrupt controller this arbiter gets interrupt line from diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt index 5fa44f52a0b8..5e16c3ccb061 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/mvebu-mbus.txt @@ -48,9 +48,12 @@ Required properties: - compatible: Should be set to "marvell,mbus-controller". - reg: Device's register space. - Two entries are expected (see the examples below): - the first one controls the devices decoding window and - the second one controls the SDRAM decoding window. + Two or three entries are expected (see the examples below): + the first one controls the devices decoding window, + the second one controls the SDRAM decoding window and + the third controls the MBus bridge (only with the + marvell,armada370-mbus and marvell,armadaxp-mbus + compatible strings) Example: @@ -67,7 +70,7 @@ Example: mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; - reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>, <0x20250 0x8>; }; /* more children ...*/ @@ -126,7 +129,7 @@ are skipped. mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; - reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>, <0x20250 0x8>; }; /* more children ...*/ @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ Using this macro, the above example would be: mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { compatible = "marvell,mbus-controller"; - reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>, <0x20250 0x8>; }; /* other children */ @@ -266,7 +269,7 @@ See the example below, where a more complete device tree is shown: ranges = <0 MBUS_ID(0xf0, 0x01) 0 0x100000>; mbusc: mbus-controller@20000 { - reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>; + reg = <0x20000 0x100>, <0x20180 0x20>, <0x20250 0x8>; }; interrupt-controller@20000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ed838f453f7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/chosen.txt @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +The chosen node +--------------- + +The chosen node does not represent a real device, but serves as a place +for passing data between firmware and the operating system, like boot +arguments. Data in the chosen node does not represent the hardware. + + +stdout-path property +-------------------- + +Device trees may specify the device to be used for boot console output +with a stdout-path property under /chosen, as described in ePAPR, e.g. + +/ { + chosen { + stdout-path = "/serial@f00:115200"; + }; + + serial@f00 { + compatible = "vendor,some-uart"; + reg = <0xf00 0x10>; + }; +}; + +If the character ":" is present in the value, this terminates the path. +The meaning of any characters following the ":" is device-specific, and +must be specified in the relevant binding documentation. + +For UART devices, the preferred binding is a string in the form: + + <baud>{<parity>{<bits>{<flow>}}} + +where + + baud - baud rate in decimal + parity - 'n' (none), 'o', (odd) or 'e' (even) + bits - number of data bits + flow - 'r' (rts) + +For example: 115200n8r + +Implementation note: Linux will look for the property "linux,stdout-path" or +on PowerPC "stdout" if "stdout-path" is not found. However, the +"linux,stdout-path" and "stdout" properties are deprecated. New platforms +should only use the "stdout-path" property. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/bcm-cygnus-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/bcm-cygnus-clock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..00d26edec8bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/bcm-cygnus-clock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +Broadcom Cygnus Clocks + +This binding uses the common clock binding: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt + +Currently various "fixed" clocks are declared for peripheral drivers that use +the common clock framework to reference their core clocks. Proper support of +these clocks will be added later + +Device tree example: + + clocks { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + osc: oscillator { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <1>; + clock-frequency = <25000000>; + }; + + apb_clk: apb_clk { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-frequency = <1000000000>; + }; + + periph_clk: periph_clk { + compatible = "fixed-clock"; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-frequency = <500000000>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt index 5666812fc42b..266ff9d23229 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/qoriq-clock.txt @@ -62,6 +62,8 @@ Required properties: It takes parent's clock-frequency as its clock. * "fsl,qoriq-sysclk-2.0": for input system clock (v2.0). It takes parent's clock-frequency as its clock. + * "fsl,qoriq-platform-pll-1.0" for the platform PLL clock (v1.0) + * "fsl,qoriq-platform-pll-2.0" for the platform PLL clock (v2.0) - #clock-cells: From common clock binding. The number of cells in a clock-specifier. Should be <0> for "fsl,qoriq-sysclk-[1,2].0" clocks, or <1> for "fsl,qoriq-core-pll-[1,2].0" clocks. @@ -128,8 +130,16 @@ Example for clock block and clock provider: clock-names = "pll0", "pll0-div2", "pll1", "pll1-div2"; clock-output-names = "cmux1"; }; + + platform-pll: platform-pll@c00 { + #clock-cells = <1>; + reg = <0xc00 0x4>; + compatible = "fsl,qoriq-platform-pll-1.0"; + clocks = <&sysclk>; + clock-output-names = "platform-pll", "platform-pll-div2"; + }; }; - } +}; Example for clock consumer: @@ -139,4 +149,4 @@ Example for clock consumer: clocks = <&mux0>; ... }; - } +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,flexgen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,flexgen.txt index 1d3ace088172..b7ee5c7e0f75 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,flexgen.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/st/st,flexgen.txt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Please find an example below: Clockgen block diagram ------------------------------------------------------------------- - | Flexgen stucture | + | Flexgen structure | | --------------------------------------------- | | | ------- -------- -------- | | clk_sysin | | | | | | | | | diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt index c80863d344ac..63f9f1ac3439 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/vf610-clock.txt @@ -5,6 +5,19 @@ Required properties: - reg: Address and length of the register set - #clock-cells: Should be <1> +Optional properties: +- clocks: list of clock identifiers which are external input clocks to the + given clock controller. Please refer the next section to find + the input clocks for a given controller. +- clock-names: list of names of clocks which are exteral input clocks to the + given clock controller. + +Input clocks for top clock controller: + - sxosc (external crystal oscillator 32KHz, recommended) + - fxosc (external crystal oscillator 24MHz, recommended) + - audio_ext + - enet_ext + The clock consumer should specify the desired clock by having the clock ID in its "clocks" phandle cell. See include/dt-bindings/clock/vf610-clock.h for the full list of VF610 clock IDs. @@ -15,6 +28,8 @@ clks: ccm@4006b000 { compatible = "fsl,vf610-ccm"; reg = <0x4006b000 0x1000>; #clock-cells = <1>; + clocks = <&sxosc>, <&fxosc>; + clock-names = "sxosc", "fxosc"; }; uart1: serial@40028000 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-xdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-xdma.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0eb2b3207e08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/atmel-xdma.txt @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +* Atmel Extensible Direct Memory Access Controller (XDMAC) + +* XDMA Controller +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "atmel,<chip>-dma". + <chip> compatible description: + - sama5d4: first SoC adding the XDMAC +- reg: Should contain DMA registers location and length. +- interrupts: Should contain DMA interrupt. +- #dma-cells: Must be <1>, used to represent the number of integer cells in +the dmas property of client devices. + - The 1st cell specifies the channel configuration register: + - bit 13: SIF, source interface identifier, used to get the memory + interface identifier, + - bit 14: DIF, destination interface identifier, used to get the peripheral + interface identifier, + - bit 30-24: PERID, peripheral identifier. + +Example: + +dma1: dma-controller@f0004000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d4-dma"; + reg = <0xf0004000 0x200>; + interrupts = <50 4 0>; + #dma-cells = <1>; +}; + + +* DMA clients +DMA clients connected to the Atmel XDMA controller must use the format +described in the dma.txt file, using a one-cell specifier for each channel. +The two cells in order are: +1. A phandle pointing to the DMA controller. +2. Channel configuration register. Configurable fields are: + - bit 13: SIF, source interface identifier, used to get the memory + interface identifier, + - bit 14: DIF, destination interface identifier, used to get the peripheral + interface identifier, + - bit 30-24: PERID, peripheral identifier. + +Example: + +i2c2: i2c@f8024000 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9x5-i2c"; + reg = <0xf8024000 0x4000>; + interrupts = <34 4 6>; + dmas = <&dma1 + (AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) + | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(6))>, + <&dma1 + (AT91_XDMAC_DT_MEM_IF(0) | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PER_IF(1) + | AT91_XDMAC_DT_PERID(7))>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt index 4659fd952301..dc8d3aac1aa9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt @@ -48,6 +48,7 @@ The full ID of peripheral types can be found below. 21 ESAI 22 SSI Dual FIFO (needs firmware ver >= 2) 23 Shared ASRC + 24 SAI The third cell specifies the transfer priority as below. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/qcom_bam_dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/qcom_bam_dma.txt index d75a9d767022..f8c3311b7153 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/qcom_bam_dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/qcom_bam_dma.txt @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@ QCOM BAM DMA controller Required properties: -- compatible: must contain "qcom,bam-v1.4.0" for MSM8974 +- compatible: must be one of the following: + * "qcom,bam-v1.4.0" for MSM8974, APQ8074 and APQ8084 + * "qcom,bam-v1.3.0" for APQ8064, IPQ8064 and MSM8960 - reg: Address range for DMA registers - interrupts: Should contain the one interrupt shared by all channels - #dma-cells: must be <1>, the cell in the dmas property of the client device diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sun6i-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sun6i-dma.txt index 3e145c1675b1..9cdcba24d7c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sun6i-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/sun6i-dma.txt @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ This driver follows the generic DMA bindings defined in dma.txt. Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "allwinner,sun6i-a31-dma" +- compatible: Must be "allwinner,sun6i-a31-dma" or "allwinner,sun8i-a23-dma" - reg: Should contain the registers base address and length - interrupts: Should contain a reference to the interrupt used by this device - clocks: Should contain a reference to the parent AHB clock diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_vdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_vdma.txt index 1405ed071bb4..e4c4d47f8137 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_vdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/xilinx/xilinx_vdma.txt @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Required child node properties: - compatible: It should be either "xlnx,axi-vdma-mm2s-channel" or "xlnx,axi-vdma-s2mm-channel". - interrupts: Should contain per channel VDMA interrupts. -- xlnx,data-width: Should contain the stream data width, take values +- xlnx,datawidth: Should contain the stream data width, take values {32,64...1024}. Optional child node properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ltc2978.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ltc2978.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ed2f09dc2483 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ltc2978.txt @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +ltc2978 + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain one of: + * "lltc,ltc2974" + * "lltc,ltc2977" + * "lltc,ltc2978" + * "lltc,ltc3880" + * "lltc,ltc3883" + * "lltc,ltm4676" +- reg: I2C slave address + +Optional properties: +- regulators: A node that houses a sub-node for each regulator controlled by + the device. Each sub-node is identified using the node's name, with valid + values listed below. The content of each sub-node is defined by the + standard binding for regulators; see regulator.txt. + +Valid names of regulators depend on number of supplies supported per device: + * ltc2974 : vout0 - vout3 + * ltc2977 : vout0 - vout7 + * ltc2978 : vout0 - vout7 + * ltc3880 : vout0 - vout1 + * ltc3883 : vout0 + * ltm4676 : vout0 - vout1 + +Example: +ltc2978@5e { + compatible = "lltc,ltc2978"; + reg = <0x5e>; + regulators { + vout0 { + regulator-name = "FPGA-2.5V"; + }; + vout2 { + regulator-name = "FPGA-1.5V"; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt index 278de8e64bbf..89b3250f049b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-s3c2410.txt @@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ Optional properties: specified, default value is 0. - samsung,i2c-max-bus-freq: Desired frequency in Hz of the bus. If not specified, the default value in Hz is 100000. + - samsung,sysreg-phandle - handle to syscon used to control the system registers Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt index fbde415078e6..605dcca5dbec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/trivial-devices.txt @@ -56,6 +56,8 @@ gmt,g751 G751: Digital Temperature Sensor and Thermal Watchdog with Two-Wire In infineon,slb9635tt Infineon SLB9635 (Soft-) I2C TPM (old protocol, max 100khz) infineon,slb9645tt Infineon SLB9645 I2C TPM (new protocol, max 400khz) isl,isl12057 Intersil ISL12057 I2C RTC Chip +isil,isl29028 (deprecated, use isl) +isl,isl29028 Intersil ISL29028 Ambient Light and Proximity Sensor maxim,ds1050 5 Bit Programmable, Pulse-Width Modulator maxim,max1237 Low-Power, 4-/12-Channel, 2-Wire Serial, 12-Bit ADCs maxim,max6625 9-Bit/12-Bit Temperature Sensors with I²C-Compatible Serial Interface diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt index ff812a8a82bc..bae1f2187226 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc.txt @@ -13,7 +13,12 @@ Such an interrupt controller has the following hardware design: or if they will output an interrupt signal at this 2nd level interrupt controller, in particular for UARTs -- not all 32-bits within the interrupt controller actually map to an interrupt +- typically has one 32-bit enable word and one 32-bit status word, but on + some hardware may have more than one enable/status pair + +- no atomic set/clear operations + +- not all bits within the interrupt controller actually map to an interrupt The typical hardware layout for this controller is represented below: @@ -48,7 +53,9 @@ The typical hardware layout for this controller is represented below: Required properties: - compatible: should be "brcm,bcm7120-l2-intc" -- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers +- reg: specifies the base physical address and size of the registers; + multiple pairs may be specified, with the first pair handling IRQ offsets + 0..31 and the second pair handling 32..63 - interrupt-controller: identifies the node as an interrupt controller - #interrupt-cells: specifies the number of cells needed to encode an interrupt source, should be 1. @@ -59,18 +66,21 @@ Required properties: - brcm,int-map-mask: 32-bits bit mask describing how many and which interrupts are wired to this 2nd level interrupt controller, and how they match their respective interrupt parents. Should match exactly the number of interrupts - specified in the 'interrupts' property. + specified in the 'interrupts' property, multiplied by the number of + enable/status register pairs implemented by this controller. For + multiple parent IRQs with multiple enable/status words, this looks like: + <irq0_w0 irq0_w1 irq1_w0 irq1_w1 ...> Optional properties: - brcm,irq-can-wake: if present, this means the L2 controller can be used as a wakeup source for system suspend/resume. -- brcm,int-fwd-mask: if present, a 32-bits bit mask to configure for the - interrupts which have a mux gate, typically UARTs. Setting these bits will - make their respective interrupts outputs bypass this 2nd level interrupt - controller completely, it completely transparent for the interrupt controller - parent +- brcm,int-fwd-mask: if present, a bit mask to configure the interrupts which + have a mux gate, typically UARTs. Setting these bits will make their + respective interrupt outputs bypass this 2nd level interrupt controller + completely; it is completely transparent for the interrupt controller + parent. This should have one 32-bit word per enable/status pair. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt index ce6a1a072028..8a3c40829899 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt @@ -30,10 +30,6 @@ should only be used when a device has multiple interrupt parents. Example: interrupts-extended = <&intc1 5 1>, <&intc2 1 0>; -A device node may contain either "interrupts" or "interrupts-extended", but not -both. If both properties are present, then the operating system should log an -error and use only the data in "interrupts". - 2) Interrupt controller nodes ----------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mips-gic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mips-gic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5a65478e5d40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/mips-gic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +MIPS Global Interrupt Controller (GIC) + +The MIPS GIC routes external interrupts to individual VPEs and IRQ pins. +It also supports local (per-processor) interrupts and software-generated +interrupts which can be used as IPIs. The GIC also includes a free-running +global timer, per-CPU count/compare timers, and a watchdog. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "mti,gic". +- interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt specifier. Should be 3. + - The first cell is the type of interrupt, local or shared. + See <include/dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/mips-gic.h>. + - The second cell is the GIC interrupt number. + - The third cell encodes the interrupt flags. + See <include/dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> for a list of valid + flags. + +Optional properties: +- reg : Base address and length of the GIC registers. If not present, + the base address reported by the hardware GCR_GIC_BASE will be used. +- mti,reserved-cpu-vectors : Specifies the list of CPU interrupt vectors + to which the GIC may not route interrupts. Valid values are 2 - 7. + This property is ignored if the CPU is started in EIC mode. + +Required properties for timer sub-node: +- compatible : Should be "mti,gic-timer". +- interrupts : Interrupt for the GIC local timer. +- clock-frequency : Clock frequency at which the GIC timers operate. + +Example: + + gic: interrupt-controller@1bdc0000 { + compatible = "mti,gic"; + reg = <0x1bdc0000 0x20000>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <3>; + + mti,reserved-cpu-vectors = <7>; + + timer { + compatible = "mti,gic-timer"; + interrupts = <GIC_LOCAL 1 IRQ_TYPE_NONE>; + clock-frequency = <50000000>; + }; + }; + + uart@18101400 { + ... + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + interrupts = <GIC_SHARED 24 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/rockchip,iommu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/rockchip,iommu.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9a55ac3735e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/rockchip,iommu.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Rockchip IOMMU +============== + +A Rockchip DRM iommu translates io virtual addresses to physical addresses for +its master device. Each slave device is bound to a single master device, and +shares its clocks, power domain and irq. + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "rockchip,iommu" +- reg : Address space for the configuration registers +- interrupts : Interrupt specifier for the IOMMU instance +- interrupt-names : Interrupt name for the IOMMU instance +- #iommu-cells : Should be <0>. This indicates the iommu is a + "single-master" device, and needs no additional information + to associate with its master device. See: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iommu/iommu.txt + +Example: + + vopl_mmu: iommu@ff940300 { + compatible = "rockchip,iommu"; + reg = <0xff940300 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 16 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + interrupt-names = "vopl_mmu"; + #iommu-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mailbox.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a2cd3d266db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mailbox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +* Generic Mailbox Controller and client driver bindings + +Generic binding to provide a way for Mailbox controller drivers to +assign appropriate mailbox channel to client drivers. + +* Mailbox Controller + +Required property: +- #mbox-cells: Must be at least 1. Number of cells in a mailbox + specifier. + +Example: + mailbox: mailbox { + ... + #mbox-cells = <1>; + }; + + +* Mailbox Client + +Required property: +- mboxes: List of phandle and mailbox channel specifiers. + +Optional property: +- mbox-names: List of identifier strings for each mailbox channel + required by the client. The use of this property + is discouraged in favor of using index in list of + 'mboxes' while requesting a mailbox. Instead the + platforms may define channel indices, in DT headers, + to something legible. + +Example: + pwr_cntrl: power { + ... + mbox-names = "pwr-ctrl", "rpc"; + mboxes = <&mailbox 0 + &mailbox 1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt index 48edc4b92afb..d1a043339c11 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/omap-mailbox.txt @@ -43,6 +43,9 @@ Required properties: device. The format is dependent on which interrupt controller the OMAP device uses - ti,hwmods: Name of the hwmod associated with the mailbox +- #mbox-cells: Common mailbox binding property to identify the number + of cells required for the mailbox specifier. Should be + 1 - ti,mbox-num-users: Number of targets (processor devices) that the mailbox device can interrupt - ti,mbox-num-fifos: Number of h/w fifo queues within the mailbox IP block @@ -72,6 +75,18 @@ data that represent the following: Cell #3 (usr_id) - mailbox user id for identifying the interrupt line associated with generating a tx/rx fifo interrupt. +Mailbox Users: +============== +A device needing to communicate with a target processor device should specify +them using the common mailbox binding properties, "mboxes" and the optional +"mbox-names" (please see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mailbox/mailbox.txt +for details). Each value of the mboxes property should contain a phandle to the +mailbox controller device node and an args specifier that will be the phandle to +the intended sub-mailbox child node to be used for communication. The equivalent +"mbox-names" property value can be used to give a name to the communication channel +to be used by the client user. + + Example: -------- @@ -81,6 +96,7 @@ mailbox: mailbox@4a0f4000 { reg = <0x4a0f4000 0x200>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 26 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; ti,hwmods = "mailbox"; + #mbox-cells = <1>; ti,mbox-num-users = <3>; ti,mbox-num-fifos = <8>; mbox_ipu: mbox_ipu { @@ -93,12 +109,19 @@ mailbox: mailbox@4a0f4000 { }; }; +dsp { + ... + mboxes = <&mailbox &mbox_dsp>; + ... +}; + /* AM33xx */ mailbox: mailbox@480C8000 { compatible = "ti,omap4-mailbox"; reg = <0x480C8000 0x200>; interrupts = <77>; ti,hwmods = "mailbox"; + #mbox-cells = <1>; ti,mbox-num-users = <4>; ti,mbox-num-fifos = <8>; mbox_wkupm3: wkup_m3 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ir.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ir.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..407848e85f31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/meson-ir.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* Amlogic Meson IR remote control receiver + +Required properties: + - compatible : should be "amlogic,meson6-ir" + - reg : physical base address and length of the device registers + - interrupts : a single specifier for the interrupt from the device + +Example: + + ir-receiver@c8100480 { + compatible= "amlogic,meson6-ir"; + reg = <0xc8100480 0x20>; + interrupts = <0 15 1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si4713.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si4713.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5ee5552d3465 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/media/si4713.txt @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +* Silicon Labs FM Radio transmitter + +The Silicon Labs Si4713 is an FM radio transmitter with receive power scan +supporting 76-108 MHz. It includes an RDS encoder and has both, a stereo-analog +and a digital interface, which supports I2S, left-justified and a custom +DSP-mode format. It is programmable through an I2C interface. + +Required Properties: +- compatible: Should contain "silabs,si4713" +- reg: the I2C address of the device + +Optional Properties: +- interrupts-extended: Interrupt specifier for the chips interrupt +- reset-gpios: GPIO specifier for the chips reset line +- vdd-supply: phandle for Vdd regulator +- vio-supply: phandle for Vio regulator + +Example: + +&i2c2 { + fmtx: si4713@63 { + compatible = "silabs,si4713"; + reg = <0x63>; + + interrupts-extended = <&gpio2 21 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; /* 53 */ + reset-gpios = <&gpio6 3 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; /* 163 */ + vio-supply = <&vio>; + vdd-supply = <&vaux1>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-sdram-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-sdram-controller.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..89657d1d4cd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/mvebu-sdram-controller.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Device Tree bindings for MVEBU SDRAM controllers + +The Marvell EBU SoCs all have a SDRAM controller. The SDRAM controller +differs from one SoC variant to another, but they also share a number +of commonalities. + +For now, this Device Tree binding documentation only documents the +Armada XP SDRAM controller. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: for Armada XP, "marvell,armada-xp-sdram-controller" + - reg: a resource specifier for the register space, which should + include all SDRAM controller registers as per the datasheet. + +Example: + +sdramc@1400 { + compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-sdram-controller"; + reg = <0x1400 0x500>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra-mc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra-mc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f3db93c85eea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/nvidia,tegra-mc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +NVIDIA Tegra Memory Controller device tree bindings +=================================================== + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "nvidia,tegra<chip>-mc" +- reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers. +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + - mc: the module's clock input +- interrupts: The interrupt outputs from the controller. +- #iommu-cells: Should be 1. The single cell of the IOMMU specifier defines + the SWGROUP of the master. + +This device implements an IOMMU that complies with the generic IOMMU binding. +See ../iommu/iommu.txt for details. + +Example: +-------- + + mc: memory-controller@0,70019000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-mc"; + reg = <0x0 0x70019000 0x0 0x1000>; + clocks = <&tegra_car TEGRA124_CLK_MC>; + clock-names = "mc"; + + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 77 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + #iommu-cells = <1>; + }; + + sdhci@0,700b0000 { + compatible = "nvidia,tegra124-sdhci"; + ... + iommus = <&mc TEGRA_SWGROUP_SDMMC1A>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f64de95a8e8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/atmel-hlcdc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +Device-Tree bindings for Atmel's HLCDC (High LCD Controller) MFD driver + +Required properties: + - compatible: value should be one of the following: + "atmel,sama5d3-hlcdc" + - reg: base address and size of the HLCDC device registers. + - clock-names: the name of the 3 clocks requested by the HLCDC device. + Should contain "periph_clk", "sys_clk" and "slow_clk". + - clocks: should contain the 3 clocks requested by the HLCDC device. + - interrupts: should contain the description of the HLCDC interrupt line + +The HLCDC IP exposes two subdevices: + - a PWM chip: see ../pwm/atmel-hlcdc-pwm.txt + - a Display Controller: see ../drm/atmel-hlcdc-dc.txt + +Example: + + hlcdc: hlcdc@f0030000 { + compatible = "atmel,sama5d3-hlcdc"; + reg = <0xf0030000 0x2000>; + clocks = <&lcdc_clk>, <&lcdck>, <&clk32k>; + clock-names = "periph_clk","sys_clk", "slow_clk"; + interrupts = <36 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 0>; + status = "disabled"; + + hlcdc-display-controller { + compatible = "atmel,hlcdc-display-controller"; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_lcd_base &pinctrl_lcd_rgb888>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + port@0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0>; + + hlcdc_panel_output: endpoint@0 { + reg = <0>; + remote-endpoint = <&panel_input>; + }; + }; + }; + + hlcdc_pwm: hlcdc-pwm { + compatible = "atmel,hlcdc-pwm"; + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_lcd_pwm>; + #pwm-cells = <3>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt index 678f3cf0b8f0..75fdfaf41831 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77686.txt @@ -34,6 +34,12 @@ to get matched with their hardware counterparts as follow: -BUCKn : for BUCKs, where n can lie in range 1 to 9. example: BUCK1, BUCK5, BUCK9. + Regulators which can be turned off during system suspend: + -LDOn : 2, 6-8, 10-12, 14-16, + -BUCKn : 1-4. + Use standard regulator bindings for it ('regulator-off-in-suspend'). + + Example: max77686@09 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt index 11921cc417bf..01e9f30fe678 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/max77693.txt @@ -27,6 +27,20 @@ Optional properties: [*] refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +- haptic : The MAX77693 haptic device utilises a PWM controlled motor to provide + users with tactile feedback. PWM period and duty-cycle are varied in + order to provide the approprite level of feedback. + + Required properties: + - compatible : Must be "maxim,max77693-hpatic" + - haptic-supply : power supply for the haptic motor + [*] refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt + - pwms : phandle to the physical PWM(Pulse Width Modulation) device. + PWM properties should be named "pwms". And number of cell is different + for each pwm device. + To get more informations, please refer to documentaion. + [*] refer Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm.txt + Example: max77693@66 { compatible = "maxim,max77693"; @@ -52,4 +66,11 @@ Example: regulator-boot-on; }; }; + + haptic { + compatible = "maxim,max77693-haptic"; + haptic-supply = <&haptic_supply>; + pwms = <&pwm 0 40000 0>; + pwm-names = "haptic"; + }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt index 0e4026a6cbbf..57a045016fca 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/s2mps11.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -* Samsung S2MPS11, S2MPS14 and S2MPU02 Voltage and Current Regulator +* Samsung S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14 and S2MPU02 Voltage and Current Regulator The Samsung S2MPS11 is a multi-function device which includes voltage and current regulators, RTC, charger controller and other sub-blocks. It is @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ interfaced to the host controller using an I2C interface. Each sub-block is addressed by the host system using different I2C slave addresses. Required properties: -- compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic" or "samsung,s2mps14-pmic" - or "samsung,s2mpu02-pmic". +- compatible: Should be "samsung,s2mps11-pmic" or "samsung,s2mps13-pmic" + or "samsung,s2mps14-pmic" or "samsung,s2mpu02-pmic". - reg: Specifies the I2C slave address of the pmic block. It should be 0x66. Optional properties: @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ Optional properties: - interrupts: Interrupt specifiers for interrupt sources. Optional nodes: -- clocks: s2mps11 and s5m8767 provide three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 KHz - outputs, so to register these as clocks with common clock framework +- clocks: s2mps11, s2mps13 and s5m8767 provide three(AP/CP/BT) buffered 32.768 + KHz outputs, so to register these as clocks with common clock framework instantiate a sub-node named "clocks". It uses the common clock binding documented in : [Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt] @@ -30,12 +30,12 @@ Optional nodes: the clock which they consume. Clock ID Devices ---------------------------------------------------------- - 32KhzAP 0 S2MPS11, S2MPS14, S5M8767 - 32KhzCP 1 S2MPS11, S5M8767 - 32KhzBT 2 S2MPS11, S2MPS14, S5M8767 + 32KhzAP 0 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S5M8767 + 32KhzCP 1 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S5M8767 + 32KhzBT 2 S2MPS11, S2MPS13, S2MPS14, S5M8767 - - compatible: Should be one of: "samsung,s2mps11-clk", "samsung,s2mps14-clk", - "samsung,s5m8767-clk" + - compatible: Should be one of: "samsung,s2mps11-clk", "samsung,s2mps13-clk", + "samsung,s2mps14-clk", "samsung,s5m8767-clk" - regulators: The regulators of s2mps11 that have to be instantiated should be included in a sub-node named 'regulators'. Regulator nodes included in this @@ -81,12 +81,14 @@ as per the datasheet of s2mps11. - LDOn - valid values for n are: - S2MPS11: 1 to 38 + - S2MPS13: 1 to 40 - S2MPS14: 1 to 25 - S2MPU02: 1 to 28 - Example: LDO1, LDO2, LDO28 - BUCKn - valid values for n are: - S2MPS11: 1 to 10 + - S2MPS13: 1 to 10 - S2MPS14: 1 to 5 - S2MPU02: 1 to 7 - Example: BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK9 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bcm3384-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bcm3384-intc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d4e0141d3620 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bcm3384-intc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +* Interrupt Controller + +Properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bcm3384-intc" + + Compatibility with BCM3384 and possibly other BCM33xx/BCM63xx SoCs. + +- reg: Address/length pairs for each mask/status register set. Length must + be 8. If multiple register sets are specified, the first set will + handle IRQ offsets 0..31, the second set 32..63, and so on. + +- interrupt-controller: This is an interrupt controller. + +- #interrupt-cells: Must be <1>. Just a simple IRQ offset; no level/edge + or polarity configuration is possible with this controller. + +- interrupt-parent: This controller is cascaded from a MIPS CPU HW IRQ, or + from another INTC. + +- interrupts: The IRQ on the parent controller. + +Example: + periph_intc: periph_intc@14e00038 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm3384-intc"; + + /* + * IRQs 0..31: mask reg 0x14e00038, status reg 0x14e0003c + * IRQs 32..63: mask reg 0x14e00340, status reg 0x14e00344 + */ + reg = <0x14e00038 0x8 0x14e00340 0x8>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + interrupt-parent = <&cpu_intc>; + interrupts = <4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bmips.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bmips.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8ef71b4085ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/bmips.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +* Broadcom MIPS (BMIPS) CPUs + +Required properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bmips3300", "brcm,bmips4350", "brcm,bmips4380", + "brcm,bmips5000" + +- mips-hpt-frequency: This is common to all CPUs in the system so it lives + under the "cpus" node. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/cm-dsl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/cm-dsl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8a139cb3c0b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/cm-dsl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +* Broadcom cable/DSL platforms + +SoCs: + +Required properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bcm3384", "brcm,bcm33843" + +Boards: + +Required properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bcm93384wvg" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/usb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/usb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..452c45c7bf29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/brcm/usb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +* Broadcom USB controllers + +Required properties: +- compatible: "brcm,bcm3384-ohci", "brcm,bcm3384-ehci" + + These currently use the generic-ohci and generic-ehci drivers. On some + systems, special handling may be needed in the following cases: + + - Restoring state after systemwide power save modes + - Sharing PHYs with the USBD (UDC) hardware + - Figuring out which controllers are disabled on ASIC bondout variants diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt index 13aa4b62c62a..fc149f326dae 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mips/cpu_irq.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ MIPS CPU interrupt controller -On MIPS the mips_cpu_intc_init() helper can be used to initialize the 8 CPU +On MIPS the mips_cpu_irq_of_init() helper can be used to initialize the 8 CPU IRQs from a devicetree file and create a irq_domain for IRQ controller. With the irq_domain in place we can describe how the 8 IRQs are wired to the @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Example devicetree: Example platform irq.c: static struct of_device_id __initdata of_irq_ids[] = { - { .compatible = "mti,cpu-interrupt-controller", .data = mips_cpu_intc_init }, + { .compatible = "mti,cpu-interrupt-controller", .data = mips_cpu_irq_of_init }, { .compatible = "ralink,rt2880-intc", .data = intc_of_init }, {}, }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt index 6cd3525d0e09..ee4fc0576c7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/exynos-dw-mshc.txt @@ -18,6 +18,10 @@ Required Properties: specific extensions. - "samsung,exynos5420-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos5420 specific extensions. + - "samsung,exynos7-dw-mshc": for controllers with Samsung Exynos7 + specific extensions. + - "samsung,exynos7-dw-mshc-smu": for controllers with Samsung Exynos7 + specific extensions having an SMU. * samsung,dw-mshc-ciu-div: Specifies the divider value for the card interface unit (ciu) clock. This property is applicable only for Exynos5 SoC's and diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/img-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/img-dw-mshc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..85de99fcaa2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/img-dw-mshc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +* Imagination specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage + Host Controller + +The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface +a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents +differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described +by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Imagination specific +extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. + +Required Properties: + +* compatible: should be + - "img,pistachio-dw-mshc": for Pistachio SoCs + +Example: + + mmc@18142000 { + compatible = "img,pistachio-dw-mshc"; + reg = <0x18142000 0x400>; + interrupts = <GIC_SHARED 39 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + + clocks = <&system_clk>, <&sdhost_clk>; + clock-names = "biu", "ciu"; + + fifo-depth = <0x20>; + bus-width = <4>; + num-slots = <1>; + disable-wp; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt index 86223c3eda90..4dd6deb90719 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-pxa.txt @@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Required properties: * for "marvell,armada-380-sdhci", two register areas. The first one for the SDHCI registers themselves, and the second one for the AXI/Mbus bridge registers of the SDHCI unit. +- clocks: Array of clocks required for SDHCI; requires at least one for + I/O clock. +- clock-names: Array of names corresponding to clocks property; shall be + "io" for I/O clock and "core" for optional core clock. Optional properties: - mrvl,clk-delay-cycles: Specify a number of cycles to delay for tuning. @@ -23,6 +27,8 @@ sdhci@d4280800 { reg = <0xd4280800 0x800>; bus-width = <8>; interrupts = <27>; + clocks = <&chip CLKID_SDIO1XIN>, <&chip CLKID_SDIO1>; + clock-names = "io", "core"; non-removable; mrvl,clk-delay-cycles = <31>; }; @@ -32,5 +38,6 @@ sdhci@d8000 { reg = <0xd8000 0x1000>, <0xdc000 0x100>; interrupts = <0 25 0x4>; clocks = <&gateclk 17>; + clock-names = "io"; mrvl,clk-delay-cycles = <0x1F>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt index 41354f730beb..26efd526d16c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/amd-xgbe.txt @@ -7,7 +7,10 @@ Required properties: - PCS registers - interrupt-parent: Should be the phandle for the interrupt controller that services interrupts for this device -- interrupts: Should contain the amd-xgbe interrupt +- interrupts: Should contain the amd-xgbe interrupt(s). The first interrupt + listed is required and is the general device interrupt. If the optional + amd,per-channel-interrupt property is specified, then one additional + interrupt for each DMA channel supported by the device should be specified - clocks: - DMA clock for the amd-xgbe device (used for calculating the correct Rx interrupt watchdog timer value on a DMA channel @@ -23,6 +26,9 @@ Optional properties: - mac-address: mac address to be assigned to the device. Can be overridden by UEFI. - dma-coherent: Present if dma operations are coherent +- amd,per-channel-interrupt: Indicates that Rx and Tx complete will generate + a unique interrupt for each DMA channel - this requires an additional + interrupt be configured for each DMA channel Example: xgbe@e0700000 { @@ -30,7 +36,9 @@ Example: reg = <0 0xe0700000 0 0x80000>, <0 0xe0780000 0 0x80000>; interrupt-parent = <&gic>; - interrupts = <0 325 4>; + interrupts = <0 325 4>, + <0 326 1>, <0 327 1>, <0 328 1>, <0 329 1>; + amd,per-channel-interrupt; clocks = <&xgbe_dma_clk>, <&xgbe_ptp_clk>; clock-names = "dma_clk", "ptp_clk"; phy-handle = <&phy>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt index 8f1ae81228e3..5a1d8b0c39e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/c_can.txt @@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ Bosch C_CAN/D_CAN controller Device Tree Bindings Required properties: - compatible : Should be "bosch,c_can" for C_CAN controllers and "bosch,d_can" for D_CAN controllers. + Can be "ti,dra7-d_can", "ti,am3352-d_can" or + "ti,am4372-d_can". - reg : physical base address and size of the C_CAN/D_CAN registers map - interrupts : property with a value describing the interrupt @@ -12,6 +14,9 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - ti,hwmods : Must be "d_can<n>" or "c_can<n>", n being the instance number +- syscon-raminit : Handle to system control region that contains the + RAMINIT register, register offset to the RAMINIT + register and the CAN instance number (0 offset). Note: "ti,hwmods" field is used to fetch the base address and irq resources from TI, omap hwmod data base during device registration. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt index a62c889aafca..e124847443f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Required properties: - dsa,ethernet : Should be a phandle to a valid Ethernet device node - dsa,mii-bus : Should be a phandle to a valid MDIO bus device node -Optionnal properties: +Optional properties: - interrupts : property with a value describing the switch interrupt number (not supported by the driver) @@ -23,6 +23,13 @@ Each of these switch child nodes should have the following required properties: - #address-cells : Must be 1 - #size-cells : Must be 0 +A switch child node has the following optional property: + +- eeprom-length : Set to the length of an EEPROM connected to the + switch. Must be set if the switch can not detect + the presence and/or size of a connected EEPROM, + otherwise optional. + A switch may have multiple "port" children nodes Each port children node must have the following mandatory properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel.txt index e1d99b95c4ec..87496a8c64ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/micrel.txt @@ -6,19 +6,32 @@ Optional properties: - micrel,led-mode : LED mode value to set for PHYs with configurable LEDs. - Configure the LED mode with single value. The list of PHYs and - the bits that are currently supported: + Configure the LED mode with single value. The list of PHYs and the + bits that are currently supported: - KSZ8001: register 0x1e, bits 15..14 - KSZ8041: register 0x1e, bits 15..14 - KSZ8021: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 - KSZ8031: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 - KSZ8051: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 + KSZ8001: register 0x1e, bits 15..14 + KSZ8041: register 0x1e, bits 15..14 + KSZ8021: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 + KSZ8031: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 + KSZ8051: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 + KSZ8081: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 + KSZ8091: register 0x1f, bits 5..4 - See the respective PHY datasheet for the mode values. + See the respective PHY datasheet for the mode values. + + - micrel,rmii-reference-clock-select-25-mhz: RMII Reference Clock Select + bit selects 25 MHz mode + + Setting the RMII Reference Clock Select bit enables 25 MHz rather + than 50 MHz clock mode. + + Note that this option in only needed for certain PHY revisions with a + non-standard, inverted function of this configuration bit. + Specifically, a clock reference ("rmii-ref" below) is always needed to + actually select a mode. - clocks, clock-names: contains clocks according to the common clock bindings. - supported clocks: - - KSZ8021, KSZ8031: "rmii-ref": The RMII refence input clock. Used - to determine the XI input clock. + supported clocks: + - KSZ8021, KSZ8031, KSZ8081, KSZ8091: "rmii-ref": The RMII reference + input clock. Used to determine the XI input clock. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt index 5b8c58903077..40831fbaff72 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/phy.txt @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ Optional Properties: specifications. If neither of these are specified, the default is to assume clause 22. The compatible list may also contain other elements. -- max-speed: Maximum PHY supported speed (10, 100, 1000...) If the phy's identifier is known then the list may contain an entry of the form: "ethernet-phy-idAAAA.BBBB" where @@ -29,6 +28,8 @@ Optional Properties: 4 hex digits. This is the chip vendor OUI bits 19:24, followed by 10 bits of a vendor specific ID. +- max-speed: Maximum PHY supported speed (10, 100, 1000...) + Example: ethernet-phy@0 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt index 34d4db1a4e25..2f6ec85fda8e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/sh_eth.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties: "renesas,ether-r8a7779" if the device is a part of R8A7779 SoC. "renesas,ether-r8a7790" if the device is a part of R8A7790 SoC. "renesas,ether-r8a7791" if the device is a part of R8A7791 SoC. + "renesas,ether-r8a7793" if the device is a part of R8A7793 SoC. "renesas,ether-r8a7794" if the device is a part of R8A7794 SoC. "renesas,ether-r7s72100" if the device is a part of R7S72100 SoC. - reg: offset and length of (1) the E-DMAC/feLic register block (required), diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt index 0f8487b88822..e77e167593db 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/smsc-lan91c111.txt @@ -11,3 +11,5 @@ Optional properties: are supported on the device. Valid value for SMSC LAN91c111 are 1, 2 or 4. If it's omitted or invalid, the size would be 2 meaning 16-bit access only. +- power-gpios: GPIO to control the PWRDWN pin +- reset-gpios: GPIO to control the RESET pin diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/nios2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/nios2.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d6d0a94cb3bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/nios2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +* Nios II Processor Binding + +This binding specifies what properties available in the device tree +representation of a Nios II Processor Core. + +Users can use sopc2dts tool for generating device tree sources (dts) from a +Qsys system. See more detail in: http://www.alterawiki.com/wiki/Sopc2dts + +Required properties: + +- compatible: Compatible property value should be "altr,nios2-1.0". +- reg: Contains CPU index. +- interrupt-controller: Specifies that the node is an interrupt controller +- #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an + interrupt source, should be 1. +- clock-frequency: Contains the clock frequency for CPU, in Hz. +- dcache-line-size: Contains data cache line size. +- icache-line-size: Contains instruction line size. +- dcache-size: Contains data cache size. +- icache-size: Contains instruction cache size. +- altr,pid-num-bits: Specifies the number of bits to use to represent the process + identifier (PID). +- altr,tlb-num-ways: Specifies the number of set-associativity ways in the TLB. +- altr,tlb-num-entries: Specifies the number of entries in the TLB. +- altr,tlb-ptr-sz: Specifies size of TLB pointer. +- altr,has-mul: Specifies CPU hardware multipy support, should be 1. +- altr,has-mmu: Specifies CPU support MMU support, should be 1. +- altr,has-initda: Specifies CPU support initda instruction, should be 1. +- altr,reset-addr: Specifies CPU reset address +- altr,fast-tlb-miss-addr: Specifies CPU fast TLB miss exception address +- altr,exception-addr: Specifies CPU exception address + +Optional properties: +- altr,has-div: Specifies CPU hardware divide support +- altr,implementation: Nios II core implementation, this should be "fast"; + +Example: + +cpu@0x0 { + device_type = "cpu"; + compatible = "altr,nios2-1.0"; + reg = <0>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + clock-frequency = <125000000>; + dcache-line-size = <32>; + icache-line-size = <32>; + dcache-size = <32768>; + icache-size = <32768>; + altr,implementation = "fast"; + altr,pid-num-bits = <8>; + altr,tlb-num-ways = <16>; + altr,tlb-num-entries = <128>; + altr,tlb-ptr-sz = <7>; + altr,has-div = <1>; + altr,has-mul = <1>; + altr,reset-addr = <0xc2800000>; + altr,fast-tlb-miss-addr = <0xc7fff400>; + altr,exception-addr = <0xd0000020>; + altr,has-initda = <1>; + altr,has-mmu = <1>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..904a5846d7ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nios2/timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +Altera Timer + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "altr,timer-1.0" +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. +- interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt controller +- interrupts : Should contain the timer interrupt number +- clock-frequency : The frequency of the clock that drives the counter, in Hz. + +Example: + +timer { + compatible = "altr,timer-1.0"; + reg = <0x00400000 0x00000020>; + interrupt-parent = <&cpu>; + interrupts = <11>; + clock-frequency = <125000000>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6286f049bf18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/layerscape-pci.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +Freescale Layerscape PCIe controller + +This PCIe host controller is based on the Synopsis Designware PCIe IP +and thus inherits all the common properties defined in designware-pcie.txt. + +Required properties: +- compatible: should contain the platform identifier such as "fsl,ls1021a-pcie" +- reg: base addresses and lengths of the PCIe controller +- interrupts: A list of interrupt outputs of the controller. Must contain an + entry for each entry in the interrupt-names property. +- interrupt-names: Must include the following entries: + "intr": The interrupt that is asserted for controller interrupts +- fsl,pcie-scfg: Must include two entries. + The first entry must be a link to the SCFG device node + The second entry must be '0' or '1' based on physical PCIe controller index. + This is used to get SCFG PEXN registers + +Example: + + pcie@3400000 { + compatible = "fsl,ls1021a-pcie", "snps,dw-pcie"; + reg = <0x00 0x03400000 0x0 0x00010000 /* controller registers */ + 0x40 0x00000000 0x0 0x00002000>; /* configuration space */ + reg-names = "regs", "config"; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 177 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; /* controller interrupt */ + interrupt-names = "intr"; + fsl,pcie-scfg = <&scfg 0>; + #address-cells = <3>; + #size-cells = <2>; + device_type = "pci"; + num-lanes = <4>; + bus-range = <0x0 0xff>; + ranges = <0x81000000 0x0 0x00000000 0x40 0x00010000 0x0 0x00010000 /* downstream I/O */ + 0xc2000000 0x0 0x20000000 0x40 0x20000000 0x0 0x20000000 /* prefetchable memory */ + 0x82000000 0x0 0x40000000 0x40 0x40000000 0x0 0x40000000>; /* non-prefetchable memory */ + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + interrupt-map-mask = <0 0 0 7>; + interrupt-map = <0000 0 0 1 &gic GIC_SPI 91 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0000 0 0 2 &gic GIC_SPI 188 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0000 0 0 3 &gic GIC_SPI 190 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>, + <0000 0 0 4 &gic GIC_SPI 192 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt index 41aeed38926d..f8fbe9af7b2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pci/pci.txt @@ -7,3 +7,14 @@ And for the interrupt mapping part: Open Firmware Recommended Practice: Interrupt Mapping http://www.openfirmware.org/1275/practice/imap/imap0_9d.pdf + +Additionally to the properties specified in the above standards a host bridge +driver implementation may support the following properties: + +- linux,pci-domain: + If present this property assigns a fixed PCI domain number to a host bridge, + otherwise an unstable (across boots) unique number will be assigned. + It is required to either not set this property at all or set it for all + host bridges in the system, otherwise potentially conflicting domain numbers + may be assigned to root buses behind different host bridges. The domain + number for each host bridge in the system must be unique. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt index a186181c402b..51b943cc9770 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pdc-pinctrl.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -TZ1090-PDC's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number +TZ1090-PDC's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt index 4b27c99f7f9d..509faa87ad0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/img,tz1090-pinctrl.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -TZ1090's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +TZ1090's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Valid values for pin and group names are: They also all support the some form of muxing. Any pins which are contained in one of the mux groups (see below) can be muxed only to the functions supported by the mux group. All other pins can be muxed to the "perip" - function which which enables them with their intended peripheral. + function which enables them with their intended peripheral. Different pins in the same mux group cannot be muxed to different functions, however it is possible to mux only a subset of the pins in a mux group to a diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt index daa768956069..ac4da9fe07bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,falcon-pinumx.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt index b5469db1d7ad..e89b4677567d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/lantiq,xway-pinumx.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Lantiq's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those group(s), and two pin configuration parameters: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..17e7240c6998 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/meson,pinctrl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +== Amlogic Meson pinmux controller == + +Required properties for the root node: + - compatible: "amlogic,meson8-pinctrl" + - reg: address and size of registers controlling irq functionality + +=== GPIO sub-nodes === + +The 2 power domains of the controller (regular and always-on) are +represented as sub-nodes and each of them acts as a GPIO controller. + +Required properties for sub-nodes are: + - reg: should contain address and size for mux, pull-enable, pull and + gpio register sets + - reg-names: an array of strings describing the "reg" entries. Must + contain "mux", "pull" and "gpio". "pull-enable" is optional and + when it is missing the "pull" registers are used instead + - gpio-controller: identifies the node as a gpio controller + - #gpio-cells: must be 2 + +Valid sub-node names are: + - "banks" for the regular domain + - "ao-bank" for the always-on domain + +=== Other sub-nodes === + +Child nodes without the "gpio-controller" represent some desired +configuration for a pin or a group. Those nodes can be pinmux nodes or +configuration nodes. + +Required properties for pinmux nodes are: + - groups: a list of pinmux groups. The list of all available groups + depends on the SoC and can be found in driver sources. + - function: the name of a function to activate for the specified set + of groups. The list of all available functions depends on the SoC + and can be found in driver sources. + +Required properties for configuration nodes: + - pins: a list of pin names + +Configuration nodes support the generic properties "bias-disable", +"bias-pull-up" and "bias-pull-down", described in file +pinctrl-bindings.txt + +=== Example === + + pinctrl: pinctrl@c1109880 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson8-pinctrl"; + reg = <0xc1109880 0x10>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + gpio: banks@c11080b0 { + reg = <0xc11080b0 0x28>, + <0xc11080e8 0x18>, + <0xc1108120 0x18>, + <0xc1108030 0x30>; + reg-names = "mux", "pull", "pull-enable", "gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + + gpio_ao: ao-bank@c1108030 { + reg = <0xc8100014 0x4>, + <0xc810002c 0x4>, + <0xc8100024 0x8>; + reg-names = "mux", "pull", "gpio"; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + + nand { + mux { + groups = "nand_io", "nand_io_ce0", "nand_io_ce1", + "nand_io_rb0", "nand_ale", "nand_cle", + "nand_wen_clk", "nand_ren_clk", "nand_dqs", + "nand_ce2", "nand_ce3"; + function = "nand"; + }; + }; + + uart_ao_a { + mux { + groups = "uart_tx_ao_a", "uart_rx_ao_a", + "uart_cts_ao_a", "uart_rts_ao_a"; + function = "uart_ao"; + }; + + conf { + pins = "GPIOAO_0", "GPIOAO_1", + "GPIOAO_2", "GPIOAO_3"; + bias-disable; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt index 61e73cde9ae9..3c8ce28baad6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/nvidia,tegra20-pinmux.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Tegra's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Tegra's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt index 98eb94d91a1c..47d84b6ee91b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt @@ -216,4 +216,4 @@ arguments are described below. or 0 to disable debouncing More in-depth documentation on these parameters can be found in -<include/linux/pinctrl/pinconfig-generic.h> +<include/linux/pinctrl/pinconf-generic.h> diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt index c596a6ad3285..5f55be59d914 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-sirf.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Optional properties: Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices. -SiRFprimaII's pinmux nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of subnodes. +SiRFprimaII's pinmux nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a group of pins. Required subnode-properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt index b4480d5c3aca..458615596946 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl_spear.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Required properties: Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices. -SPEAr's pinmux nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of subnodes. Each +SPEAr's pinmux nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents muxing for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt index 2fb90b37aa09..a7bde64798c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt index ffafa1990a30..c4ea61ac56f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,apq8084-pinctrl.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt index e33e4dcdce79..6e88e91feb11 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,ipq8064-pinctrl.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt index 93b7de91b9f6..eb8d8aa41f20 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8960-pinctrl.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt index d2ea80dc43eb..e4d6a9d20f7d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,msm8974-pinctrl.txt @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an abitrary number of +Qualcomm's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ed08048516a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.txt @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +Qualcomm PMIC GPIO block + +This binding describes the GPIO block(s) found in the 8xxx series of +PMIC's from Qualcomm. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: must be one of: + "qcom,pm8018-gpio" + "qcom,pm8038-gpio" + "qcom,pm8058-gpio" + "qcom,pm8917-gpio" + "qcom,pm8921-gpio" + "qcom,pm8941-gpio" + "qcom,pma8084-gpio" + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Register base of the GPIO block and length. + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Must contain an array of encoded interrupt specifiers for + each available GPIO + +- gpio-controller: + Usage: required + Value type: <none> + Definition: Mark the device node as a GPIO controller + +- #gpio-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Must be 2; + the first cell will be used to define gpio number and the + second denotes the flags for this gpio + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin or a list of pins. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those pin(s), and various pin configuration +parameters, as listed below. + + +SUBNODES: + +The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated +and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + +The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid +to specify in a pin configuration subnode: + +- pins: + Usage: required + Value type: <string-array> + Definition: List of gpio pins affected by the properties specified in + this subnode. Valid pins are: + gpio1-gpio6 for pm8018 + gpio1-gpio12 for pm8038 + gpio1-gpio40 for pm8058 + gpio1-gpio38 for pm8917 + gpio1-gpio44 for pm8921 + gpio1-gpio36 for pm8941 + gpio1-gpio22 for pma8084 + +- function: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Specify the alternative function to be configured for the + specified pins. Valid values are: + "normal", + "paired", + "func1", + "func2", + "dtest1", + "dtest2", + "dtest3", + "dtest4" + +- bias-disable: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins should be configured as no pull. + +- bias-pull-down: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins should be configured as pull down. + +- bias-pull-up: + Usage: optional + Value type: <empty> + Definition: The specified pins should be configured as pull up. + +- qcom,pull-up-strength: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Specifies the strength to use for pull up, if selected. + Valid values are; as defined in + <dt-bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.h>: + 1: 30uA (PMIC_GPIO_PULL_UP_30) + 2: 1.5uA (PMIC_GPIO_PULL_UP_1P5) + 3: 31.5uA (PMIC_GPIO_PULL_UP_31P5) + 4: 1.5uA + 30uA boost (PMIC_GPIO_PULL_UP_1P5_30) + If this property is ommited 30uA strength will be used if + pull up is selected + +- bias-high-impedance: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins will put in high-Z mode and disabled. + +- input-enable: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are put in input mode. + +- output-high: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in output mode, driven + high. + +- output-low: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in output mode, driven + low. + +- power-source: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Selects the power source for the specified pins. Valid + power sources are defined per chip in + <dt-bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.h> + +- qcom,drive-strength: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Selects the drive strength for the specified pins. Value + drive strengths are: + 0: no (PMIC_GPIO_STRENGTH_NO) + 1: high (PMIC_GPIO_STRENGTH_HIGH) 0.9mA @ 1.8V - 1.9mA @ 2.6V + 2: medium (PMIC_GPIO_STRENGTH_MED) 0.6mA @ 1.8V - 1.25mA @ 2.6V + 3: low (PMIC_GPIO_STRENGTH_LOW) 0.15mA @ 1.8V - 0.3mA @ 2.6V + as defined in <dt-bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-gpio.h> + +- drive-push-pull: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in push-pull mode. + +- drive-open-drain: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in open-drain mode. + +- drive-open-source: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in open-source mode. + +Example: + + pm8921_gpio: gpio@150 { + compatible = "qcom,pm8921-gpio"; + reg = <0x150 0x160>; + interrupts = <192 1>, <193 1>, <194 1>, + <195 1>, <196 1>, <197 1>, + <198 1>, <199 1>, <200 1>, + <201 1>, <202 1>, <203 1>, + <204 1>, <205 1>, <206 1>, + <207 1>, <208 1>, <209 1>, + <210 1>, <211 1>, <212 1>, + <213 1>, <214 1>, <215 1>, + <216 1>, <217 1>, <218 1>, + <219 1>, <220 1>, <221 1>, + <222 1>, <223 1>, <224 1>, + <225 1>, <226 1>, <227 1>, + <228 1>, <229 1>, <230 1>, + <231 1>, <232 1>, <233 1>, + <234 1>, <235 1>; + + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + + pm8921_gpio_keys: gpio-keys { + volume-keys { + pins = "gpio20", "gpio21"; + function = "normal"; + + input-enable; + bias-pull-up; + drive-push-pull; + qcom,drive-strength = <PMIC_GPIO_STRENGTH_NO>; + power-source = <PM8921_GPIO_S4>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-mpp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-mpp.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..854774b194ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-mpp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +Qualcomm PMIC Multi-Purpose Pin (MPP) block + +This binding describes the MPP block(s) found in the 8xxx series +of PMIC's from Qualcomm. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Should contain one of: + "qcom,pm8841-mpp", + "qcom,pm8941-mpp", + "qcom,pma8084-mpp", + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Register base of the MPP block and length. + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Must contain an array of encoded interrupt specifiers for + each available MPP + +- gpio-controller: + Usage: required + Value type: <none> + Definition: Mark the device node as a GPIO controller + +- #gpio-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Must be 2; + the first cell will be used to define MPP number and the + second denotes the flags for this MPP + +Please refer to ../gpio/gpio.txt and ../interrupt-controller/interrupts.txt for +a general description of GPIO and interrupt bindings. + +Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the +common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the +phrase "pin configuration node". + +The pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of +subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a +pin or a list of pins. This configuration can include the +mux function to select on those pin(s), and various pin configuration +parameters, as listed below. + +SUBNODES: + +The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated +and processed purely based on their content. + +Each subnode only affects those parameters that are explicitly listed. In +other words, a subnode that lists a mux function but no pin configuration +parameters implies no information about any pin configuration parameters. +Similarly, a pin subnode that describes a pullup parameter implies no +information about e.g. the mux function. + +The following generic properties as defined in pinctrl-bindings.txt are valid +to specify in a pin configuration subnode: + +- pins: + Usage: required + Value type: <string-array> + Definition: List of MPP pins affected by the properties specified in + this subnode. Valid pins are: + mpp1-mpp4 for pm8841 + mpp1-mpp8 for pm8941 + mpp1-mpp4 for pma8084 + +- function: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: Specify the alternative function to be configured for the + specified pins. Valid values are: + "normal", + "paired", + "dtest1", + "dtest2", + "dtest3", + "dtest4" + +- bias-disable: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins should be configured as no pull. + +- bias-pull-up: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: The specified pins should be configured as pull up. + Valid values are 600, 10000 and 30000 in bidirectional mode + only, i.e. when operating in qcom,analog-mode and input and + outputs are enabled. The hardware ignores the configuration + when operating in other modes. + +- bias-high-impedance: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins will put in high-Z mode and disabled. + +- input-enable: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are put in input mode, i.e. their input + buffer is enabled + +- output-high: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in output mode, driven + high. + +- output-low: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: The specified pins are configured in output mode, driven + low. + +- power-source: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Selects the power source for the specified pins. Valid power + sources are defined in <dt-bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-mpp.h> + +- qcom,analog-mode: + Usage: optional + Value type: <none> + Definition: Selects Analog mode of operation: combined with input-enable + and/or output-high, output-low MPP could operate as + Bidirectional Logic, Analog Input, Analog Output. + +- qcom,amux-route: + Usage: optional + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Selects the source for analog input. Valid values are + defined in <dt-bindings/pinctrl/qcom,pmic-mpp.h> + PMIC_MPP_AMUX_ROUTE_CH5, PMIC_MPP_AMUX_ROUTE_CH6... + +Example: + + mpps@a000 { + compatible = "qcom,pm8841-mpp"; + reg = <0xa000>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupts = <4 0xa0 0 0>, <4 0xa1 0 0>, <4 0xa2 0 0>, <4 0xa3 0 0>; + + pinctrl-names = "default"; + pinctrl-0 = <&pm8841_default>; + + pm8841_default: default { + gpio { + pins = "mpp1", "mpp2", "mpp3", "mpp4"; + function = "normal"; + input-enable; + power-source = <PM8841_MPP_S3>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt index e82aaf492517..8425838a6dff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/samsung-pinctrl.txt @@ -18,6 +18,7 @@ Required Properties: - "samsung,exynos5250-pinctrl": for Exynos5250 compatible pin-controller. - "samsung,exynos5260-pinctrl": for Exynos5260 compatible pin-controller. - "samsung,exynos5420-pinctrl": for Exynos5420 compatible pin-controller. + - "samsung,exynos7-pinctrl": for Exynos7 compatible pin-controller. - reg: Base address of the pin controller hardware module and length of the address space it occupies. @@ -136,6 +137,8 @@ B. External Wakeup Interrupts: For supporting external wakeup interrupts, a found on Samsung S3C64xx SoCs, - samsung,exynos4210-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller found on Samsung Exynos4210 and S5PC110/S5PV210 SoCs. + - samsung,exynos7-wakeup-eint: represents wakeup interrupt controller + found on Samsung Exynos7 SoC. - interrupt-parent: phandle of the interrupt parent to which the external wakeup interrupts are forwarded to. - interrupts: interrupt used by multiplexed wakeup interrupts. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt index e3865e136067..87697420439e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ste,abx500.txt @@ -8,42 +8,8 @@ Please refer to pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by client devices, including the meaning of the phrase "pin configuration node". -ST Ericsson's pin configuration nodes act as a container for an arbitrary number of -subnodes. Each of these subnodes represents some desired configuration for a -pin, a group, or a list of pins or groups. This configuration can include the -mux function to select on those pin(s)/group(s), and various pin configuration -parameters, such as input, output, pull up, pull down... - -The name of each subnode is not important; all subnodes should be enumerated -and processed purely based on their content. - -Required subnode-properties: -- ste,pins : An array of strings. Each string contains the name of a pin or - group. - -Optional subnode-properties: -- ste,function: A string containing the name of the function to mux to the - pin or group. - -- generic pin configuration option to use. Example : - - default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO1"; - bias-disable; - }; - -- ste,config: Handle of pin configuration node containing the generic - pinconfig options to use, as described in pinctrl-bindings.txt in - this directory. Example : - - pcfg_bias_disable: pcfg_bias_disable { - bias-disable; - }; - - default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO1"; - ste.config = <&pcfg_bias_disable>; - }; +ST Ericsson's pin configuration nodes use the generic pin multiplexing +and pin configuration bindings, see pinctrl-bindings.txt Example board file extract: @@ -54,11 +20,11 @@ Example board file extract: sysclkreq2 { sysclkreq2_default_mode: sysclkreq2_default { default_mux { - ste,function = "sysclkreq"; - ste,pins = "sysclkreq2_d_1"; + function = "sysclkreq"; + groups = "sysclkreq2_d_1"; }; default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO1"; + pins = "GPIO1"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -66,11 +32,11 @@ Example board file extract: sysclkreq3 { sysclkreq3_default_mode: sysclkreq3_default { default_mux { - ste,function = "sysclkreq"; - ste,pins = "sysclkreq3_d_1"; + function = "sysclkreq"; + groups = "sysclkreq3_d_1"; }; default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO2"; + pins = "GPIO2"; output-low; }; }; @@ -78,11 +44,11 @@ Example board file extract: gpio3 { gpio3_default_mode: gpio3_default { default_mux { - ste,function = "gpio"; - ste,pins = "gpio3_a_1"; + function = "gpio"; + groups = "gpio3_a_1"; }; default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO3"; + pins = "GPIO3"; output-low; }; }; @@ -90,11 +56,11 @@ Example board file extract: sysclkreq6 { sysclkreq6_default_mode: sysclkreq6_default { default_mux { - ste,function = "sysclkreq"; - ste,pins = "sysclkreq6_d_1"; + function = "sysclkreq"; + groups = "sysclkreq6_d_1"; }; default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO4"; + pins = "GPIO4"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -102,11 +68,11 @@ Example board file extract: pwmout1 { pwmout1_default_mode: pwmout1_default { default_mux { - ste,function = "pwmout"; - ste,pins = "pwmout1_d_1"; + function = "pwmout"; + groups = "pwmout1_d_1"; }; default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO14"; + pins = "GPIO14"; output-low; }; }; @@ -114,11 +80,11 @@ Example board file extract: pwmout2 { pwmout2_default_mode: pwmout2_default { pwmout2_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwmout"; - ste,pins = "pwmout2_d_1"; + function = "pwmout"; + groups = "pwmout2_d_1"; }; pwmout2_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO15"; + pins = "GPIO15"; output-low; }; }; @@ -126,11 +92,11 @@ Example board file extract: pwmout3 { pwmout3_default_mode: pwmout3_default { pwmout3_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwmout"; - ste,pins = "pwmout3_d_1"; + function = "pwmout"; + groups = "pwmout3_d_1"; }; pwmout3_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO16"; + pins = "GPIO16"; output-low; }; }; @@ -139,15 +105,15 @@ Example board file extract: adi1_default_mode: adi1_default { adi1_default_mux { - ste,function = "adi1"; - ste,pins = "adi1_d_1"; + function = "adi1"; + groups = "adi1_d_1"; }; adi1_default_cfg1 { - ste,pins = "GPIO17","GPIO19","GPIO20"; + pins = "GPIO17","GPIO19","GPIO20"; bias-disable; }; adi1_default_cfg2 { - ste,pins = "GPIO18"; + pins = "GPIO18"; output-low; }; }; @@ -155,15 +121,15 @@ Example board file extract: dmic12 { dmic12_default_mode: dmic12_default { dmic12_default_mux { - ste,function = "dmic"; - ste,pins = "dmic12_d_1"; + function = "dmic"; + groups = "dmic12_d_1"; }; dmic12_default_cfg1 { - ste,pins = "GPIO27"; + pins = "GPIO27"; output-low; }; dmic12_default_cfg2 { - ste,pins = "GPIO28"; + pins = "GPIO28"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -171,15 +137,15 @@ Example board file extract: dmic34 { dmic34_default_mode: dmic34_default { dmic34_default_mux { - ste,function = "dmic"; - ste,pins = "dmic34_d_1"; + function = "dmic"; + groups = "dmic34_d_1"; }; dmic34_default_cfg1 { - ste,pins = "GPIO29"; + pins = "GPIO29"; output-low; }; dmic34_default_cfg2 { - ste,pins = "GPIO30"; + pins = "GPIO30"; bias-disable;{ }; @@ -188,15 +154,15 @@ Example board file extract: dmic56 { dmic56_default_mode: dmic56_default { dmic56_default_mux { - ste,function = "dmic"; - ste,pins = "dmic56_d_1"; + function = "dmic"; + groups = "dmic56_d_1"; }; dmic56_default_cfg1 { - ste,pins = "GPIO31"; + pins = "GPIO31"; output-low; }; dmic56_default_cfg2 { - ste,pins = "GPIO32"; + pins = "GPIO32"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -204,11 +170,11 @@ Example board file extract: sysclkreq5 { sysclkreq5_default_mode: sysclkreq5_default { sysclkreq5_default_mux { - ste,function = "sysclkreq"; - ste,pins = "sysclkreq5_d_1"; + function = "sysclkreq"; + groups = "sysclkreq5_d_1"; }; sysclkreq5_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO42"; + pins = "GPIO42"; output-low; }; }; @@ -216,11 +182,11 @@ Example board file extract: batremn { batremn_default_mode: batremn_default { batremn_default_mux { - ste,function = "batremn"; - ste,pins = "batremn_d_1"; + function = "batremn"; + groups = "batremn_d_1"; }; batremn_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO43"; + pins = "GPIO43"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -228,11 +194,11 @@ Example board file extract: service { service_default_mode: service_default { service_default_mux { - ste,function = "service"; - ste,pins = "service_d_1"; + function = "service"; + groups = "service_d_1"; }; service_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO44"; + pins = "GPIO44"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -240,13 +206,13 @@ Example board file extract: pwrctrl0 { pwrctrl0_default_mux: pwrctrl0_mux { pwrctrl0_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwrctrl"; - ste,pins = "pwrctrl0_d_1"; + function = "pwrctrl"; + groups = "pwrctrl0_d_1"; }; }; pwrctrl0_default_mode: pwrctrl0_default { pwrctrl0_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO45"; + pins = "GPIO45"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -254,13 +220,13 @@ Example board file extract: pwrctrl1 { pwrctrl1_default_mux: pwrctrl1_mux { pwrctrl1_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwrctrl"; - ste,pins = "pwrctrl1_d_1"; + function = "pwrctrl"; + groups = "pwrctrl1_d_1"; }; }; pwrctrl1_default_mode: pwrctrl1_default { pwrctrl1_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO46"; + pins = "GPIO46"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -268,11 +234,11 @@ Example board file extract: pwmextvibra1 { pwmextvibra1_default_mode: pwmextvibra1_default { pwmextvibra1_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwmextvibra"; - ste,pins = "pwmextvibra1_d_1"; + function = "pwmextvibra"; + groups = "pwmextvibra1_d_1"; }; pwmextvibra1_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO47"; + pins = "GPIO47"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -280,11 +246,11 @@ Example board file extract: pwmextvibra2 { pwmextvibra2_default_mode: pwmextvibra2_default { pwmextvibra2_default_mux { - ste,function = "pwmextvibra"; - ste,pins = "pwmextvibra2_d_1"; + function = "pwmextvibra"; + groups = "pwmextvibra2_d_1"; }; pwmextvibra1_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO48"; + pins = "GPIO48"; bias-disable; }; }; @@ -292,11 +258,11 @@ Example board file extract: gpio51 { gpio51_default_mode: gpio51_default { gpio51_default_mux { - ste,function = "gpio"; - ste,pins = "gpio51_a_1"; + function = "gpio"; + groups = "gpio51_a_1"; }; gpio51_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO51"; + pins = "GPIO51"; output-low; }; }; @@ -304,11 +270,11 @@ Example board file extract: gpio52 { gpio52_default_mode: gpio52_default { gpio52_default_mux { - ste,function = "gpio"; - ste,pins = "gpio52_a_1"; + function = "gpio"; + groups = "gpio52_a_1"; }; gpio52_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO52"; + pins = "GPIO52"; bias-pull-down; }; }; @@ -316,11 +282,11 @@ Example board file extract: gpio53 { gpio53_default_mode: gpio53_default { gpio53_default_mux { - ste,function = "gpio"; - ste,pins = "gpio53_a_1"; + function = "gpio"; + groups = "gpio53_a_1"; }; gpio53_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO53"; + pins = "GPIO53"; bias-pull-down; }; }; @@ -328,11 +294,11 @@ Example board file extract: gpio54 { gpio54_default_mode: gpio54_default { gpio54_default_mux { - ste,function = "gpio"; - ste,pins = "gpio54_a_1"; + function = "gpio"; + groups = "gpio54_a_1"; }; gpio54_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO54"; + pins = "GPIO54"; output-low; }; }; @@ -340,11 +306,11 @@ Example board file extract: pdmclkdat { pdmclkdat_default_mode: pdmclkdat_default { pdmclkdat_default_mux { - ste,function = "pdm"; - ste,pins = "pdmclkdat_d_1"; + function = "pdm"; + groups = "pdmclkdat_d_1"; }; pdmclkdat_default_cfg { - ste,pins = "GPIO55", "GPIO56"; + pins = "GPIO55", "GPIO56"; bias-disable; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4f7a3bc9c407 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +* Generic system power control capability + +Power-management integrated circuits or miscellaneous hardware components are +sometimes able to control the system power. The device driver associated with these +components might need to define this capability, which tells the kernel that +it can be used to switch off the system. The corresponding device must have the +standard property "system-power-controller" in its device node. This property +marks the device as able to control the system power. In order to test if this +property is found programmatically, use the helper function +"of_device_is_system_power_controller" from of.h . + +Example: + +act8846: act8846@5 { + compatible = "active-semi,act8846"; + status = "okay"; + system-power-controller; +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/imx-snvs-poweroff.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/imx-snvs-poweroff.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dc7c9bad63ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power_supply/imx-snvs-poweroff.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +i.mx6 Poweroff Driver + +SNVS_LPCR in SNVS module can power off the whole system by pull +PMIC_ON_REQ low if PMIC_ON_REQ is connected with external PMIC. +If you don't want to use PMIC_ON_REQ as power on/off control, +please set status='disabled' to disable this driver. + +Required Properties: +-compatible: "fsl,sec-v4.0-poweroff" +-reg: Specifies the physical address of the SNVS_LPCR register + +Example: + snvs@020cc000 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-mon", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0 0x020cc000 0x4000>; + ..... + snvs_poweroff: snvs-poweroff@38 { + compatible = "fsl,sec-v4.0-poweroff"; + reg = <0x38 0x4>; + }; + } diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/fman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/fman.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..edeea160ca39 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/fman.txt @@ -0,0 +1,534 @@ +============================================================================= +Freescale Frame Manager Device Bindings + +CONTENTS + - FMan Node + - FMan Port Node + - FMan MURAM Node + - FMan dTSEC/XGEC/mEMAC Node + - FMan IEEE 1588 Node + - Example + +============================================================================= +FMan Node + +DESCRIPTION + +Due to the fact that the FMan is an aggregation of sub-engines (ports, MACs, +etc.) the FMan node will have child nodes for each of them. + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,fman" + FMan version can be determined via FM_IP_REV_1 register in the + FMan block. The offset is 0xc4 from the beginning of the + Frame Processing Manager memory map (0xc3000 from the + beginning of the FMan node). + +- cell-index + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Specifies the index of the FMan unit. + + The cell-index value may be used by the SoC, to identify the + FMan unit in the SoC memory map. In the table bellow, + there's a description of the cell-index use in each SoC: + + - P1023: + register[bit] FMan unit cell-index + ============================================================ + DEVDISR[1] 1 0 + + - P2041, P3041, P4080 P5020, P5040: + register[bit] FMan unit cell-index + ============================================================ + DCFG_DEVDISR2[6] 1 0 + DCFG_DEVDISR2[14] 2 1 + (Second FM available only in P4080 and P5040) + + - B4860, T1040, T2080, T4240: + register[bit] FMan unit cell-index + ============================================================ + DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2[24] 1 0 + DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2[25] 2 1 + (Second FM available only in T4240) + + DEVDISR, DCFG_DEVDISR2 and DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2 are located in + the specific SoC "Device Configuration/Pin Control" Memory + Map. + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. Specifies the offset of the + following configuration registers: + - BMI configuration registers. + - QMI configuration registers. + - DMA configuration registers. + - FPM configuration registers. + - FMan controller configuration registers. + +- ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. + +- clocks + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: phandle for the fman input clock. + +- clock-names + usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: "fmanclk" for the fman input clock. + +- interrupts + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A pair of IRQs are specified in this property. + The first element is associated with the event interrupts and + the second element is associated with the error interrupts. + +- fsl,qman-channel-range + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Specifies the range of the available dedicated + channels in the FMan. The first cell specifies the beginning + of the range and the second cell specifies the number of + channels. + Further information available at: + "Work Queue (WQ) Channel Assignments in the QMan" section + in DPAA Reference Manual. + +- fsl,qman +- fsl,bman + Usage: required + Definition: See soc/fsl/qman.txt and soc/fsl/bman.txt + +============================================================================= +FMan MURAM Node + +DESCRIPTION + +FMan Internal memory - shared between all the FMan modules. +It contains data structures that are common and written to or read by +the modules. +FMan internal memory is split into the following parts: + Packet buffering (Tx/Rx FIFOs) + Frames internal context + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,fman-muram" + +- ranges + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. + Specifies the multi-user memory offset and the size within + the FMan. + +EXAMPLE + +muram@0 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-muram"; + ranges = <0 0x000000 0x28000>; +}; + +============================================================================= +FMan Port Node + +DESCRIPTION + +The Frame Manager (FMan) supports several types of hardware ports: + Ethernet receiver (RX) + Ethernet transmitter (TX) + Offline/Host command (O/H) + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: A standard property. + Must include one of the following: + - "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh" for FManV2 OH ports + - "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx" for FManV2 RX ports + - "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx" for FManV2 TX ports + - "fsl,fman-v3-port-oh" for FManV3 OH ports + - "fsl,fman-v3-port-rx" for FManV3 RX ports + - "fsl,fman-v3-port-tx" for FManV3 TX ports + +- cell-index + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Specifies the hardware port id. + Each hardware port on the FMan has its own hardware PortID. + Super set of all hardware Port IDs available at FMan Reference + Manual under "FMan Hardware Ports in Freescale Devices" table. + + Each hardware port is assigned a 4KB, port-specific page in + the FMan hardware port memory region (which is part of the + FMan memory map). The first 4 KB in the FMan hardware ports + memory region is used for what are called common registers. + The subsequent 63 4KB pages are allocated to the hardware + ports. + The page of a specific port is determined by the cell-index. + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: There is one reg region describing the port + configuration registers. + +EXAMPLE + +port@a8000 { + cell-index = <0x28>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xa8000 0x1000>; +}; + +port@88000 { + cell-index = <0x8>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x88000 0x1000>; +}; + +port@81000 { + cell-index = <0x1>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x81000 0x1000>; +}; + +============================================================================= +FMan dTSEC/XGEC/mEMAC Node + +DESCRIPTION + +mEMAC/dTSEC/XGEC are the Ethernet network interfaces + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: A standard property. + Must include one of the following: + - "fsl,fman-dtsec" for dTSEC MAC + - "fsl,fman-xgec" for XGEC MAC + - "fsl,fman-memac for mEMAC MAC + +- cell-index + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: Specifies the MAC id. + + The cell-index value may be used by the FMan or the SoC, to + identify the MAC unit in the FMan (or SoC) memory map. + In the tables bellow there's a description of the cell-index + use, there are two tables, one describes the use of cell-index + by the FMan, the second describes the use by the SoC: + + 1. FMan Registers + + FManV2: + register[bit] MAC cell-index + ============================================================ + FM_EPI[16] XGEC 8 + FM_EPI[16+n] dTSECn n-1 + FM_NPI[11+n] dTSECn n-1 + n = 1,..,5 + + FManV3: + register[bit] MAC cell-index + ============================================================ + FM_EPI[16+n] mEMACn n-1 + FM_EPI[25] mEMAC10 9 + + FM_NPI[11+n] mEMACn n-1 + FM_NPI[10] mEMAC10 9 + FM_NPI[11] mEMAC9 8 + n = 1,..8 + + FM_EPI and FM_NPI are located in the FMan memory map. + + 2. SoC registers: + + - P2041, P3041, P4080 P5020, P5040: + register[bit] FMan MAC cell + Unit index + ============================================================ + DCFG_DEVDISR2[7] 1 XGEC 8 + DCFG_DEVDISR2[7+n] 1 dTSECn n-1 + DCFG_DEVDISR2[15] 2 XGEC 8 + DCFG_DEVDISR2[15+n] 2 dTSECn n-1 + n = 1,..5 + + - T1040, T2080, T4240, B4860: + register[bit] FMan MAC cell + Unit index + ============================================================ + DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2[n-1] 1 mEMACn n-1 + DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2[11+n] 2 mEMACn n-1 + n = 1,..6,9,10 + + EVDISR, DCFG_DEVDISR2 and DCFG_CCSR_DEVDISR2 are located in + the specific SoC "Device Configuration/Pin Control" Memory + Map. + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. + +- fsl,fman-ports + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: An array of two phandles - the first references is + the FMan RX port and the second is the TX port used by this + MAC. + +- ptp-timer + Usage required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: A phandle for 1EEE1588 timer. + +EXAMPLE + +fman1_tx28: port@a8000 { + cell-index = <0x28>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xa8000 0x1000>; +}; + +fman1_rx8: port@88000 { + cell-index = <0x8>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x88000 0x1000>; +}; + +ptp-timer: ptp_timer@fe000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-ptp-timer"; + reg = <0xfe000 0x1000>; +}; + +ethernet@e0000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <0>; + reg = <0xe0000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx8 &fman1_tx28>; + ptp-timer = <&ptp-timer>; +}; + +============================================================================ +FMan IEEE 1588 Node + +DESCRIPTION + +The FMan interface to support IEEE 1588 + + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: A standard property. + Must include "fsl,fman-ptp-timer". + +- reg + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: A standard property. + +EXAMPLE + +ptp-timer@fe000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-ptp-timer"; + reg = <0xfe000 0x1000>; +}; + +============================================================================= +Example + +fman@400000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + cell-index = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,fman" + ranges = <0 0x400000 0x100000>; + reg = <0x400000 0x100000>; + clocks = <&fman_clk>; + clock-names = "fmanclk"; + interrupts = < + 96 2 0 0 + 16 2 1 1>; + fsl,qman-channel-range = <0x40 0xc>; + + muram@0 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-muram"; + reg = <0x0 0x28000>; + }; + + port@81000 { + cell-index = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x81000 0x1000>; + }; + + port@82000 { + cell-index = <2>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x82000 0x1000>; + }; + + port@83000 { + cell-index = <3>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x83000 0x1000>; + }; + + port@84000 { + cell-index = <4>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x84000 0x1000>; + }; + + port@85000 { + cell-index = <5>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x85000 0x1000>; + }; + + port@86000 { + cell-index = <6>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-oh"; + reg = <0x86000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0x8: port@88000 { + cell-index = <0x8>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x88000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0x9: port@89000 { + cell-index = <0x9>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x89000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0xa: port@8a000 { + cell-index = <0xa>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x8a000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0xb: port@8b000 { + cell-index = <0xb>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x8b000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0xc: port@8c000 { + cell-index = <0xc>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x8c000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_rx_0x10: port@90000 { + cell-index = <0x10>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-rx"; + reg = <0x90000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x28: port@a8000 { + cell-index = <0x28>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xa8000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x29: port@a9000 { + cell-index = <0x29>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xa9000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x2a: port@aa000 { + cell-index = <0x2a>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xaa000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x2b: port@ab000 { + cell-index = <0x2b>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xab000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x2c: port@ac0000 { + cell-index = <0x2c>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xac000 0x1000>; + }; + + fman1_tx_0x30: port@b0000 { + cell-index = <0x30>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-v2-port-tx"; + reg = <0xb0000 0x1000>; + }; + + ethernet@e0000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <0>; + reg = <0xe0000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0x8 &fman1_tx_0x28>; + }; + + ethernet@e2000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <1>; + reg = <0xe2000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0x9 &fman1_tx_0x29>; + }; + + ethernet@e4000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <2>; + reg = <0xe4000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0xa &fman1_tx_0x2a>; + }; + + ethernet@e6000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <3>; + reg = <0xe6000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0xb &fman1_tx_0x2b>; + }; + + ethernet@e8000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-dtsec"; + cell-index = <4>; + reg = <0xf0000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0xc &fman1_tx_0x2c>; + + ethernet@f0000 { + cell-index = <8>; + compatible = "fsl,fman-xgec"; + reg = <0xf0000 0x1000>; + fsl,fman-ports = <&fman1_rx_0x10 &fman1_tx_0x30>; + }; + + ptp-timer@fe000 { + compatible = "fsl,fman-ptp-timer"; + reg = <0xfe000 0x1000>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-fsl-ftm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-fsl-ftm.txt index 0bda229a6171..3899d6a557c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-fsl-ftm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-fsl-ftm.txt @@ -1,5 +1,20 @@ Freescale FlexTimer Module (FTM) PWM controller +The same FTM PWM device can have a different endianness on different SoCs. The +device tree provides a property to describing this so that an operating system +device driver can handle all variants of the device. Refer to the table below +for the endianness of the FTM PWM block as integrated into the existing SoCs: + + SoC | FTM-PWM endianness + --------+------------------- + Vybrid | LE + LS1 | BE + LS2 | LE + +Please see ../regmap/regmap.txt for more detail about how to specify endian +modes in device tree. + + Required properties: - compatible: Should be "fsl,vf610-ftm-pwm". - reg: Physical base address and length of the controller's registers @@ -16,7 +31,8 @@ Required properties: - pinctrl-names: Must contain a "default" entry. - pinctrl-NNN: One property must exist for each entry in pinctrl-names. See pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt for details of the property values. - +- big-endian: Boolean property, required if the FTM PWM registers use a big- + endian rather than little-endian layout. Example: @@ -32,4 +48,5 @@ pwm0: pwm@40038000 { <&clks VF610_CLK_FTM0_EXT_FIX_EN>; pinctrl-names = "default"; pinctrl-0 = <&pinctrl_pwm0_1>; + big-endian; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-rockchip.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-rockchip.txt index d47d15a6a298..b8be3d09ee26 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-rockchip.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pwm/pwm-rockchip.txt @@ -7,8 +7,8 @@ Required properties: "rockchip,vop-pwm": found integrated in VOP on RK3288 SoC - reg: physical base address and length of the controller's registers - clocks: phandle and clock specifier of the PWM reference clock - - #pwm-cells: should be 2. See pwm.txt in this directory for a - description of the cell format. + - #pwm-cells: must be 2 (rk2928) or 3 (rk3288). See pwm.txt in this directory + for a description of the cell format. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt index 865614b34d6f..dad6358074ac 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/act8865-regulator.txt @@ -5,6 +5,10 @@ Required properties: - compatible: "active-semi,act8846" or "active-semi,act8865" - reg: I2C slave address +Optional properties: +- system-power-controller: Telling whether or not this pmic is controlling + the system power. See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/power-controller.txt . + Any standard regulator properties can be used to configure the single regulator. The valid names for regulators are: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt index 5aeaffc0f1f0..79e5476444f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/max77802.txt @@ -25,6 +25,29 @@ with their hardware counterparts as follow. The valid names are: example: LDO1, LDO2, LDO35. -BUCKn : for BUCKs, where n can lie in range 1 to 10. example: BUCK1, BUCK5, BUCK10. + +The max77802 regulator supports two different operating modes: Normal and Low +Power Mode. Some regulators support the modes to be changed at startup or by +the consumers during normal operation while others only support to change the +mode during system suspend. The standard regulator suspend states binding can +be used to configure the regulator operating mode. + +The regulators that support the standard "regulator-initial-mode" property, +changing their mode during normal operation are: LDOs 1, 3, 20 and 21. + +The possible values for "regulator-initial-mode" and "regulator-mode" are: + 1: Normal regulator voltage output mode. + 3: Low Power which reduces the quiescent current down to only 1uA + +The list of valid modes are defined in the dt-bindings/clock/maxim,max77802.h +header and can be included by device tree source files. + +The standard "regulator-mode" property can only be used for regulators that +support changing their mode to Low Power Mode during suspend. These regulators +are: BUCKs 2-4 and LDOs 1-35. Also, it only takes effect if the regulator has +been enabled for the given suspend state using "regulator-on-in-suspend" and +has not been disabled for that state using "regulator-off-in-suspend". + Example: max77802@09 { @@ -36,11 +59,23 @@ Example: #size-cells = <0>; regulators { + ldo1_reg: LDO1 { + regulator-name = "vdd_1v0"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1000000>; + regulator-always-on; + regulator-initial-mode = <MAX77802_OPMODE_LP>; + }; + ldo11_reg: LDO11 { regulator-name = "vdd_ldo11"; regulator-min-microvolt = <1900000>; regulator-max-microvolt = <1900000>; regulator-always-on; + regulator-state-mem { + regulator-on-in-suspend; + regulator-mode = <MAX77802_OPMODE_LP>; + }; }; buck1_reg: BUCK1 { diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt index 86074334e342..abb26b58c83e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt @@ -19,6 +19,24 @@ Optional properties: design requires. This property describes the total system ramp time required due to the combination of internal ramping of the regulator itself, and board design issues such as trace capacitance and load on the supply. +- regulator-state-mem sub-root node for Suspend-to-RAM mode + : suspend to memory, the device goes to sleep, but all data stored in memory, + only some external interrupt can wake the device. +- regulator-state-disk sub-root node for Suspend-to-DISK mode + : suspend to disk, this state operates similarly to Suspend-to-RAM, + but includes a final step of writing memory contents to disk. +- regulator-state-[mem/disk] node has following common properties: + - regulator-on-in-suspend: regulator should be on in suspend state. + - regulator-off-in-suspend: regulator should be off in suspend state. + - regulator-suspend-microvolt: regulator should be set to this voltage + in suspend. + - regulator-mode: operating mode in the given suspend state. + The set of possible operating modes depends on the capabilities of + every hardware so the valid modes are documented on each regulator + device tree binding document. +- regulator-initial-mode: initial operating mode. The set of possible operating + modes depends on the capabilities of every hardware so each device binding + documentation explains which values the regulator supports. Deprecated properties: - regulator-compatible: If a regulator chip contains multiple @@ -34,6 +52,10 @@ Example: regulator-max-microvolt = <2500000>; regulator-always-on; vin-supply = <&vin>; + + regulator-state-mem { + regulator-on-in-suspend; + }; }; Regulator Consumers: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/sky81452-regulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/sky81452-regulator.txt index 882455e9b36d..f9acbc1f3c6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/sky81452-regulator.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/sky81452-regulator.txt @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ SKY81452 voltage regulator Required properties: +- regulator node named lout. - any required generic properties defined in regulator.txt Optional properties: @@ -9,8 +10,9 @@ Optional properties: Example: regulator { - /* generic regulator properties */ - regulator-name = "touch_en"; - regulator-min-microvolt = <4500000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <8000000>; + lout { + regulator-name = "sky81452-lout"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <4500000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <8000000>; + }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-picophyreset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-picophyreset.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..54ae9f747e45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/st,sti-picophyreset.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +STMicroelectronics STi family Sysconfig Picophy SoftReset Controller +============================================================================= + +This binding describes a reset controller device that is used to enable and +disable on-chip PicoPHY USB2 phy(s) using "softreset" control bits found in +the STi family SoC system configuration registers. + +The actual action taken when softreset is asserted is hardware dependent. +However, when asserted it may not be possible to access the hardware's +registers and after an assert/deassert sequence the hardware's previous state +may no longer be valid. + +Please refer to Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt +for common reset controller binding usage. + +Required properties: +- compatible: Should be "st,stih407-picophyreset" +- #reset-cells: 1, see below + +Example: + + picophyreset: picophyreset-controller { + compatible = "st,stih407-picophyreset"; + #reset-cells = <1>; + }; + +Specifying picophyreset control of devices +======================================= + +Device nodes should specify the reset channel required in their "resets" +property, containing a phandle to the picophyreset device node and an +index specifying which channel to use, as described in +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt. + +Example: + + usb2_picophy0: usbpicophy@0 { + resets = <&picophyreset STIH407_PICOPHY0_RESET>; + }; + +Macro definitions for the supported reset channels can be found in: +include/dt-bindings/reset-controller/stih407-resets.h diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91sam9-rtc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91sam9-rtc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6ae79d1843f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/atmel,at91sam9-rtc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Atmel AT91SAM9260 Real Time Timer + +Required properties: +- compatible: should be: "atmel,at91sam9260-rtt" +- reg: should encode the memory region of the RTT controller +- interrupts: rtt alarm/event interrupt +- clocks: should contain the 32 KHz slow clk that will drive the RTT block. +- atmel,rtt-rtc-time-reg: should encode the GPBR register used to store + the time base when the RTT is used as an RTC. + The first cell should point to the GPBR node and the second one + encode the offset within the GPBR block (or in other words, the + GPBR register used to store the time base). + + +Example: + +rtt@fffffd20 { + compatible = "atmel,at91sam9260-rtt"; + reg = <0xfffffd20 0x10>; + interrupts = <1 4 7>; + clocks = <&clk32k>; + atmel,rtt-rtc-time-reg = <&gpbr 0x0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt index 5a0f02d34d95..4ba4dbd34289 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-omap.txt @@ -5,11 +5,17 @@ Required properties: - "ti,da830-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on DA8xx SoC family. - "ti,am3352-rtc" - for RTC IP used similar to that on AM335x SoC family. This RTC IP has special WAKE-EN Register to enable - Wakeup generation for event Alarm. + Wakeup generation for event Alarm. It can also be + used to control an external PMIC via the + pmic_power_en pin. - reg: Address range of rtc register set - interrupts: rtc timer, alarm interrupts in order - interrupt-parent: phandle for the interrupt controller +Optional properties: +- system-power-controller: whether the rtc is controlling the system power + through pmic_power_en + Example: rtc@1c23000 { @@ -18,4 +24,5 @@ rtc@1c23000 { interrupts = <19 19>; interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + system-power-controller; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-opal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-opal.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..af87e5ecac54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-opal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +IBM OPAL real-time clock +------------------------ + +Required properties: +- comapatible: Should be "ibm,opal-rtc" + +Optional properties: +- has-tpo: Decides if the wakeup is supported or not. + +Example: + rtc { + compatible = "ibm,opal-rtc"; + has-tpo; + phandle = <0x10000029>; + linux,phandle = <0x10000029>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt index 5d2e840ae65c..52464918cfe2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/pl011.txt @@ -6,12 +6,34 @@ Required properties: - interrupts: exactly one interrupt specifier Optional properties: -- pinctrl: When present, must have one state named "sleep" - and one state named "default" -- clocks: When present, must refer to exactly one clock named +- pinctrl: When present, must have one state named "default", + and may contain a second name named "sleep". The former + state sets up pins for ordinary operation whereas + the latter state will put the associated pins to sleep + when the UART is unused +- clocks: When present, the first clock listed must correspond to + the clock named UARTCLK on the IP block, i.e. the clock + to the external serial line, whereas the second clock + must correspond to the PCLK clocking the internal logic + of the block. Just listing one clock (the first one) is + deprecated. +- clocks-names: When present, the first clock listed must be named + "uartclk" and the second clock listed must be named "apb_pclk" - dmas: When present, may have one or two dma channels. The first one must be named "rx", the second one must be named "tx". See also bindings/arm/primecell.txt + +Example: + +uart@80120000 { + compatible = "arm,pl011", "arm,primecell"; + reg = <0x80120000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + dmas = <&dma 13 0 0x2>, <&dma 13 0 0x0>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + clocks = <&foo_clk>, <&bar_clk>; + clock-names = "uartclk", "apb_pclk"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman-portals.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman-portals.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2a00e14e11e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman-portals.txt @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +QorIQ DPAA Buffer Manager Portals Device Tree Binding + +Copyright (C) 2008 - 2014 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + +CONTENTS + + - BMan Portal + - Example + +BMan Portal Node + +Portals are memory mapped interfaces to BMan that allow low-latency, lock-less +interaction by software running on processor cores, accelerators and network +interfaces with the BMan + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: Required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,bman-portal-<hardware revision>" + May include "fsl,<SoC>-bman-portal" or "fsl,bman-portal" + +- reg + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Two regions. The first is the cache-enabled region of + the portal. The second is the cache-inhibited region of + the portal + +- interrupts + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Standard property + +EXAMPLE + +The example below shows a (P4080) BMan portals container/bus node with two portals + + bman-portals@ff4000000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "simple-bus"; + ranges = <0 0xf 0xf4000000 0x200000>; + + bman-portal@0 { + compatible = "fsl,bman-portal-1.0.0", "fsl,bman-portal"; + reg = <0x0 0x4000>, <0x100000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <105 2 0 0>; + }; + bman-portal@4000 { + compatible = "fsl,bman-portal-1.0.0", "fsl,bman-portal"; + reg = <0x4000 0x4000>, <0x101000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <107 2 0 0>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9f80bf8709ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/bman.txt @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +QorIQ DPAA Buffer Manager Device Tree Bindings + +Copyright (C) 2008 - 2014 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + +CONTENTS + + - BMan Node + - BMan Private Memory Node + - Example + +BMan Node + +The Buffer Manager is part of the Data-Path Acceleration Architecture (DPAA). +BMan supports hardware allocation and deallocation of buffers belonging to pools +originally created by software with configurable depletion thresholds. This +binding covers the CCSR space programming model + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: Required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,bman" + May include "fsl,<SoC>-bman" + +- reg + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Registers region within the CCSR address space + +The BMan revision information is located in the BMAN_IP_REV_1/2 registers which +are located at offsets 0xbf8 and 0xbfc + +- interrupts + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Standard property. The error interrupt + +- fsl,liodn + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: PAMU property used for static LIODN assignment + +- fsl,iommu-parent + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: PAMU property used for dynamic LIODN assignment + + For additional details about the PAMU/LIODN binding(s) see pamu.txt + +Devices connected to a BMan instance via Direct Connect Portals (DCP) must link +to the respective BMan instance + +- fsl,bman + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Description: List of phandle and DCP index pairs, to the BMan instance + to which this device is connected via the DCP + +BMan Private Memory Node + +BMan requires a contiguous range of physical memory used for the backing store +for BMan Free Buffer Proxy Records (FBPR). This memory is reserved/allocated as a +node under the /reserved-memory node + +The BMan FBPR memory node must be named "bman-fbpr" + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must inclide "fsl,bman-fbpr" + +The following constraints are relevant to the FBPR private memory: + - The size must be 2^(size + 1), with size = 11..33. That is 4 KiB to + 16 GiB + - The alignment must be a muliptle of the memory size + +The size of the FBPR must be chosen by observing the hardware features configured +via the Reset Configuration Word (RCW) and that are relevant to a specific board +(e.g. number of MAC(s) pinned-out, number of offline/host command FMan ports, +etc.). The size configured in the DT must reflect the hardware capabilities and +not the specific needs of an application + +For additional details about reserved memory regions see reserved-memory.txt + +EXAMPLE + +The example below shows a BMan FBPR dynamic allocation memory node + + reserved-memory { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + ranges; + + bman_fbpr: bman-fbpr { + compatible = "fsl,bman-fbpr"; + alloc-ranges = <0 0 0xf 0xffffffff>; + size = <0 0x1000000>; + alignment = <0 0x1000000>; + }; + }; + +The example below shows a (P4080) BMan CCSR-space node + + crypto@300000 { + ... + fsl,bman = <&bman, 2>; + ... + }; + + bman: bman@31a000 { + compatible = "fsl,bman"; + reg = <0x31a000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <16 2 1 2>; + fsl,liodn = <0x17>; + memory-region = <&bman_fbpr>; + }; + + fman@400000 { + ... + fsl,bman = <&bman, 0>; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman-portals.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman-portals.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..48c4dae5d6f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman-portals.txt @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +QorIQ DPAA Queue Manager Portals Device Tree Binding + +Copyright (C) 2008 - 2014 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + +CONTENTS + + - QMan Portal + - QMan Pool Channel + - Example + +QMan Portal Node + +Portals are memory mapped interfaces to QMan that allow low-latency, lock-less +interaction by software running on processor cores, accelerators and network +interfaces with the QMan + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: Required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,qman-portal-<hardware revision>" + May include "fsl,<SoC>-qman-portal" or "fsl,qman-portal" + +- reg + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Two regions. The first is the cache-enabled region of + the portal. The second is the cache-inhibited region of + the portal + +- interrupts + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Standard property + +- fsl,liodn + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Two LIODN(s). DQRR LIODN (DLIODN) and Frame LIODN + (FLIODN) + +- fsl,iommu-parent + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: PAMU property used for dynamic LIODN assignment + + For additional details about the PAMU/LIODN binding(s) see pamu.txt + +- fsl,qman-channel-id + Usage: Required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: The hardware index of the channel. This can also be + determined by dividing any of the channel's 8 work queue + IDs by 8 + +In addition to these properties the qman-portals should have sub-nodes to +represent the HW devices/portals that are connected to the software portal +described here + +The currently supported sub-nodes are: + * fman0 + * fman1 + * pme + * crypto + +These subnodes should have the following properties: + +- fsl,liodn + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: PAMU property used for static LIODN assignment + +- fsl,iommu-parent + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: PAMU property used for dynamic LIODN assignment + +- dev-handle + Usage: Required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: The phandle to the particular hardware device that this + portal is connected to. + +DPAA QMan Pool Channel Nodes + +Pool Channels are defined with the following properties. + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: Required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,qman-pool-channel" + May include "fsl,<SoC>-qman-pool-channel" + +- fsl,qman-channel-id + Usage: Required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: The hardware index of the channel. This can also be + determined by dividing any of the channel's 8 work queue + IDs by 8 + +EXAMPLE + +The example below shows a (P4080) QMan portals container/bus node with two portals + + qman-portals@ff4200000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "simple-bus"; + ranges = <0 0xf 0xf4200000 0x200000>; + + qman-portal@0 { + compatible = "fsl,qman-portal-1.2.0", "fsl,qman-portal"; + reg = <0 0x4000>, <0x100000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <104 2 0 0>; + fsl,liodn = <1 2>; + fsl,qman-channel-id = <0>; + + fman0 { + fsl,liodn = <0x21>; + dev-handle = <&fman0>; + }; + fman1 { + fsl,liodn = <0xa1>; + dev-handle = <&fman1>; + }; + crypto { + fsl,liodn = <0x41 0x66>; + dev-handle = <&crypto>; + }; + }; + qman-portal@4000 { + compatible = "fsl,qman-portal-1.2.0", "fsl,qman-portal"; + reg = <0x4000 0x4000>, <0x101000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <106 2 0 0>; + fsl,liodn = <3 4>; + fsl,qman-channel-id = <1>; + + fman0 { + fsl,liodn = <0x22>; + dev-handle = <&fman0>; + }; + fman1 { + fsl,liodn = <0xa2>; + dev-handle = <&fman1>; + }; + crypto { + fsl,liodn = <0x42 0x67>; + dev-handle = <&crypto>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..063e3a0b9d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/fsl/qman.txt @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +QorIQ DPAA Queue Manager Device Tree Binding + +Copyright (C) 2008 - 2014 Freescale Semiconductor Inc. + +CONTENTS + + - QMan Node + - QMan Private Memory Nodes + - Example + +QMan Node + +The Queue Manager is part of the Data-Path Acceleration Architecture (DPAA). QMan +supports queuing and QoS scheduling of frames to CPUs, network interfaces and +DPAA logic modules, maintains packet ordering within flows. Besides providing +flow-level queuing, is also responsible for congestion management functions such +as RED/WRED, congestion notifications and tail discards. This binding covers the +CCSR space programming model + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: Required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must include "fsl,qman" + May include "fsl,<SoC>-qman" + +- reg + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Registers region within the CCSR address space + +The QMan revision information is located in the QMAN_IP_REV_1/2 registers which +are located at offsets 0xbf8 and 0xbfc + +- interrupts + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Standard property. The error interrupt + +- fsl,liodn + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: PAMU property used for static LIODN assignment + +- fsl,iommu-parent + Usage: See pamu.txt + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: PAMU property used for dynamic LIODN assignment + + For additional details about the PAMU/LIODN binding(s) see pamu.txt + +- clocks + Usage: See clock-bindings.txt and qoriq-clock.txt + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: Reference input clock. Its frequency is half of the + platform clock + +Devices connected to a QMan instance via Direct Connect Portals (DCP) must link +to the respective QMan instance + +- fsl,qman + Usage: Required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Description: List of phandle and DCP index pairs, to the QMan instance + to which this device is connected via the DCP + +QMan Private Memory Nodes + +QMan requires two contiguous range of physical memory used for the backing store +for QMan Frame Queue Descriptor (FQD) and Packed Frame Descriptor Record (PFDR). +This memory is reserved/allocated as a nodes under the /reserved-memory node + +The QMan FQD memory node must be named "qman-fqd" + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must inclide "fsl,qman-fqd" + +The QMan PFDR memory node must be named "qman-pfdr" + +PROPERTIES + +- compatible + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: Must inclide "fsl,qman-pfdr" + +The following constraints are relevant to the FQD and PFDR private memory: + - The size must be 2^(size + 1), with size = 11..29. That is 4 KiB to + 1 GiB + - The alignment must be a muliptle of the memory size + +The size of the FQD and PFDP must be chosen by observing the hardware features +configured via the Reset Configuration Word (RCW) and that are relevant to a +specific board (e.g. number of MAC(s) pinned-out, number of offline/host command +FMan ports, etc.). The size configured in the DT must reflect the hardware +capabilities and not the specific needs of an application + +For additional details about reserved memory regions see reserved-memory.txt + +EXAMPLE + +The example below shows a QMan FQD and a PFDR dynamic allocation memory nodes + + reserved-memory { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + ranges; + + qman_fqd: qman-fqd { + compatible = "fsl,qman-fqd"; + alloc-ranges = <0 0 0xf 0xffffffff>; + size = <0 0x400000>; + alignment = <0 0x400000>; + }; + qman_pfdr: qman-pfdr { + compatible = "fsl,qman-pfdr"; + alloc-ranges = <0 0 0xf 0xffffffff>; + size = <0 0x2000000>; + alignment = <0 0x2000000>; + }; + }; + +The example below shows a (P4080) QMan CCSR-space node + + clockgen: global-utilities@e1000 { + ... + sysclk: sysclk { + ... + }; + ... + platform_pll: platform-pll@c00 { + #clock-cells = <1>; + reg = <0xc00 0x4>; + compatible = "fsl,qoriq-platform-pll-1.0"; + clocks = <&sysclk>; + clock-output-names = "platform-pll", "platform-pll-div2"; + }; + ... + }; + + crypto@300000 { + ... + fsl,qman = <&qman, 2>; + ... + }; + + qman: qman@318000 { + compatible = "fsl,qman"; + reg = <0x318000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <16 2 1 3> + fsl,liodn = <0x16>; + memory-region = <&qman_fqd &qman_pfdr>; + clocks = <&platform_pll 1>; + }; + + fman@400000 { + ... + fsl,qman = <&qman, 0>; + ... + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/arndale.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/arndale.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0e76946385ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/arndale.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Audio Binding for Arndale boards + +Required properties: +- compatible : Can be the following, + "samsung,arndale-rt5631" + +- samsung,audio-cpu: The phandle of the Samsung I2S controller +- samsung,audio-codec: The phandle of the audio codec + +Optional: +- samsung,model: The name of the sound-card + +Arndale Boards has many audio daughter cards, one of them is +rt5631/alc5631. Below example shows audio bindings for rt5631/ +alc5631 based codec. + +Example: + +sound { + compatible = "samsung,arndale-rt5631"; + + samsung,audio-cpu = <&i2s0> + samsung,audio-codec = <&rt5631>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt index 60ca07996458..46bc9829c71a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/davinci-mcasp-audio.txt @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Optional properties: - rx-num-evt : FIFO levels. - sram-size-playback : size of sram to be allocated during playback - sram-size-capture : size of sram to be allocated during capture -- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for McASP, currently not used by the driver +- interrupts : Interrupt numbers for McASP - interrupt-names : Known interrupt names are "tx" and "rx" - pinctrl-0: Should specify pin control group used for this controller. - pinctrl-names: Should contain only one value - "default", for more details diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/eukrea-tlv320.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/eukrea-tlv320.txt index 0d7985c864af..6dfa88c4dc1e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/eukrea-tlv320.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/eukrea-tlv320.txt @@ -1,11 +1,16 @@ Audio complex for Eukrea boards with tlv320aic23 codec. Required properties: -- compatible : "eukrea,asoc-tlv320" -- eukrea,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. -- ssi-controller : The phandle of the SSI controller. -- fsl,mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX). -- fsl,mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer. + + - compatible : "eukrea,asoc-tlv320" + + - eukrea,model : The user-visible name of this sound complex. + + - ssi-controller : The phandle of the SSI controller. + + - fsl,mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX). + + - fsl,mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer. Note: The AUDMUX port numbering should start at 1, which is consistent with hardware manual. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt index 52f5b6bf3e8e..d3b6b5f48010 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,esai.txt @@ -7,37 +7,39 @@ other DSPs. It has up to six transmitters and four receivers. Required properties: - - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-esai" or - "fsl,vf610-esai" + - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-esai" or + "fsl,vf610-esai" - - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. - - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt. + - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt. - - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. + - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. - - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". + - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". - - clocks: Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names. + - clocks : Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names. - - clock-names : Includes the following entries: - "core" The core clock used to access registers - "extal" The esai baud clock for esai controller used to derive - HCK, SCK and FS. - "fsys" The system clock derived from ahb clock used to derive - HCK, SCK and FS. + - clock-names : Includes the following entries: + "core" The core clock used to access registers + "extal" The esai baud clock for esai controller used to + derive HCK, SCK and FS. + "fsys" The system clock derived from ahb clock used to + derive HCK, SCK and FS. - - fsl,fifo-depth: The number of elements in the transmit and receive FIFOs. - This number is the maximum allowed value for TFCR[TFWM] or RFCR[RFWM]. + - fsl,fifo-depth : The number of elements in the transmit and receive + FIFOs. This number is the maximum allowed value for + TFCR[TFWM] or RFCR[RFWM]. - fsl,esai-synchronous: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating - that ESAI would work in the synchronous mode, which means all the settings - for Receiving would be duplicated from Transmition related registers. + that ESAI would work in the synchronous mode, which + means all the settings for Receiving would be + duplicated from Transmition related registers. - - big-endian : If this property is absent, the native endian mode will - be in use as default, or the big endian mode will be in use for all the - device registers. + - big-endian : If this property is absent, the native endian mode + will be in use as default, or the big endian mode + will be in use for all the device registers. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt index 3e9e82c8eab3..b5ee32ee3706 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,spdif.txt @@ -6,32 +6,31 @@ a fibre cable. Required properties: - - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-spdif". + - compatible : Compatible list, must contain "fsl,imx35-spdif". - - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. - - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt. + - interrupts : Contains the spdif interrupt. - - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. + - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. - - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". + - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". - - clocks : Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names. + - clocks : Contains an entry for each entry in clock-names. - - clock-names : Includes the following entries: - "core" The core clock of spdif controller - "rxtx<0-7>" Clock source list for tx and rx clock. - This clock list should be identical to - the source list connecting to the spdif - clock mux in "SPDIF Transceiver Clock - Diagram" of SoC reference manual. It - can also be referred to TxClk_Source - bit of register SPDIF_STC. + - clock-names : Includes the following entries: + "core" The core clock of spdif controller. + "rxtx<0-7>" Clock source list for tx and rx clock. + This clock list should be identical to the source + list connecting to the spdif clock mux in "SPDIF + Transceiver Clock Diagram" of SoC reference manual. + It can also be referred to TxClk_Source bit of + register SPDIF_STC. - - big-endian : If this property is absent, the native endian mode will - be in use as default, or the big endian mode will be in use for all the - device registers. + - big-endian : If this property is absent, the native endian mode + will be in use as default, or the big endian mode + will be in use for all the device registers. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt index 4956b14d4b06..044e5d76e2dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl-sai.txt @@ -5,32 +5,48 @@ which provides a synchronous audio interface that supports fullduplex serial interfaces with frame synchronization such as I2S, AC97, TDM, and codec/DSP interfaces. - Required properties: -- compatible: Compatible list, contains "fsl,vf610-sai" or "fsl,imx6sx-sai". -- reg: Offset and length of the register set for the device. -- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. -- clock-names : Must include the "bus" for register access and "mclk1" "mclk2" - "mclk3" for bit clock and frame clock providing. -- dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. -- dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". -- pinctrl-names: Must contain a "default" entry. -- pinctrl-NNN: One property must exist for each entry in pinctrl-names. - See ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt for details of the property values. -- big-endian: Boolean property, required if all the FTM_PWM registers - are big-endian rather than little-endian. -- lsb-first: Configures whether the LSB or the MSB is transmitted first for - the fifo data. If this property is absent, the MSB is transmitted first as - default, or the LSB is transmitted first. -- fsl,sai-synchronous-rx: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating - that SAI will work in the synchronous mode (sync Tx with Rx) which means - both the transimitter and receiver will send and receive data by following - receiver's bit clocks and frame sync clocks. -- fsl,sai-asynchronous: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating - that SAI will work in the asynchronous mode, which means both transimitter - and receiver will send and receive data by following their own bit clocks - and frame sync clocks separately. + + - compatible : Compatible list, contains "fsl,vf610-sai" or + "fsl,imx6sx-sai". + + - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. + + - clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + + - clock-names : Must include the "bus" for register access and + "mclk1", "mclk2", "mclk3" for bit clock and frame + clock providing. + - dmas : Generic dma devicetree binding as described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/dma.txt. + + - dma-names : Two dmas have to be defined, "tx" and "rx". + + - pinctrl-names : Must contain a "default" entry. + + - pinctrl-NNN : One property must exist for each entry in + pinctrl-names. See ../pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt + for details of the property values. + + - big-endian : Boolean property, required if all the FTM_PWM + registers are big-endian rather than little-endian. + + - lsb-first : Configures whether the LSB or the MSB is transmitted + first for the fifo data. If this property is absent, + the MSB is transmitted first as default, or the LSB + is transmitted first. + + - fsl,sai-synchronous-rx: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating + that SAI will work in the synchronous mode (sync Tx + with Rx) which means both the transimitter and the + receiver will send and receive data by following + receiver's bit clocks and frame sync clocks. + + - fsl,sai-asynchronous: This is a boolean property. If present, indicating + that SAI will work in the asynchronous mode, which + means both transimitter and receiver will send and + receive data by following their own bit clocks and + frame sync clocks separately. Note: - If both fsl,sai-asynchronous and fsl,sai-synchronous-rx are absent, the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt index e4acdd891e49..2f89db88fd57 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-sgtl5000.txt @@ -1,33 +1,40 @@ Freescale i.MX audio complex with SGTL5000 codec Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-sgtl5000" -- model : The user-visible name of this sound complex -- ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller -- audio-codec : The phandle of the SGTL5000 audio codec -- audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. - Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, - the second being the connection's source. Valid names could be power - supplies, SGTL5000 pins, and the jacks on the board: - - Power supplies: - * Mic Bias - - SGTL5000 pins: - * MIC_IN - * LINE_IN - * HP_OUT - * LINE_OUT - - Board connectors: - * Mic Jack - * Line In Jack - * Headphone Jack - * Line Out Jack - * Ext Spk - -- mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX) -- mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer + + - compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-sgtl5000" + + - model : The user-visible name of this sound complex + + - ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller + + - audio-codec : The phandle of the SGTL5000 audio codec + + - audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the + connection's sink, the second being the connection's + source. Valid names could be power supplies, SGTL5000 + pins, and the jacks on the board: + + Power supplies: + * Mic Bias + + SGTL5000 pins: + * MIC_IN + * LINE_IN + * HP_OUT + * LINE_OUT + + Board connectors: + * Mic Jack + * Line In Jack + * Headphone Jack + * Line Out Jack + * Ext Spk + + - mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX) + + - mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer Note: The AUDMUX port numbering should start at 1, which is consistent with hardware manual. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt index 7d13479f9c3c..da84a442ccea 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-spdif.txt @@ -2,23 +2,25 @@ Freescale i.MX audio complex with S/PDIF transceiver Required properties: - - compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-spdif" + - compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-spdif" - - model : The user-visible name of this sound complex + - model : The user-visible name of this sound complex - - spdif-controller : The phandle of the i.MX S/PDIF controller + - spdif-controller : The phandle of the i.MX S/PDIF controller Optional properties: - - spdif-out : This is a boolean property. If present, the transmitting - function of S/PDIF will be enabled, indicating there's a physical - S/PDIF out connector/jack on the board or it's connecting to some - other IP block, such as an HDMI encoder/display-controller. + - spdif-out : This is a boolean property. If present, the + transmitting function of S/PDIF will be enabled, + indicating there's a physical S/PDIF out connector + or jack on the board or it's connecting to some + other IP block, such as an HDMI encoder or + display-controller. - - spdif-in : This is a boolean property. If present, the receiving - function of S/PDIF will be enabled, indicating there's a physical - S/PDIF in connector/jack on the board. + - spdif-in : This is a boolean property. If present, the receiving + function of S/PDIF will be enabled, indicating there + is a physical S/PDIF in connector/jack on the board. * Note: At least one of these two properties should be set in the DT binding. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt index f49450a87890..acea71bee34f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audio-wm8962.txt @@ -1,25 +1,32 @@ Freescale i.MX audio complex with WM8962 codec Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-wm8962" -- model : The user-visible name of this sound complex -- ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller -- audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8962 audio codec -- audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. - Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the connection's sink, - the second being the connection's source. Valid names could be power - supplies, WM8962 pins, and the jacks on the board: - - Power supplies: - * Mic Bias - - Board connectors: - * Mic Jack - * Headphone Jack - * Ext Spk - -- mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX) -- mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer + + - compatible : "fsl,imx-audio-wm8962" + + - model : The user-visible name of this sound complex + + - ssi-controller : The phandle of the i.MX SSI controller + + - audio-codec : The phandle of the WM8962 audio codec + + - audio-routing : A list of the connections between audio components. + Each entry is a pair of strings, the first being the + connection's sink, the second being the connection's + source. Valid names could be power supplies, WM8962 + pins, and the jacks on the board: + + Power supplies: + * Mic Bias + + Board connectors: + * Mic Jack + * Headphone Jack + * Ext Spk + + - mux-int-port : The internal port of the i.MX audio muxer (AUDMUX) + + - mux-ext-port : The external port of the i.MX audio muxer Note: The AUDMUX port numbering should start at 1, which is consistent with hardware manual. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt index f88a00e54c63..b30a737e209e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/imx-audmux.txt @@ -1,18 +1,24 @@ Freescale Digital Audio Mux (AUDMUX) device Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,imx21-audmux" for AUDMUX version firstly used on i.MX21, - or "fsl,imx31-audmux" for the version firstly used on i.MX31. -- reg : Should contain AUDMUX registers location and length + + - compatible : "fsl,imx21-audmux" for AUDMUX version firstly used + on i.MX21, or "fsl,imx31-audmux" for the version + firstly used on i.MX31. + + - reg : Should contain AUDMUX registers location and length. An initial configuration can be setup using child nodes. Required properties of optional child nodes: -- fsl,audmux-port : Integer of the audmux port that is configured by this - child node. -- fsl,port-config : List of configuration options for the specific port. For - imx31-audmux and above, it is a list of tuples <ptcr pdcr>. For - imx21-audmux it is a list of pcr values. + + - fsl,audmux-port : Integer of the audmux port that is configured by this + child node. + + - fsl,port-config : List of configuration options for the specific port. + For imx31-audmux and above, it is a list of tuples + <ptcr pdcr>. For imx21-audmux it is a list of pcr + values. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt index c454e67f54bb..aa802a274520 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/max98090.txt @@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ Optional properties: - clock-names: Should be "mclk" +- maxim,dmic-freq: Frequency at which to clock DMIC + Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): * MIC1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt index c5be003f413e..0d0ab51105b0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,fsi.txt @@ -1,11 +1,16 @@ Renesas FSI Required properties: -- compatible : "renesas,sh_fsi2" or "renesas,sh_fsi" +- compatible : "renesas,fsi2-<soctype>", + "renesas,sh_fsi2" or "renesas,sh_fsi" as + fallback. + Examples with soctypes are: + - "renesas,fsi2-r8a7740" (R-Mobile A1) + - "renesas,fsi2-sh73a0" (SH-Mobile AG5) - reg : Should contain the register physical address and length - interrupts : Should contain FSI interrupt -- fsia,spdif-connection : FSI is connected by S/PDFI +- fsia,spdif-connection : FSI is connected by S/PDIF - fsia,stream-mode-support : FSI supports 16bit stream mode. - fsia,use-internal-clock : FSI uses internal clock when master mode. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt index aa697abf337e..2dd690bc19cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/renesas,rsnd.txt @@ -1,8 +1,12 @@ Renesas R-Car sound Required properties: -- compatible : "renesas,rcar_sound-gen1" if generation1 +- compatible : "renesas,rcar_sound-<soctype>", fallbacks + "renesas,rcar_sound-gen1" if generation1, and "renesas,rcar_sound-gen2" if generation2 + Examples with soctypes are: + - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7790" (R-Car H2) + - "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7791" (R-Car M2-W) - reg : Should contain the register physical address. required register is SRU/ADG/SSI if generation1 @@ -35,9 +39,9 @@ DAI subnode properties: Example: -rcar_sound: rcar_sound@0xffd90000 { +rcar_sound: rcar_sound@ec500000 { #sound-dai-cells = <1>; - compatible = "renesas,rcar_sound-gen2"; + compatible = "renesas,rcar_sound-r8a7791", "renesas,rcar_sound-gen2"; reg = <0 0xec500000 0 0x1000>, /* SCU */ <0 0xec5a0000 0 0x100>, /* ADG */ <0 0xec540000 0 0x1000>, /* SSIU */ diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5631.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5631.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..92b986ca337b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5631.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +ALC5631/RT5631 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "realtek,alc5631" or "realtek,rt5631" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): + + * SPK_OUT_R_P + * SPK_OUT_R_N + * SPK_OUT_L_P + * SPK_OUT_L_N + * HP_OUT_L + * HP_OUT_R + * AUX_OUT2_LP + * AUX_OUT2_RN + * AUX_OUT1_LP + * AUX_OUT1_RN + * AUX_IN_L_JD + * AUX_IN_R_JD + * MONO_IN_P + * MONO_IN_N + * MIC1_P + * MIC1_N + * MIC2_P + * MIC2_N + * MONO_OUT_P + * MONO_OUT_N + * MICBIAS1 + * MICBIAS2 + +Example: + +alc5631: alc5631@1a { + compatible = "realtek,alc5631"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; + +or + +rt5631: rt5631@1a { + compatible = "realtek,rt5631"; + reg = <0x1a>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5677.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5677.txt index 0701b834fc73..740ff771aa8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5677.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5677.txt @@ -27,6 +27,21 @@ Optional properties: Boolean. Indicate MIC1/2 input and LOUT1/2/3 outputs are differential, rather than single-ended. +- realtek,gpio-config + Array of six 8bit elements that configures GPIO. + 0 - floating (reset value) + 1 - pull down + 2 - pull up + +- realtek,jd1-gpio + Configures GPIO Mic Jack detection 1. + Select 0 ~ 3 as OFF, GPIO1, GPIO2 and GPIO3 respectively. + +- realtek,jd2-gpio +- realtek,jd3-gpio + Configures GPIO Mic Jack detection 2 and 3. + Select 0 ~ 3 as OFF, GPIO4, GPIO5 and GPIO6 respectively. + Pins on the device (for linking into audio routes): * IN1P @@ -56,4 +71,6 @@ rt5677 { realtek,pow-ldo2-gpio = <&gpio TEGRA_GPIO(V, 3) GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; realtek,in1-differential = "true"; + realtek,gpio-config = /bits/ 8 <0 0 0 0 0 2>; /* pull up GPIO6 */ + realtek,jd2-gpio = <3>; /* Enables Jack detection for GPIO6 */ }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt index 7386d444ada1..d188296bb6ec 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/samsung-i2s.txt @@ -6,10 +6,17 @@ Required SoC Specific Properties: - samsung,s3c6410-i2s: for 8/16/24bit stereo I2S. - samsung,s5pv210-i2s: for 8/16/24bit multichannel(5.1) I2S with secondary fifo, s/w reset control and internal mux for root clk src. - - samsung,exynos5420-i2s: for 8/16/24bit multichannel(7.1) I2S with - secondary fifo, s/w reset control, internal mux for root clk src and - TDM support. TDM (Time division multiplexing) is to allow transfer of - multiple channel audio data on single data line. + - samsung,exynos5420-i2s: for 8/16/24bit multichannel(5.1) I2S for + playback, sterio channel capture, secondary fifo using internal + or external dma, s/w reset control, internal mux for root clk src + and 7.1 channel TDM support for playback. TDM (Time division multiplexing) + is to allow transfer of multiple channel audio data on single data line. + - samsung,exynos7-i2s: with all the available features of exynos5 i2s, + exynos7 I2S has 7.1 channel TDM support for capture, secondary fifo + with only external dma and more no.of root clk sampling frequencies. + - samsung,exynos7-i2s1: I2S1 on previous samsung platforms supports + stereo channels. exynos7 i2s1 upgraded to 5.1 multichannel with + slightly modified bit offsets. - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt index 955df60a118c..0e5e4eb3ef1b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/sgtl5000.txt @@ -7,10 +7,33 @@ Required properties: - clocks : the clock provider of SYS_MCLK +- micbias-resistor-k-ohms : the bias resistor to be used in kOmhs + The resistor can take values of 2k, 4k or 8k. + If set to 0 it will be off. + If this node is not mentioned or if the value is unknown, then + micbias resistor is set to 4K. + +- micbias-voltage-m-volts : the bias voltage to be used in mVolts + The voltage can take values from 1.25V to 3V by 250mV steps + If this node is not mentionned or the value is unknown, then + the value is set to 1.25V. + +- VDDA-supply : the regulator provider of VDDA + +- VDDIO-supply: the regulator provider of VDDIO + +Optional properties: + +- VDDD-supply : the regulator provider of VDDD + Example: codec: sgtl5000@0a { compatible = "fsl,sgtl5000"; reg = <0x0a>; clocks = <&clks 150>; + micbias-resistor-k-ohms = <2>; + micbias-voltage-m-volts = <2250>; + VDDA-supply = <®_3p3v>; + VDDIO-supply = <®_3p3v>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8bf23eb1803 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ts3a227e.txt @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +Texas Instruments TS3A227E +Autonomous Audio Accessory Detection and Configuration Switch + +The TS3A227E detect headsets of 3-ring and 4-ring standards and +switches automatically to route the microphone correctly. It also +handles key press detection in accordance with the Android audio +headset specification v1.0. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: Should contain "ti,ts3a227e". + - reg: The i2c address. Should contain <0x3b>. + - interrupt-parent: The parent interrupt controller + - interrupts: Interrupt number for /INT pin from the 227e + + +Examples: + + i2c { + ts3a227e@3b { + compatible = "ti,ts3a227e"; + reg = <0x3b>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + interrupts = <3 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8960.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8960.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2deb8a3da9c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/wm8960.txt @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +WM8960 audio CODEC + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + + - compatible : "wlf,wm8960" + + - reg : the I2C address of the device. + +Optional properties: + - wlf,shared-lrclk: This is a boolean property. If present, the LRCM bit of + R24 (Additional control 2) gets set, indicating that ADCLRC and DACLRC pins + will be disabled only when ADC (Left and Right) and DAC (Left and Right) + are disabled. + When wm8960 works on synchronize mode and DACLRC pin is used to supply + frame clock, it will no frame clock for captrue unless enable DAC to enable + DACLRC pin. If shared-lrclk is present, no need to enable DAC for captrue. + + - wlf,capless: This is a boolean property. If present, OUT3 pin will be + enabled and disabled together with HP_L and HP_R pins in response to jack + detect events. + +Example: + +codec: wm8960@1a { + compatible = "wlf,wm8960"; + reg = <0x1a>; + + wlf,shared-lrclk; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt index 8a824be15754..a95603bcf6ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-gpio.txt @@ -8,8 +8,10 @@ Required properties: - gpio-sck: GPIO spec for the SCK line to use - gpio-miso: GPIO spec for the MISO line to use - gpio-mosi: GPIO spec for the MOSI line to use - - cs-gpios: GPIOs to use for chipselect lines - - num-chipselects: number of chipselect lines + - cs-gpios: GPIOs to use for chipselect lines. + Not needed if num-chipselects = <0>. + - num-chipselects: Number of chipselect lines. Should be <0> if a single device + with no chip select is connected. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-img-spfi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-img-spfi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c7dd50fb8eb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-img-spfi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +IMG Synchronous Peripheral Flash Interface (SPFI) controller + +Required properties: +- compatible: Must be "img,spfi". +- reg: Must contain the base address and length of the SPFI registers. +- interrupts: Must contain the SPFI interrupt. +- clocks: Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. + See ../clock/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must include the following entries: + - spfi: SPI operating clock + - sys: SPI system interface clock +- dmas: Must contain an entry for each entry in dma-names. + See ../dma/dma.txt for details. +- dma-names: Must include the following entries: + - rx + - tx +- #address-cells: Must be 1. +- #size-cells: Must be 0. + +Optional properties: +- img,supports-quad-mode: Should be set if the interface supports quad mode + SPI transfers. + +Example: + +spi@18100f00 { + compatible = "img,spfi"; + reg = <0x18100f00 0x100>; + interrupts = <GIC_SHARED 22 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&spi_clk>, <&system_clk>; + clock-names = "spfi", "sys"; + dmas = <&mdc 9 0xffffffff 0>, <&mdc 10 0xffffffff 0>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-meson.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-meson.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..bb52a86f3365 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-meson.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Amlogic Meson SPI controllers + +* SPIFC (SPI Flash Controller) + +The Meson SPIFC is a controller optimized for communication with SPI +NOR memories, without DMA support and a 64-byte unified transmit / +receive buffer. + +Required properties: + - compatible: should be "amlogic,meson6-spifc" + - reg: physical base address and length of the controller registers + - clocks: phandle of the input clock for the baud rate generator + - #address-cells: should be 1 + - #size-cells: should be 0 + + spi@c1108c80 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson6-spifc"; + reg = <0xc1108c80 0x80>; + clocks = <&clk81>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt index 1e8a8578148f..6dbdeb3c361a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-samsung.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Required SoC Specific Properties: - samsung,s3c2443-spi: for s3c2443, s3c2416 and s3c2450 platforms - samsung,s3c6410-spi: for s3c6410 platforms - samsung,s5pv210-spi: for s5pv210 and s5pc110 platforms - - samsung,exynos4210-spi: for exynos4 and exynos5 platforms + - samsung,exynos7-spi: for exynos7 platforms - reg: physical base address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt index 042a0273b8ba..b7ba01ad1426 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt @@ -12,6 +12,9 @@ I. For patch submitters devicetree@vger.kernel.org + 3) The Documentation/ portion of the patch should come in the series before + the code implementing the binding. + II. For kernel maintainers 1) If you aren't comfortable reviewing a given binding, reply to it and ask diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt index 1f0f67234a91..3c67bd50aa10 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/imx-thermal.txt @@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ * Temperature Monitor (TEMPMON) on Freescale i.MX SoCs Required properties: -- compatible : "fsl,imx6q-thermal" +- compatible : "fsl,imx6q-tempmon" for i.MX6Q, "fsl,imx6sx-tempmon" for i.MX6SX. + i.MX6SX has two more IRQs than i.MX6Q, one is IRQ_LOW and the other is IRQ_PANIC, + when temperature is below than low threshold, IRQ_LOW will be triggered, when temperature + is higher than panic threshold, system will auto reboot by SRC module. - fsl,tempmon : phandle pointer to system controller that contains TEMPMON control registers, e.g. ANATOP on imx6q. - fsl,tempmon-data : phandle pointer to fuse controller that contains TEMPMON diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt index 0ef00be44b01..43404b197933 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/rcar-thermal.txt @@ -7,7 +7,10 @@ Required properties: - "renesas,thermal-r8a73a4" (R-Mobile AP6) - "renesas,thermal-r8a7779" (R-Car H1) - "renesas,thermal-r8a7790" (R-Car H2) - - "renesas,thermal-r8a7791" (R-Car M2) + - "renesas,thermal-r8a7791" (R-Car M2-W) + - "renesas,thermal-r8a7792" (R-Car V2H) + - "renesas,thermal-r8a7793" (R-Car M2-N) + - "renesas,thermal-r8a7794" (R-Car E2) - reg : Address range of the thermal registers. The 1st reg will be recognized as common register if it has "interrupts". diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt index f455182b1086..e9c78ce880e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/marvell,armada-370-xp-timer.txt @@ -2,8 +2,10 @@ Marvell Armada 370 and Armada XP Timers --------------------------------------- Required properties: -- compatible: Should be either "marvell,armada-370-timer" or - "marvell,armada-xp-timer" as appropriate. +- compatible: Should be one of the following + "marvell,armada-370-timer", + "marvell,armada-375-timer", + "marvell,armada-xp-timer". - interrupts: Should contain the list of Global Timer interrupts and then local timer interrupts - reg: Should contain location and length for timers register. First @@ -13,7 +15,8 @@ Required properties: Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-370-timer": - clocks : Must contain a single entry describing the clock input -Clocks required for compatible = "marvell,armada-xp-timer": +Clocks required for compatibles = "marvell,armada-xp-timer", + "marvell,armada-375-timer": - clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. - clock-names : Must include the following entries: "nbclk" (L2/coherency fabric clock), diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,mtu2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,mtu2.txt index d9a8d5af1a21..ba0a34d97eb8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,mtu2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,mtu2.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -* Renesas R-Car Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit 2 (MTU2) +* Renesas Multi-Function Timer Pulse Unit 2 (MTU2) The MTU2 is a multi-purpose, multi-channel timer/counter with configurable clock inputs and programmable compare match. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt index 7db89fb25444..cd5f20bf2582 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,tmu.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -* Renesas R-Car Timer Unit (TMU) +* Renesas R-Mobile/R-Car Timer Unit (TMU) The TMU is a 32-bit timer/counter with configurable clock inputs and programmable compare match. @@ -9,6 +9,8 @@ are independent. The TMU hardware supports up to three channels. Required Properties: - compatible: must contain one or more of the following: + - "renesas,tmu-r8a7740" for the r8a7740 TMU + - "renesas,tmu-r8a7778" for the r8a7778 TMU - "renesas,tmu-r8a7779" for the r8a7779 TMU - "renesas,tmu" for any TMU. This is a fallback for the above renesas,tmu-* entries diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/unittest.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/unittest.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0f92a22fddfa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/unittest.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +* OF selftest platform device + +** selftest + +Required properties: +- compatible: must be "selftest" + +All other properties are optional. + +Example: + selftest { + compatible = "selftest"; + status = "okay"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt index 723999d73744..cc6151c431c8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.txt @@ -34,12 +34,14 @@ chipidea Chipidea, Inc chrp Common Hardware Reference Platform chunghwa Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd. cirrus Cirrus Logic, Inc. +cnm Chips&Media, Inc. cortina Cortina Systems, Inc. crystalfontz Crystalfontz America, Inc. dallas Maxim Integrated Products (formerly Dallas Semiconductor) davicom DAVICOM Semiconductor, Inc. denx Denx Software Engineering digi Digi International Inc. +digilent Diglent, Inc. dlg Dialog Semiconductor dlink D-Link Corporation dmo Data Modul AG @@ -77,6 +79,7 @@ innolux Innolux Corporation intel Intel Corporation intercontrol Inter Control Group isee ISEE 2007 S.L. +isil Intersil (deprecated, use isl) isl Intersil karo Ka-Ro electronics GmbH keymile Keymile GmbH @@ -90,12 +93,15 @@ lltc Linear Technology Corporation marvell Marvell Technology Group Ltd. maxim Maxim Integrated Products mediatek MediaTek Inc. +merrii Merrii Technology Co., Ltd. micrel Micrel Inc. microchip Microchip Technology Inc. +micron Micron Technology Inc. mitsubishi Mitsubishi Electric Corporation mosaixtech Mosaix Technologies, Inc. moxa Moxa mpl MPL AG +mti Imagination Technologies Ltd. (formerly MIPS Technologies Inc.) mundoreader Mundo Reader S.L. murata Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. mxicy Macronix International Co., Ltd. @@ -110,6 +116,7 @@ nxp NXP Semiconductors onnn ON Semiconductor Corp. opencores OpenCores.org panasonic Panasonic Corporation +pericom Pericom Technology Inc. phytec PHYTEC Messtechnik GmbH picochip Picochip Ltd plathome Plat'Home Co., Ltd. @@ -127,6 +134,7 @@ renesas Renesas Electronics Corporation ricoh Ricoh Co. Ltd. rockchip Fuzhou Rockchip Electronics Co., Ltd samsung Samsung Semiconductor +sandisk Sandisk Corporation sbs Smart Battery System schindler Schindler seagate Seagate Technology PLC @@ -138,7 +146,7 @@ silergy Silergy Corp. sirf SiRF Technology, Inc. sitronix Sitronix Technology Corporation smsc Standard Microsystems Corporation -snps Synopsys, Inc. +snps Synopsys, Inc. solidrun SolidRun sony Sony Corporation spansion Spansion Inc. @@ -146,6 +154,7 @@ st STMicroelectronics ste ST-Ericsson stericsson ST-Ericsson synology Synology, Inc. +tbs TBS Technologies thine THine Electronics, Inc. ti Texas Instruments tlm Trusted Logic Mobility diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt index 96e83a56048e..0a3ecbc3a1b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/backlight/lp855x.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Optional properties: - pwm-period: PWM period value. Set only PWM input mode used (u32) - rom-addr: Register address of ROM area to be updated (u8) - rom-val: Register value to be updated (u8) + - power-supply: Regulator which controls the 3V rail Example: @@ -56,6 +57,7 @@ Example: backlight@2c { compatible = "ti,lp8557"; reg = <0x2c>; + power-supply = <&backlight_vdd>; dev-ctrl = /bits/ 8 <0x41>; init-brt = /bits/ 8 <0x0a>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c46ba641a1df --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +Sunxi specific Simple Framebuffer bindings + +This binding documents sunxi specific extensions to the simple-framebuffer +bindings. The sunxi simplefb u-boot code relies on the devicetree containing +pre-populated simplefb nodes. + +These extensions are intended so that u-boot can select the right node based +on which pipeline is being used. As such they are solely intended for +firmware / bootloader use, and the OS should ignore them. + +Required properties: +- compatible: "allwinner,simple-framebuffer" +- allwinner,pipeline, one of: + "de_be0-lcd0" + "de_be1-lcd1" + "de_be0-lcd0-hdmi" + "de_be1-lcd1-hdmi" + +Example: + +chosen { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + ranges; + + framebuffer@0 { + compatible = "allwinner,simple-framebuffer", "simple-framebuffer"; + allwinner,pipeline = "de_be0-lcd0-hdmi"; + clocks = <&pll5 1>, <&ahb_gates 36>, <&ahb_gates 43>, + <&ahb_gates 44>; + status = "disabled"; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt index 70c26f3a5b9a..4474ef6e0b95 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/video/simple-framebuffer.txt @@ -1,8 +1,40 @@ Simple Framebuffer -A simple frame-buffer describes a raw memory region that may be rendered to, -with the assumption that the display hardware has already been set up to scan -out from that buffer. +A simple frame-buffer describes a frame-buffer setup by firmware or +the bootloader, with the assumption that the display hardware has already +been set up to scan out from the memory pointed to by the reg property. + +Since simplefb nodes represent runtime information they must be sub-nodes of +the chosen node (*). Simplefb nodes must be named "framebuffer@<address>". + +If the devicetree contains nodes for the display hardware used by a simplefb, +then the simplefb node must contain a property called "display", which +contains a phandle pointing to the primary display hw node, so that the OS +knows which simplefb to disable when handing over control to a driver for the +real hardware. The bindings for the hw nodes must specify which node is +considered the primary node. + +It is advised to add display# aliases to help the OS determine how to number +things. If display# aliases are used, then if the simplefb node contains a +"display" property then the /aliases/display# path must point to the display +hw node the "display" property points to, otherwise it must point directly +to the simplefb node. + +If a simplefb node represents the preferred console for user interaction, +then the chosen node's stdout-path property should point to it, or to the +primary display hw node, as with display# aliases. If display aliases are +used then it should be set to the alias instead. + +It is advised that devicetree files contain pre-filled, disabled framebuffer +nodes, so that the firmware only needs to update the mode information and +enable them. This way if e.g. later on support for more display clocks get +added, the simplefb nodes will already contain this info and the firmware +does not need to be updated. + +If pre-filled framebuffer nodes are used, the firmware may need extra +information to find the right node. In that case an extra platform specific +compatible and platform specific properties should be used and documented, +see e.g. simple-framebuffer-sunxi.txt . Required properties: - compatible: "simple-framebuffer" @@ -14,13 +46,41 @@ Required properties: - r5g6b5 (16-bit pixels, d[15:11]=r, d[10:5]=g, d[4:0]=b). - a8b8g8r8 (32-bit pixels, d[31:24]=a, d[23:16]=b, d[15:8]=g, d[7:0]=r). +Optional properties: +- clocks : List of clocks used by the framebuffer. Clocks listed here + are expected to already be configured correctly. The OS must + ensure these clocks are not modified or disabled while the + simple framebuffer remains active. +- display : phandle pointing to the primary display hardware node + Example: - framebuffer { +aliases { + display0 = &lcdc0; +} + +chosen { + framebuffer0: framebuffer@1d385000 { compatible = "simple-framebuffer"; reg = <0x1d385000 (1600 * 1200 * 2)>; width = <1600>; height = <1200>; stride = <(1600 * 2)>; format = "r5g6b5"; + clocks = <&ahb_gates 36>, <&ahb_gates 43>, <&ahb_gates 44>; + display = <&lcdc0>; + }; + stdout-path = "display0"; +}; + +soc@01c00000 { + lcdc0: lcdc@1c0c000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun4i-a10-lcdc"; + ... }; +}; + + +*) Older devicetree files may have a compatible = "simple-framebuffer" node +in a different place, operating systems must first enumerate any compatible +nodes found under chosen and then check for other compatible nodes. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fef794741bd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/w1/omap-hdq.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +* OMAP HDQ One wire bus master controller + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "ti,omap3-1w" +- reg : Address and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : interrupt line. +- ti,hwmods : "hdq1w" + +Example: + +- From omap3.dtsi + hdqw1w: 1w@480b2000 { + compatible = "ti,omap3-1w"; + reg = <0x480b2000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <58>; + ti,hwmods = "hdq1w"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3a36ee45552 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/cadence-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Zynq Watchdog Device Tree Bindings +------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: +- compatible : Should be "cdns,wdt-r1p2". +- clocks : This is pclk (APB clock). +- interrupts : This is wd_irq - watchdog timeout interrupt. +- interrupt-parent : Must be core interrupt controller. + +Optional properties +- reset-on-timeout : If this property exists, then a reset is done + when watchdog times out. +- timeout-sec : Watchdog timeout value (in seconds). + +Example: + watchdog@f8005000 { + compatible = "cdns,wdt-r1p2"; + clocks = <&clkc 45>; + interrupt-parent = <&intc>; + interrupts = <0 9 1>; + reg = <0xf8005000 0x1000>; + reset-on-timeout; + timeout-sec = <10>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-wdt.txt index e52ba2da868c..8dab6fd024aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/fsl-imx-wdt.txt @@ -7,7 +7,8 @@ Required properties: Optional property: - big-endian: If present the watchdog device's registers are implemented - in big endian mode, otherwise in little mode. + in big endian mode, otherwise in native mode(same with CPU), for more + detail please see: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regmap/regmap.txt. Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt index 97223fddb7bd..858ed9221ac4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/marvel.txt @@ -17,6 +17,18 @@ For "marvell,armada-375-wdt" and "marvell,armada-380-wdt": - reg : A third entry is mandatory and should contain the shared mask/unmask RSTOUT address. +Clocks required for compatibles = "marvell,orion-wdt", + "marvell,armada-370-wdt": +- clocks : Must contain a single entry describing the clock input + +Clocks required for compatibles = "marvell,armada-xp-wdt" + "marvell,armada-375-wdt" + "marvell,armada-380-wdt": +- clocks : Must contain an entry for each entry in clock-names. +- clock-names : Must include the following entries: + "nbclk" (L2/coherency fabric clock), + "fixed" (Reference 25 MHz fixed-clock). + Optional properties: - interrupts : Contains the IRQ for watchdog expiration @@ -30,4 +42,5 @@ Example: interrupts = <3>; timeout-sec = <10>; status = "okay"; + clocks = <&gate_clk 7>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/meson6-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/meson6-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9200fc2d508c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/meson6-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +Meson SoCs Watchdog timer + +Required properties: + +- compatible : should be "amlogic,meson6-wdt" +- reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. + +Example: + +wdt: watchdog@c1109900 { + compatible = "amlogic,meson6-wdt"; + reg = <0xc1109900 0x8>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qcom-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qcom-wdt.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4726924d034e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/qcom-wdt.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +Qualcomm Krait Processor Sub-system (KPSS) Watchdog +--------------------------------------------------- + +Required properties : +- compatible : shall contain only one of the following: + + "qcom,kpss-wdt-msm8960" + "qcom,kpss-wdt-apq8064" + "qcom,kpss-wdt-ipq8064" + +- reg : shall contain base register location and length +- clocks : shall contain the input clock + +Optional properties : +- timeout-sec : shall contain the default watchdog timeout in seconds, + if unset, the default timeout is 30 seconds + +Example: + watchdog@208a038 { + compatible = "qcom,kpss-wdt-ipq8064"; + reg = <0x0208a038 0x40>; + clocks = <&sleep_clk>; + timeout-sec = <10>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt index cfff37511aac..8f3d96af81d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/watchdog/samsung-wdt.txt @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ Required properties: (a) "samsung,s3c2410-wdt" for Exynos4 and previous SoCs (b) "samsung,exynos5250-wdt" for Exynos5250 (c) "samsung,exynos5420-wdt" for Exynos5420 + (c) "samsung,exynos7-wdt" for Exynos7 - reg : base physical address of the controller and length of memory mapped region. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/of_selftest.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/of_selftest.txt index 1e3d5c92b5e3..57a808b588bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/of_selftest.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/of_selftest.txt @@ -63,7 +63,6 @@ struct device_node { struct device_node *parent; struct device_node *child; struct device_node *sibling; - struct device_node *allnext; /* next in list of all nodes */ ... }; @@ -99,12 +98,6 @@ child11 -> sibling12 -> sibling13 -> sibling14 -> null Figure 1: Generic structure of un-flattened device tree -*allnext: it is used to link all the nodes of DT into a list. So, for the - above tree the list would be as follows: - -root->child1->child11->sibling12->sibling13->child131->sibling14->sibling2-> -child21->sibling22->sibling23->sibling3->child31->sibling32->sibling4->null - Before executing OF selftest, it is required to attach the test data to machine's device tree (if present). So, when selftest_data_add() is called, at first it reads the flattened device tree data linked into the kernel image @@ -131,11 +124,6 @@ root ('/') test-child01 null null null -allnext list: - -root->testcase-data->test-child0->test-child01->test-sibling1->test-sibling2 -->test-sibling3->null - Figure 2: Example test data tree to be attached to live tree. According to the scenario above, the live tree is already present so it isn't @@ -204,8 +192,6 @@ detached and then moving up the parent nodes are removed, and eventually the whole tree). selftest_data_remove() calls detach_node_and_children() that uses of_detach_node() to detach the nodes from the live device tree. -To detach a node, of_detach_node() first updates all_next linked list, by -attaching the previous node's allnext to current node's allnext pointer. And -then, it either updates the child pointer of given node's parent to its -sibling or attaches the previous sibling to the given node's sibling, as -appropriate. That is it :) +To detach a node, of_detach_node() either updates the child pointer of given +node's parent to its sibling or attaches the previous sibling to the given +node's sibling, as appropriate. That is it :) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/overlay-notes.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/overlay-notes.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..30ae758e3eef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/overlay-notes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +Device Tree Overlay Notes +------------------------- + +This document describes the implementation of the in-kernel +device tree overlay functionality residing in drivers/of/overlay.c and is a +companion document to Documentation/devicetree/dt-object-internal.txt[1] & +Documentation/devicetree/dynamic-resolution-notes.txt[2] + +How overlays work +----------------- + +A Device Tree's overlay purpose is to modify the kernel's live tree, and +have the modification affecting the state of the the kernel in a way that +is reflecting the changes. +Since the kernel mainly deals with devices, any new device node that result +in an active device should have it created while if the device node is either +disabled or removed all together, the affected device should be deregistered. + +Lets take an example where we have a foo board with the following base tree +which is taken from [1]. + +---- foo.dts ----------------------------------------------------------------- + /* FOO platform */ + / { + compatible = "corp,foo"; + + /* shared resources */ + res: res { + }; + + /* On chip peripherals */ + ocp: ocp { + /* peripherals that are always instantiated */ + peripheral1 { ... }; + } + }; +---- foo.dts ----------------------------------------------------------------- + +The overlay bar.dts, when loaded (and resolved as described in [2]) should + +---- bar.dts ----------------------------------------------------------------- +/plugin/; /* allow undefined label references and record them */ +/ { + .... /* various properties for loader use; i.e. part id etc. */ + fragment@0 { + target = <&ocp>; + __overlay__ { + /* bar peripheral */ + bar { + compatible = "corp,bar"; + ... /* various properties and child nodes */ + } + }; + }; +}; +---- bar.dts ----------------------------------------------------------------- + +result in foo+bar.dts + +---- foo+bar.dts ------------------------------------------------------------- + /* FOO platform + bar peripheral */ + / { + compatible = "corp,foo"; + + /* shared resources */ + res: res { + }; + + /* On chip peripherals */ + ocp: ocp { + /* peripherals that are always instantiated */ + peripheral1 { ... }; + + /* bar peripheral */ + bar { + compatible = "corp,bar"; + ... /* various properties and child nodes */ + } + } + }; +---- foo+bar.dts ------------------------------------------------------------- + +As a result of the the overlay, a new device node (bar) has been created +so a bar platform device will be registered and if a matching device driver +is loaded the device will be created as expected. + +Overlay in-kernel API +-------------------------------- + +The API is quite easy to use. + +1. Call of_overlay_create() to create and apply an overlay. The return value +is a cookie identifying this overlay. + +2. Call of_overlay_destroy() to remove and cleanup the overlay previously +created via the call to of_overlay_create(). Removal of an overlay that +is stacked by another will not be permitted. + +Finally, if you need to remove all overlays in one-go, just call +of_overlay_destroy_all() which will remove every single one in the correct +order. + +Overlay DTS Format +------------------ + +The DTS of an overlay should have the following format: + +{ + /* ignored properties by the overlay */ + + fragment@0 { /* first child node */ + + target=<phandle>; /* phandle target of the overlay */ + or + target-path="/path"; /* target path of the overlay */ + + __overlay__ { + property-a; /* add property-a to the target */ + node-a { /* add to an existing, or create a node-a */ + ... + }; + }; + } + fragment@1 { /* second child node */ + ... + }; + /* more fragments follow */ +} + +Using the non-phandle based target method allows one to use a base DT which does +not contain a __symbols__ node, i.e. it was not compiled with the -@ option. +The __symbols__ node is only required for the target=<phandle> method, since it +contains the information required to map from a phandle to a tree location. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/todo.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/todo.txt index c3cf0659bd19..b5139d1de811 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/todo.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/todo.txt @@ -2,7 +2,6 @@ Todo list for devicetree: === General structure === - Switch from custom lists to (h)list_head for nodes and properties structure -- Remove of_allnodes list and iterate using list of child nodes alone === CONFIG_OF_DYNAMIC === - Switch to RCU for tree updates and get rid of global spinlock diff --git a/Documentation/dmaengine.txt b/Documentation/dmaengine/client.txt index 11fb87ff6cd0..11fb87ff6cd0 100644 --- a/Documentation/dmaengine.txt +++ b/Documentation/dmaengine/client.txt diff --git a/Documentation/dmatest.txt b/Documentation/dmaengine/dmatest.txt index dd77a81bdb80..dd77a81bdb80 100644 --- a/Documentation/dmatest.txt +++ b/Documentation/dmaengine/dmatest.txt diff --git a/Documentation/dmaengine/provider.txt b/Documentation/dmaengine/provider.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..766658ccf235 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dmaengine/provider.txt @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ +DMAengine controller documentation +================================== + +Hardware Introduction ++++++++++++++++++++++ + +Most of the Slave DMA controllers have the same general principles of +operations. + +They have a given number of channels to use for the DMA transfers, and +a given number of requests lines. + +Requests and channels are pretty much orthogonal. Channels can be used +to serve several to any requests. To simplify, channels are the +entities that will be doing the copy, and requests what endpoints are +involved. + +The request lines actually correspond to physical lines going from the +DMA-eligible devices to the controller itself. Whenever the device +will want to start a transfer, it will assert a DMA request (DRQ) by +asserting that request line. + +A very simple DMA controller would only take into account a single +parameter: the transfer size. At each clock cycle, it would transfer a +byte of data from one buffer to another, until the transfer size has +been reached. + +That wouldn't work well in the real world, since slave devices might +require a specific number of bits to be transferred in a single +cycle. For example, we may want to transfer as much data as the +physical bus allows to maximize performances when doing a simple +memory copy operation, but our audio device could have a narrower FIFO +that requires data to be written exactly 16 or 24 bits at a time. This +is why most if not all of the DMA controllers can adjust this, using a +parameter called the transfer width. + +Moreover, some DMA controllers, whenever the RAM is used as a source +or destination, can group the reads or writes in memory into a buffer, +so instead of having a lot of small memory accesses, which is not +really efficient, you'll get several bigger transfers. This is done +using a parameter called the burst size, that defines how many single +reads/writes it's allowed to do without the controller splitting the +transfer into smaller sub-transfers. + +Our theoretical DMA controller would then only be able to do transfers +that involve a single contiguous block of data. However, some of the +transfers we usually have are not, and want to copy data from +non-contiguous buffers to a contiguous buffer, which is called +scatter-gather. + +DMAEngine, at least for mem2dev transfers, require support for +scatter-gather. So we're left with two cases here: either we have a +quite simple DMA controller that doesn't support it, and we'll have to +implement it in software, or we have a more advanced DMA controller, +that implements in hardware scatter-gather. + +The latter are usually programmed using a collection of chunks to +transfer, and whenever the transfer is started, the controller will go +over that collection, doing whatever we programmed there. + +This collection is usually either a table or a linked list. You will +then push either the address of the table and its number of elements, +or the first item of the list to one channel of the DMA controller, +and whenever a DRQ will be asserted, it will go through the collection +to know where to fetch the data from. + +Either way, the format of this collection is completely dependent on +your hardware. Each DMA controller will require a different structure, +but all of them will require, for every chunk, at least the source and +destination addresses, whether it should increment these addresses or +not and the three parameters we saw earlier: the burst size, the +transfer width and the transfer size. + +The one last thing is that usually, slave devices won't issue DRQ by +default, and you have to enable this in your slave device driver first +whenever you're willing to use DMA. + +These were just the general memory-to-memory (also called mem2mem) or +memory-to-device (mem2dev) kind of transfers. Most devices often +support other kind of transfers or memory operations that dmaengine +support and will be detailed later in this document. + +DMA Support in Linux +++++++++++++++++++++ + +Historically, DMA controller drivers have been implemented using the +async TX API, to offload operations such as memory copy, XOR, +cryptography, etc., basically any memory to memory operation. + +Over time, the need for memory to device transfers arose, and +dmaengine was extended. Nowadays, the async TX API is written as a +layer on top of dmaengine, and acts as a client. Still, dmaengine +accommodates that API in some cases, and made some design choices to +ensure that it stayed compatible. + +For more information on the Async TX API, please look the relevant +documentation file in Documentation/crypto/async-tx-api.txt. + +DMAEngine Registration +++++++++++++++++++++++ + +struct dma_device Initialization +-------------------------------- + +Just like any other kernel framework, the whole DMAEngine registration +relies on the driver filling a structure and registering against the +framework. In our case, that structure is dma_device. + +The first thing you need to do in your driver is to allocate this +structure. Any of the usual memory allocators will do, but you'll also +need to initialize a few fields in there: + + * channels: should be initialized as a list using the + INIT_LIST_HEAD macro for example + + * dev: should hold the pointer to the struct device associated + to your current driver instance. + +Supported transaction types +--------------------------- + +The next thing you need is to set which transaction types your device +(and driver) supports. + +Our dma_device structure has a field called cap_mask that holds the +various types of transaction supported, and you need to modify this +mask using the dma_cap_set function, with various flags depending on +transaction types you support as an argument. + +All those capabilities are defined in the dma_transaction_type enum, +in include/linux/dmaengine.h + +Currently, the types available are: + * DMA_MEMCPY + - The device is able to do memory to memory copies + + * DMA_XOR + - The device is able to perform XOR operations on memory areas + - Used to accelerate XOR intensive tasks, such as RAID5 + + * DMA_XOR_VAL + - The device is able to perform parity check using the XOR + algorithm against a memory buffer. + + * DMA_PQ + - The device is able to perform RAID6 P+Q computations, P being a + simple XOR, and Q being a Reed-Solomon algorithm. + + * DMA_PQ_VAL + - The device is able to perform parity check using RAID6 P+Q + algorithm against a memory buffer. + + * DMA_INTERRUPT + - The device is able to trigger a dummy transfer that will + generate periodic interrupts + - Used by the client drivers to register a callback that will be + called on a regular basis through the DMA controller interrupt + + * DMA_SG + - The device supports memory to memory scatter-gather + transfers. + - Even though a plain memcpy can look like a particular case of a + scatter-gather transfer, with a single chunk to transfer, it's a + distinct transaction type in the mem2mem transfers case + + * DMA_PRIVATE + - The devices only supports slave transfers, and as such isn't + available for async transfers. + + * DMA_ASYNC_TX + - Must not be set by the device, and will be set by the framework + if needed + - /* TODO: What is it about? */ + + * DMA_SLAVE + - The device can handle device to memory transfers, including + scatter-gather transfers. + - While in the mem2mem case we were having two distinct types to + deal with a single chunk to copy or a collection of them, here, + we just have a single transaction type that is supposed to + handle both. + - If you want to transfer a single contiguous memory buffer, + simply build a scatter list with only one item. + + * DMA_CYCLIC + - The device can handle cyclic transfers. + - A cyclic transfer is a transfer where the chunk collection will + loop over itself, with the last item pointing to the first. + - It's usually used for audio transfers, where you want to operate + on a single ring buffer that you will fill with your audio data. + + * DMA_INTERLEAVE + - The device supports interleaved transfer. + - These transfers can transfer data from a non-contiguous buffer + to a non-contiguous buffer, opposed to DMA_SLAVE that can + transfer data from a non-contiguous data set to a continuous + destination buffer. + - It's usually used for 2d content transfers, in which case you + want to transfer a portion of uncompressed data directly to the + display to print it + +These various types will also affect how the source and destination +addresses change over time. + +Addresses pointing to RAM are typically incremented (or decremented) +after each transfer. In case of a ring buffer, they may loop +(DMA_CYCLIC). Addresses pointing to a device's register (e.g. a FIFO) +are typically fixed. + +Device operations +----------------- + +Our dma_device structure also requires a few function pointers in +order to implement the actual logic, now that we described what +operations we were able to perform. + +The functions that we have to fill in there, and hence have to +implement, obviously depend on the transaction types you reported as +supported. + + * device_alloc_chan_resources + * device_free_chan_resources + - These functions will be called whenever a driver will call + dma_request_channel or dma_release_channel for the first/last + time on the channel associated to that driver. + - They are in charge of allocating/freeing all the needed + resources in order for that channel to be useful for your + driver. + - These functions can sleep. + + * device_prep_dma_* + - These functions are matching the capabilities you registered + previously. + - These functions all take the buffer or the scatterlist relevant + for the transfer being prepared, and should create a hardware + descriptor or a list of hardware descriptors from it + - These functions can be called from an interrupt context + - Any allocation you might do should be using the GFP_NOWAIT + flag, in order not to potentially sleep, but without depleting + the emergency pool either. + - Drivers should try to pre-allocate any memory they might need + during the transfer setup at probe time to avoid putting to + much pressure on the nowait allocator. + + - It should return a unique instance of the + dma_async_tx_descriptor structure, that further represents this + particular transfer. + + - This structure can be initialized using the function + dma_async_tx_descriptor_init. + - You'll also need to set two fields in this structure: + + flags: + TODO: Can it be modified by the driver itself, or + should it be always the flags passed in the arguments + + + tx_submit: A pointer to a function you have to implement, + that is supposed to push the current + transaction descriptor to a pending queue, waiting + for issue_pending to be called. + + * device_issue_pending + - Takes the first transaction descriptor in the pending queue, + and starts the transfer. Whenever that transfer is done, it + should move to the next transaction in the list. + - This function can be called in an interrupt context + + * device_tx_status + - Should report the bytes left to go over on the given channel + - Should only care about the transaction descriptor passed as + argument, not the currently active one on a given channel + - The tx_state argument might be NULL + - Should use dma_set_residue to report it + - In the case of a cyclic transfer, it should only take into + account the current period. + - This function can be called in an interrupt context. + + * device_control + - Used by client drivers to control and configure the channel it + has a handle on. + - Called with a command and an argument + + The command is one of the values listed by the enum + dma_ctrl_cmd. The valid commands are: + + DMA_PAUSE + + Pauses a transfer on the channel + + This command should operate synchronously on the channel, + pausing right away the work of the given channel + + DMA_RESUME + + Restarts a transfer on the channel + + This command should operate synchronously on the channel, + resuming right away the work of the given channel + + DMA_TERMINATE_ALL + + Aborts all the pending and ongoing transfers on the + channel + + This command should operate synchronously on the channel, + terminating right away all the channels + + DMA_SLAVE_CONFIG + + Reconfigures the channel with passed configuration + + This command should NOT perform synchronously, or on any + currently queued transfers, but only on subsequent ones + + In this case, the function will receive a + dma_slave_config structure pointer as an argument, that + will detail which configuration to use. + + Even though that structure contains a direction field, + this field is deprecated in favor of the direction + argument given to the prep_* functions + + FSLDMA_EXTERNAL_START + + TODO: Why does that even exist? + + The argument is an opaque unsigned long. This actually is a + pointer to a struct dma_slave_config that should be used only + in the DMA_SLAVE_CONFIG. + + * device_slave_caps + - Called through the framework by client drivers in order to have + an idea of what are the properties of the channel allocated to + them. + - Such properties are the buswidth, available directions, etc. + - Required for every generic layer doing DMA transfers, such as + ASoC. + +Misc notes (stuff that should be documented, but don't really know +where to put them) +------------------------------------------------------------------ + * dma_run_dependencies + - Should be called at the end of an async TX transfer, and can be + ignored in the slave transfers case. + - Makes sure that dependent operations are run before marking it + as complete. + + * dma_cookie_t + - it's a DMA transaction ID that will increment over time. + - Not really relevant any more since the introduction of virt-dma + that abstracts it away. + + * DMA_CTRL_ACK + - Undocumented feature + - No one really has an idea of what it's about, besides being + related to reusing the DMA transaction descriptors or having + additional transactions added to it in the async-tx API + - Useless in the case of the slave API + +General Design Notes +-------------------- + +Most of the DMAEngine drivers you'll see are based on a similar design +that handles the end of transfer interrupts in the handler, but defer +most work to a tasklet, including the start of a new transfer whenever +the previous transfer ended. + +This is a rather inefficient design though, because the inter-transfer +latency will be not only the interrupt latency, but also the +scheduling latency of the tasklet, which will leave the channel idle +in between, which will slow down the global transfer rate. + +You should avoid this kind of practice, and instead of electing a new +transfer in your tasklet, move that part to the interrupt handler in +order to have a shorter idle window (that we can't really avoid +anyway). + +Glossary +-------- + +Burst: A number of consecutive read or write operations + that can be queued to buffers before being flushed to + memory. +Chunk: A contiguous collection of bursts +Transfer: A collection of chunks (be it contiguous or not) diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt index 9af538be3751..eede6088f978 100644 --- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt +++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt @@ -77,6 +77,17 @@ should appear, and then pressing CTRL-R let you specify the patch file to insert into the message. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Claws Mail (GUI) + +Works. Some people use this successfully for patches. + +To insert a patch use Message->Insert File (CTRL+i) or an external editor. + +If the inserted patch has to be edited in the Claws composition window +"Auto wrapping" in Configuration->Preferences->Compose->Wrapping should be +disabled. + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Evolution (GUI) Some people use this successfully for patches. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 94d93b1f8b53..b30753cbf431 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -67,6 +67,7 @@ prototypes: struct file *, unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode, int *opened); int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t); + int (*dentry_open)(struct dentry *, struct file *, const struct cred *); locking rules: all may block @@ -96,6 +97,7 @@ fiemap: no update_time: no atomic_open: yes tmpfile: no +dentry_open: no Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_mutex on victim. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt index 3a863f692728..88ab81c79109 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/debugfs.txt @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ file. struct dentry *parent, struct debugfs_regset32 *regset); - int debugfs_print_regs32(struct seq_file *s, struct debugfs_reg32 *regs, + void debugfs_print_regs32(struct seq_file *s, struct debugfs_reg32 *regs, int nregs, void __iomem *base, char *prefix); The "base" argument may be 0, but you may want to build the reg32 array diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt index 2cca5a25ef89..e0950c483c22 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/f2fs.txt @@ -122,6 +122,10 @@ disable_ext_identify Disable the extension list configured by mkfs, so f2fs inline_xattr Enable the inline xattrs feature. inline_data Enable the inline data feature: New created small(<~3.4k) files can be written into inode block. +inline_dentry Enable the inline dir feature: data in new created + directory entries can be written into inode block. The + space of inode block which is used to store inline + dentries is limited to ~3.4k. flush_merge Merge concurrent cache_flush commands as much as possible to eliminate redundant command issues. If the underlying device handles the cache_flush command relatively slowly, @@ -131,6 +135,9 @@ nobarrier This option can be used if underlying storage guarantees If this option is set, no cache_flush commands are issued but f2fs still guarantees the write ordering of all the data writes. +fastboot This option is used when a system wants to reduce mount + time as much as possible, even though normal performance + can be sacrificed. ================================================================================ DEBUGFS ENTRIES diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting index c8f036a9b13f..520a4becb75c 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/Exporting @@ -72,24 +72,11 @@ c/ Helper routines to allocate anonymous dentries, and to help attach DCACHE_DISCONNECTED) dentry is allocated and attached. In the case of a directory, care is taken that only one dentry can ever be attached. - d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) or d_materialise_unique(dentry, inode) - will introduce a new dentry into the tree; either the passed-in - dentry or a preexisting alias for the given inode (such as an - anonymous one created by d_obtain_alias), if appropriate. The two - functions differ in their handling of directories with preexisting - aliases: - d_splice_alias will use any existing IS_ROOT dentry, but it will - return -EIO rather than try to move a dentry with a different - parent. This is appropriate for local filesystems, which - should never see such an alias unless the filesystem is - corrupted somehow (for example, if two on-disk directory - entries refer to the same directory.) - d_materialise_unique will attempt to move any dentry. This is - appropriate for distributed filesystems, where finding a - directory other than where we last cached it may be a normal - consequence of concurrent operations on other hosts. - Both functions return NULL when the passed-in dentry is used, - following the calling convention of ->lookup. + d_splice_alias(inode, dentry) will introduce a new dentry into the tree; + either the passed-in dentry or a preexisting alias for the given inode + (such as an anonymous one created by d_obtain_alias), if appropriate. + It returns NULL when the passed-in dentry is used, following the calling + convention of ->lookup. Filesystem Issues diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a27c950ece61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/overlayfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +Written by: Neil Brown <neilb@suse.de> + +Overlay Filesystem +================== + +This document describes a prototype for a new approach to providing +overlay-filesystem functionality in Linux (sometimes referred to as +union-filesystems). An overlay-filesystem tries to present a +filesystem which is the result over overlaying one filesystem on top +of the other. + +The result will inevitably fail to look exactly like a normal +filesystem for various technical reasons. The expectation is that +many use cases will be able to ignore these differences. + +This approach is 'hybrid' because the objects that appear in the +filesystem do not all appear to belong to that filesystem. In many +cases an object accessed in the union will be indistinguishable +from accessing the corresponding object from the original filesystem. +This is most obvious from the 'st_dev' field returned by stat(2). + +While directories will report an st_dev from the overlay-filesystem, +all non-directory objects will report an st_dev from the lower or +upper filesystem that is providing the object. Similarly st_ino will +only be unique when combined with st_dev, and both of these can change +over the lifetime of a non-directory object. Many applications and +tools ignore these values and will not be affected. + +Upper and Lower +--------------- + +An overlay filesystem combines two filesystems - an 'upper' filesystem +and a 'lower' filesystem. When a name exists in both filesystems, the +object in the 'upper' filesystem is visible while the object in the +'lower' filesystem is either hidden or, in the case of directories, +merged with the 'upper' object. + +It would be more correct to refer to an upper and lower 'directory +tree' rather than 'filesystem' as it is quite possible for both +directory trees to be in the same filesystem and there is no +requirement that the root of a filesystem be given for either upper or +lower. + +The lower filesystem can be any filesystem supported by Linux and does +not need to be writable. The lower filesystem can even be another +overlayfs. The upper filesystem will normally be writable and if it +is it must support the creation of trusted.* extended attributes, and +must provide valid d_type in readdir responses, so NFS is not suitable. + +A read-only overlay of two read-only filesystems may use any +filesystem type. + +Directories +----------- + +Overlaying mainly involves directories. If a given name appears in both +upper and lower filesystems and refers to a non-directory in either, +then the lower object is hidden - the name refers only to the upper +object. + +Where both upper and lower objects are directories, a merged directory +is formed. + +At mount time, the two directories given as mount options "lowerdir" and +"upperdir" are combined into a merged directory: + + mount -t overlay overlay -olowerdir=/lower,upperdir=/upper,\ +workdir=/work /merged + +The "workdir" needs to be an empty directory on the same filesystem +as upperdir. + +Then whenever a lookup is requested in such a merged directory, the +lookup is performed in each actual directory and the combined result +is cached in the dentry belonging to the overlay filesystem. If both +actual lookups find directories, both are stored and a merged +directory is created, otherwise only one is stored: the upper if it +exists, else the lower. + +Only the lists of names from directories are merged. Other content +such as metadata and extended attributes are reported for the upper +directory only. These attributes of the lower directory are hidden. + +whiteouts and opaque directories +-------------------------------- + +In order to support rm and rmdir without changing the lower +filesystem, an overlay filesystem needs to record in the upper filesystem +that files have been removed. This is done using whiteouts and opaque +directories (non-directories are always opaque). + +A whiteout is created as a character device with 0/0 device number. +When a whiteout is found in the upper level of a merged directory, any +matching name in the lower level is ignored, and the whiteout itself +is also hidden. + +A directory is made opaque by setting the xattr "trusted.overlay.opaque" +to "y". Where the upper filesystem contains an opaque directory, any +directory in the lower filesystem with the same name is ignored. + +readdir +------- + +When a 'readdir' request is made on a merged directory, the upper and +lower directories are each read and the name lists merged in the +obvious way (upper is read first, then lower - entries that already +exist are not re-added). This merged name list is cached in the +'struct file' and so remains as long as the file is kept open. If the +directory is opened and read by two processes at the same time, they +will each have separate caches. A seekdir to the start of the +directory (offset 0) followed by a readdir will cause the cache to be +discarded and rebuilt. + +This means that changes to the merged directory do not appear while a +directory is being read. This is unlikely to be noticed by many +programs. + +seek offsets are assigned sequentially when the directories are read. +Thus if + - read part of a directory + - remember an offset, and close the directory + - re-open the directory some time later + - seek to the remembered offset + +there may be little correlation between the old and new locations in +the list of filenames, particularly if anything has changed in the +directory. + +Readdir on directories that are not merged is simply handled by the +underlying directory (upper or lower). + + +Non-directories +--------------- + +Objects that are not directories (files, symlinks, device-special +files etc.) are presented either from the upper or lower filesystem as +appropriate. When a file in the lower filesystem is accessed in a way +the requires write-access, such as opening for write access, changing +some metadata etc., the file is first copied from the lower filesystem +to the upper filesystem (copy_up). Note that creating a hard-link +also requires copy_up, though of course creation of a symlink does +not. + +The copy_up may turn out to be unnecessary, for example if the file is +opened for read-write but the data is not modified. + +The copy_up process first makes sure that the containing directory +exists in the upper filesystem - creating it and any parents as +necessary. It then creates the object with the same metadata (owner, +mode, mtime, symlink-target etc.) and then if the object is a file, the +data is copied from the lower to the upper filesystem. Finally any +extended attributes are copied up. + +Once the copy_up is complete, the overlay filesystem simply +provides direct access to the newly created file in the upper +filesystem - future operations on the file are barely noticed by the +overlay filesystem (though an operation on the name of the file such as +rename or unlink will of course be noticed and handled). + + +Non-standard behavior +--------------------- + +The copy_up operation essentially creates a new, identical file and +moves it over to the old name. The new file may be on a different +filesystem, so both st_dev and st_ino of the file may change. + +Any open files referring to this inode will access the old data and +metadata. Similarly any file locks obtained before copy_up will not +apply to the copied up file. + +On a file opened with O_RDONLY fchmod(2), fchown(2), futimesat(2) and +fsetxattr(2) will fail with EROFS. + +If a file with multiple hard links is copied up, then this will +"break" the link. Changes will not be propagated to other names +referring to the same inode. + +Symlinks in /proc/PID/ and /proc/PID/fd which point to a non-directory +object in overlayfs will not contain valid absolute paths, only +relative paths leading up to the filesystem's root. This will be +fixed in the future. + +Some operations are not atomic, for example a crash during copy_up or +rename will leave the filesystem in an inconsistent state. This will +be addressed in the future. + +Changes to underlying filesystems +--------------------------------- + +Offline changes, when the overlay is not mounted, are allowed to either +the upper or the lower trees. + +Changes to the underlying filesystems while part of a mounted overlay +filesystem are not allowed. If the underlying filesystem is changed, +the behavior of the overlay is undefined, though it will not result in +a crash or deadlock. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index 0f3a1390bf00..fa2db081505e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -463,3 +463,11 @@ in your dentry operations instead. of the in-tree instances did). inode_hash_lock is still held, of course, so they are still serialized wrt removal from inode hash, as well as wrt set() callback of iget5_locked(). +-- +[mandatory] + d_materialise_unique() is gone; d_splice_alias() does everything you + need now. Remember that they have opposite orders of arguments ;-/ +-- +[mandatory] + f_dentry is gone; use f_path.dentry, or, better yet, see if you can avoid + it entirely. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index eb8a10e22f7c..aae9dd13c91f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -1272,7 +1272,7 @@ softirq. 1.9 Ext4 file system parameters ------------------------------- +------------------------------- Information about mounted ext4 file systems can be found in /proc/fs/ext4. Each mounted filesystem will have a directory in diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt index 8ea3e90ace07..b797ed38de46 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/seq_file.txt @@ -180,23 +180,19 @@ output must be passed to the seq_file code. Some utility functions have been defined which make this task easy. Most code will simply use seq_printf(), which works pretty much like -printk(), but which requires the seq_file pointer as an argument. It is -common to ignore the return value from seq_printf(), but a function -producing complicated output may want to check that value and quit if -something non-zero is returned; an error return means that the seq_file -buffer has been filled and further output will be discarded. +printk(), but which requires the seq_file pointer as an argument. For straight character output, the following functions may be used: - int seq_putc(struct seq_file *m, char c); - int seq_puts(struct seq_file *m, const char *s); - int seq_escape(struct seq_file *m, const char *s, const char *esc); + seq_putc(struct seq_file *m, char c); + seq_puts(struct seq_file *m, const char *s); + seq_escape(struct seq_file *m, const char *s, const char *esc); The first two output a single character and a string, just like one would expect. seq_escape() is like seq_puts(), except that any character in s which is in the string esc will be represented in octal form in the output. -There is also a pair of functions for printing filenames: +There are also a pair of functions for printing filenames: int seq_path(struct seq_file *m, struct path *path, char *esc); int seq_path_root(struct seq_file *m, struct path *path, @@ -209,6 +205,14 @@ root is desired, it can be used with seq_path_root(). Note that, if it turns out that path cannot be reached from root, the value of root will be changed in seq_file_root() to a root which *does* work. +A function producing complicated output may want to check + bool seq_has_overflowed(struct seq_file *m); +and avoid further seq_<output> calls if true is returned. + +A true return from seq_has_overflowed means that the seq_file buffer will +be discarded and the seq_show function will attempt to allocate a larger +buffer and retry printing. + Making it all work diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index fceff7c00a3c..43ce0507ee25 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -364,6 +364,7 @@ struct inode_operations { int (*atomic_open)(struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct file *, unsigned open_flag, umode_t create_mode, int *opened); int (*tmpfile) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, umode_t); + int (*dentry_open)(struct dentry *, struct file *, const struct cred *); }; Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless @@ -696,6 +697,12 @@ struct address_space_operations { but instead uses bmap to find out where the blocks in the file are and uses those addresses directly. + dentry_open: *WARNING: probably going away soon, do not use!* This is an + alternative to f_op->open(), the difference is that this method may open + a file not necessarily originating from the same filesystem as the one + i_op->open() was called on. It may be useful for stacking filesystems + which want to allow native I/O directly on underlying files. + invalidatepage: If a page has PagePrivate set, then invalidatepage will be called when part or all of the page is to be removed @@ -828,7 +835,7 @@ struct file_operations { ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, struct pipe_inode_info *, size_t, unsigned int); int (*setlease)(struct file *, long arg, struct file_lock **, void **); long (*fallocate)(struct file *, int mode, loff_t offset, loff_t len); - int (*show_fdinfo)(struct seq_file *m, struct file *f); + void (*show_fdinfo)(struct seq_file *m, struct file *f); }; Again, all methods are called without any locks being held, unless diff --git a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt index 6ce544191ca6..859918db36b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio/consumer.txt @@ -219,6 +219,24 @@ part of the IRQ interface, e.g. IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING, as are system wakeup capabilities. +GPIOs and ACPI +============== + +On ACPI systems, GPIOs are described by GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources listed by +the _CRS configuration objects of devices. Those resources do not provide +connection IDs (names) for GPIOs, so it is necessary to use an additional +mechanism for this purpose. + +Systems compliant with ACPI 5.1 or newer may provide a _DSD configuration object +which, among other things, may be used to provide connection IDs for specific +GPIOs described by the GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources in _CRS. If that is the +case, it will be handled by the GPIO subsystem automatically. However, if the +_DSD is not present, the mappings between GpioIo()/GpioInt() resources and GPIO +connection IDs need to be provided by device drivers. + +For details refer to Documentation/acpi/gpio-properties.txt + + Interacting With the Legacy GPIO Subsystem ========================================== Many kernel subsystems still handle GPIOs using the legacy integer-based diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 index c6a5ff1b4641..67691a0aa41d 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 @@ -53,6 +53,11 @@ Supported chips: http://www.ti.com/product/tmp75 http://www.ti.com/product/tmp175 http://www.ti.com/product/tmp275 + * NXP LM75B + Prefix: 'lm75b' + Addresses scanned: none + Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website + http://www.nxp.com/documents/data_sheet/LM75B.pdf Author: Frodo Looijaard <frodol@dds.nl> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 index a0e95ddfd372..32b777ef224c 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95234 @@ -2,6 +2,10 @@ Kernel driver lm95234 ===================== Supported chips: + * National Semiconductor / Texas Instruments LM95233 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x2a, 0x2b + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website + http://www.ti.com/product/lm95233 * National Semiconductor / Texas Instruments LM95234 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x4d, 0x4e Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website @@ -13,11 +17,12 @@ Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> Description ----------- -LM95234 is an 11-bit digital temperature sensor with a 2-wire System Management -Bus (SMBus) interface and TrueTherm technology that can very accurately monitor -the temperature of four remote diodes as well as its own temperature. -The four remote diodes can be external devices such as microprocessors, -graphics processors or diode-connected 2N3904s. The LM95234's TruTherm +LM95233 and LM95234 are 11-bit digital temperature sensors with a 2-wire +System Management Bus (SMBus) interface and TrueTherm technology +that can very accurately monitor the temperature of two (LM95233) +or four (LM95234) remote diodes as well as its own temperature. +The remote diodes can be external devices such as microprocessors, +graphics processors or diode-connected 2N3904s. The chip's TruTherm beta compensation technology allows sensing of 90 nm or 65 nm process thermal diodes accurately. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245 index 77eaf2812d25..d755901f58c4 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm95245 @@ -2,10 +2,14 @@ Kernel driver lm95245 ================== Supported chips: - * National Semiconductor LM95245 + * TI LM95235 + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x29, 0x4c + Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website + http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95235.pdf + * TI / National Semiconductor LM95245 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x29, 0x4c, 0x4d - Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website - http://www.national.com/mpf/LM/LM95245.html + Datasheet: Publicly available at the TI website + http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/lm95245.pdf Author: Alexander Stein <alexander.stein@systec-electronic.com> @@ -13,10 +17,10 @@ Author: Alexander Stein <alexander.stein@systec-electronic.com> Description ----------- -The LM95245 is an 11-bit digital temperature sensor with a 2-wire System +LM95235 and LM95245 are 11-bit digital temperature sensors with a 2-wire System Management Bus (SMBus) interface and TruTherm technology that can monitor the temperature of a remote diode as well as its own temperature. -The LM95245 can be used to very accurately monitor the temperature of +The chips can be used to very accurately monitor the temperature of external devices such as microprocessors. All temperature values are given in millidegrees Celsius. Local temperature diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 index 4e9ef60e8c6c..f0dd3d2fec96 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct6775 @@ -8,11 +8,15 @@ Kernel driver NCT6775 ===================== Supported chips: + * Nuvoton NCT6102D/NCT6104D/NCT6106D + Prefix: 'nct6106' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from the Nuvoton web site * Nuvoton NCT5572D/NCT6771F/NCT6772F/NCT6775F/W83677HG-I Prefix: 'nct6775' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request - * Nuvoton NCT5577D/NCT6776D/NCT6776F + * Nuvoton NCT5573D/NCT5577D/NCT6776D/NCT6776F Prefix: 'nct6776' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request @@ -20,6 +24,14 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'nct6779' Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6791D + Prefix: 'nct6791' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request + * Nuvoton NCT6792D + Prefix: 'nct6792' + Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request Authors: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802 b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2e00f5e344bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/nct7802 @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +Kernel driver nct7802 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Nuvoton NCT7802Y + Prefix: 'nct7802' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x28..0x2f + Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton web site + +Authors: + Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for the Nuvoton NCT7802Y hardware monitoring +chip. NCT7802Y supports 6 temperature sensors, 5 voltage sensors, and 3 fan +speed sensors. + +The chip also supports intelligent fan speed control. This functionality is +not currently supported by the driver. + +Tested Boards and BIOS Versions +------------------------------- + +The driver has been reported to work with the following boards and +BIOS versions. + +Board BIOS version +--------------------------------------------------------------- +Kontron COMe-bSC2 CHR2E934.001.GGO +Kontron COMe-bIP2 CCR2E212 diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 index f91e3fa7e5ec..8eb88e974055 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/tmp401 @@ -18,6 +18,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'tmp432' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp432.html + * Texas Instruments TMP435 + Prefix: 'tmp435' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x37, 0x48 - 0x4f + Datasheet: http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/tmp435.html Authors: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com> @@ -27,8 +31,8 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for Texas Instruments TMP401, TMP411, -TMP431, and TMP432 chips. These chips implement one or two remote and -one local temperature sensors. Temperature is measured in degrees +TMP431, TMP432 and TMP435 chips. These chips implement one or two remote +and one local temperature sensors. Temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Resolution of the remote sensor is 0.0625 degree. Local sensor resolution can be set to 0.5, 0.25, 0.125 or 0.0625 degree (not supported by the driver so far, so using the default resolution of 0.5 diff --git a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt index e1ae127ed099..1ec0db7879d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/elantech.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/elantech.txt @@ -38,22 +38,38 @@ Contents 7.2.1 Status packet 7.2.2 Head packet 7.2.3 Motion packet + 8. Trackpoint (for Hardware version 3 and 4) + 8.1 Registers + 8.2 Native relative mode 6 byte packet format + 8.2.1 Status Packet 1. Introduction ~~~~~~~~~~~~ -Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver is aware of two different -hardware versions unimaginatively called version 1 and version 2. Version 1 -is found in "older" laptops and uses 4 bytes per packet. Version 2 seems to -be introduced with the EeePC and uses 6 bytes per packet, and provides -additional features such as position of two fingers, and width of the touch. +Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver is aware of four different +hardware versions unimaginatively called version 1,version 2, version 3 +and version 4. Version 1 is found in "older" laptops and uses 4 bytes per +packet. Version 2 seems to be introduced with the EeePC and uses 6 bytes +per packet, and provides additional features such as position of two fingers, +and width of the touch. Hardware version 3 uses 6 bytes per packet (and +for 2 fingers the concatenation of two 6 bytes packets) and allows tracking +of up to 3 fingers. Hardware version 4 uses 6 bytes per packet, and can +combine a status packet with multiple head or motion packets. Hardware version +4 allows tracking up to 5 fingers. + +Some Hardware version 3 and version 4 also have a trackpoint which uses a +separate packet format. It is also 6 bytes per packet. The driver tries to support both hardware versions and should be compatible with the Xorg Synaptics touchpad driver and its graphical configuration utilities. +Note that a mouse button is also associated with either the touchpad or the +trackpoint when a trackpoint is available. Disabling the Touchpad in xorg +(TouchPadOff=0) will also disable the buttons associated with the touchpad. + Additionally the operation of the touchpad can be altered by adjusting the contents of some of its internal registers. These registers are represented by the driver as sysfs entries under /sys/bus/serio/drivers/psmouse/serio? @@ -78,7 +94,7 @@ completeness sake. 2. Extra knobs ~~~~~~~~~~~ -Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver provides two extra knobs under +Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver provides three extra knobs under /sys/bus/serio/drivers/psmouse/serio? for the user. * debug @@ -112,6 +128,20 @@ Currently the Linux Elantech touchpad driver provides two extra knobs under data consistency checking can be done. For now checking is disabled by default. Currently even turning it on will do nothing. +* crc_enabled + + Sets crc_enabled to 0/1. The name "crc_enabled" is the official name of + this integrity check, even though it is not an actual cyclic redundancy + check. + + Depending on the state of crc_enabled, certain basic data integrity + verification is done by the driver on hardware version 3 and 4. The + driver will reject any packet that appears corrupted. Using this knob, + The state of crc_enabled can be altered with this knob. + + Reading the crc_enabled value will show the active value. Echoing + "0" or "1" to this file will set the state to "0" or "1". + ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// 3. Differentiating hardware versions @@ -746,3 +776,42 @@ byte 5: byte 0 ~ 2 for one finger byte 3 ~ 5 for another + + +8. Trackpoint (for Hardware version 3 and 4) + ========================================= +8.1 Registers + ~~~~~~~~~ +No special registers have been identified. + +8.2 Native relative mode 6 byte packet format + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +8.2.1 Status Packet + ~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +byte 0: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + 0 0 sx sy 0 M R L +byte 1: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + ~sx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +byte 2: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + ~sy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 +byte 3: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + 0 0 ~sy ~sx 0 1 1 0 +byte 4: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + x7 x6 x5 x4 x3 x2 x1 x0 +byte 5: + bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 + y7 y6 y5 y4 y3 y2 y1 y0 + + + x and y are written in two's complement spread + over 9 bits with sx/sy the relative top bit and + x7..x0 and y7..y0 the lower bits. + ~sx is the inverse of sx, ~sy is the inverse of sy. + The sign of y is opposite to what the input driver + expects for a relative movement diff --git a/Documentation/input/xpad.txt b/Documentation/input/xpad.txt index 7cc9a436e6a1..d1b23f295db4 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/xpad.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/xpad.txt @@ -1,18 +1,22 @@ -xpad - Linux USB driver for X-Box gamepads +xpad - Linux USB driver for Xbox compatible controllers -This is the very first release of a driver for X-Box gamepads. -Basically, this was hacked away in just a few hours, so don't expect -miracles. +This driver exposes all first-party and third-party Xbox compatible +controllers. It has a long history and has enjoyed considerable usage +as Window's xinput library caused most PC games to focus on Xbox +controller compatibility. -In particular, there is currently NO support for the rumble pack. -You won't find many ff-aware linux applications anyway. +Due to backwards compatibility all buttons are reported as digital. +This only effects Original Xbox controllers. All later controller models +have only digital face buttons. + +Rumble is supported on some models of Xbox 360 controllers but not of +Original Xbox controllers nor on Xbox One controllers. As of writing +the Xbox One's rumble protocol has not been reverse engineered but in +the future could be supported. 0. Notes -------- - -Driver updated for kernel 2.6.17.11. (Based on a patch for 2.6.11.4.) - The number of buttons/axes reported varies based on 3 things: - if you are using a known controller - if you are using a known dance pad @@ -20,12 +24,16 @@ The number of buttons/axes reported varies based on 3 things: module configuration for "Map D-PAD to buttons rather than axes for unknown pads" (module option dpad_to_buttons) -If you set dpad_to_buttons to 0 and you are using an unknown device (one -not listed below), the driver will map the directional pad to axes (X/Y), -if you said N it will map the d-pad to buttons, which is needed for dance -style games to function correctly. The default is Y. +If you set dpad_to_buttons to N and you are using an unknown device +the driver will map the directional pad to axes (X/Y). +If you said Y it will map the d-pad to buttons, which is needed for dance +style games to function correctly. The default is Y. + +dpad_to_buttons has no effect for known pads. A erroneous commit message +claimed dpad_to_buttons could be used to force behavior on known devices. +This is not true. Both dpad_to_buttons and triggers_to_buttons only affect +unknown controllers. -dpad_to_buttons has no effect for known pads. 0.1 Normal Controllers ---------------------- @@ -80,17 +88,29 @@ to the list of supported devices, ensuring that it will work out of the box in the future. -1. USB adapter +1. USB adapters -------------- +All generations of Xbox controllers speak USB over the wire. +- Original Xbox controllers use a proprietary connector and require adapters. +- Wireless Xbox 360 controllers require a 'Xbox 360 Wireless Gaming Receiver + for Windows' +- Wired Xbox 360 controllers use standard USB connectors. +- Xbox One controllers can be wireless but speak Wi-Fi Direct and are not + yet supported. +- Xbox One controllers can be wired and use standard Micro-USB connectors. + -Before you can actually use the driver, you need to get yourself an -adapter cable to connect the X-Box controller to your Linux-Box. You -can buy these online fairly cheap, or build your own. + +1.1 Original Xbox USB adapters +-------------- +Using this driver with an Original Xbox controller requires an +adapter cable to break out the proprietary connector's pins to USB. +You can buy these online fairly cheap, or build your own. Such a cable is pretty easy to build. The Controller itself is a USB compound device (a hub with three ports for two expansion slots and the controller device) with the only difference in a nonstandard connector -(5 pins vs. 4 on standard USB connector). +(5 pins vs. 4 on standard USB 1.0 connectors). You just need to solder a USB connector onto the cable and keep the yellow wire unconnected. The other pins have the same order on both @@ -102,26 +122,41 @@ original one. You can buy an extension cable and cut that instead. That way, you can still use the controller with your X-Box, if you have one ;) + 2. Driver Installation ---------------------- -Once you have the adapter cable and the controller is connected, you need -to load your USB subsystem and should cat /proc/bus/usb/devices. -There should be an entry like the one at the end [4]. +Once you have the adapter cable, if needed, and the controller connected +the xpad module should be auto loaded. To confirm you can cat +/proc/bus/usb/devices. There should be an entry like the one at the end [4]. + + -Currently (as of version 0.0.6), the following devices are included: - original Microsoft XBOX controller (US), vendor=0x045e, product=0x0202 - smaller Microsoft XBOX controller (US), vendor=0x045e, product=0x0289 +3. Supported Controllers +------------------------ +For a full list of supported controllers and associated vendor and product +IDs see the xpad_device[] array[6]. + +As of the historic version 0.0.6 (2006-10-10) the following devices +were supported: + original Microsoft XBOX controller (US), vendor=0x045e, product=0x0202 + smaller Microsoft XBOX controller (US), vendor=0x045e, product=0x0289 original Microsoft XBOX controller (Japan), vendor=0x045e, product=0x0285 - InterAct PowerPad Pro (Germany), vendor=0x05fd, product=0x107a - RedOctane Xbox Dance Pad (US), vendor=0x0c12, product=0x8809 + InterAct PowerPad Pro (Germany), vendor=0x05fd, product=0x107a + RedOctane Xbox Dance Pad (US), vendor=0x0c12, product=0x8809 + +Unrecognized models of Xbox controllers should function as Generic +Xbox controllers. Unrecognized Dance Pad controllers require setting +the module option 'dpad_to_buttons'. + +If you have an unrecognized controller please see 0.3 - Unknown Controllers -The driver should work with xbox pads not listed above as well, however -you will need to do something extra for dance pads to work. -If you have a controller not listed above, see 0.3 - Unknown Controllers +4. Manual Testing +----------------- +To test this driver's functionality you may use 'jstest'. -If you compiled and installed the driver, test the functionality: +For example: > modprobe xpad > modprobe joydev > jstest /dev/js0 @@ -134,7 +169,8 @@ show 20 inputs (6 axes, 14 buttons). It works? Voila, you're done ;) -3. Thanks + +5. Thanks --------- I have to thank ITO Takayuki for the detailed info on his site @@ -145,14 +181,14 @@ His useful info and both the usb-skeleton as well as the iforce input driver the basic functionality. -4. References -------------- -1. http://euc.jp/periphs/xbox-controller.ja.html (ITO Takayuki) -2. http://xpad.xbox-scene.com/ -3. http://www.markosweb.com/www/xboxhackz.com/ +6. References +------------- -4. /proc/bus/usb/devices - dump from InterAct PowerPad Pro (Germany): +[1]: http://euc.jp/periphs/xbox-controller.ja.html (ITO Takayuki) +[2]: http://xpad.xbox-scene.com/ +[3]: http://www.markosweb.com/www/xboxhackz.com/ +[4]: /proc/bus/usb/devices - dump from InterAct PowerPad Pro (Germany): T: Bus=01 Lev=03 Prnt=04 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 D: Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=32 #Cfgs= 1 @@ -162,7 +198,7 @@ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=58(unk. ) Sub=42 Prot=00 Driver=(none) E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 32 Ivl= 10ms E: Ad=02(O) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 32 Ivl= 10ms -5. /proc/bus/usb/devices - dump from Redoctane Xbox Dance Pad (US): +[5]: /proc/bus/usb/devices - dump from Redoctane Xbox Dance Pad (US): T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=09 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 10 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 D: Ver= 1.10 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 @@ -173,7 +209,12 @@ I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=58(unk. ) Sub=42 Prot=00 Driver=xpad E: Ad=82(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 32 Ivl=4ms E: Ad=02(O) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 32 Ivl=4ms --- +[6]: http://lxr.free-electrons.com/ident?i=xpad_device + + + +7. Historic Edits +----------------- Marko Friedemann <mfr@bmx-chemnitz.de> 2002-07-16 - original doc @@ -181,3 +222,5 @@ Marko Friedemann <mfr@bmx-chemnitz.de> Dominic Cerquetti <binary1230@yahoo.com> 2005-03-19 - added stuff for dance pads, new d-pad->axes mappings + +Later changes may be viewed with 'git log Documentation/input/xpad.txt' diff --git a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt index 6c0b9f27e465..bc4bd5a44b88 100644 --- a/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt +++ b/Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt @@ -471,6 +471,13 @@ format. Crash is available on Dave Anderson's site at the following URL: http://people.redhat.com/~anderson/ +Trigger Kdump on WARN() +======================= + +The kernel parameter, panic_on_warn, calls panic() in all WARN() paths. This +will cause a kdump to occur at the panic() call. In cases where a user wants +to specify this during runtime, /proc/sys/kernel/panic_on_warn can be set to 1 +to achieve the same behaviour. Contact ======= diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 7dbe5ec9d9cd..43ecdcd39df2 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -1015,10 +1015,14 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. Format: {"off" | "on" | "skip[mbr]"} efi= [EFI] - Format: { "old_map" } + Format: { "old_map", "nochunk", "noruntime" } old_map [X86-64]: switch to the old ioremap-based EFI runtime services mapping. 32-bit still uses this one by default. + nochunk: disable reading files in "chunks" in the EFI + boot stub, as chunking can cause problems with some + firmware implementations. + noruntime : disable EFI runtime services support efi_no_storage_paranoia [EFI; X86] Using this parameter you can use more than 50% of @@ -1260,7 +1264,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. i8042.noloop [HW] Disable the AUX Loopback command while probing for the AUX port i8042.nomux [HW] Don't check presence of an active multiplexing - controller. Default: true. + controller i8042.nopnp [HW] Don't use ACPIPnP / PnPBIOS to discover KBD/AUX controllers i8042.notimeout [HW] Ignore timeout condition signalled by controller @@ -1303,6 +1307,18 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. .cdrom .chs .ignore_cable are additional options See Documentation/ide/ide.txt. + ide-generic.probe-mask= [HW] (E)IDE subsystem + Format: <int> + Probe mask for legacy ISA IDE ports. Depending on + platform up to 6 ports are supported, enabled by + setting corresponding bits in the mask to 1. The + default value is 0x0, which has a special meaning. + On systems that have PCI, it triggers scanning the + PCI bus for the first and the second port, which + are then probed. On systems without PCI the value + of 0x0 enables probing the two first ports as if it + was 0x3. + ide-pci-generic.all-generic-ide [HW] (E)IDE subsystem Claim all unknown PCI IDE storage controllers. @@ -1430,6 +1446,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. disable Do not enable intel_pstate as the default scaling driver for the supported processors + no_hwp + Do not enable hardware P state control (HWP) + if available. intremap= [X86-64, Intel-IOMMU] on enable Interrupt Remapping (default) @@ -1583,6 +1602,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. kmemleak= [KNL] Boot-time kmemleak enable/disable Valid arguments: on, off Default: on + Built with CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_DEFAULT_OFF=y, + the default is off. kmemcheck= [X86] Boot-time kmemcheck enable/disable/one-shot mode Valid arguments: 0, 1, 2 @@ -2232,7 +2253,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. nodsp [SH] Disable hardware DSP at boot time. - noefi [X86] Disable EFI runtime services support. + noefi Disable EFI runtime services support. noexec [IA-64] @@ -2491,6 +2512,9 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. timeout < 0: reboot immediately Format: <timeout> + panic_on_warn panic() instead of WARN(). Useful to cause kdump + on a WARN(). + crash_kexec_post_notifiers Run kdump after running panic-notifiers and dumping kmsg. This only for the users who doubt kdump always @@ -2922,6 +2946,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. quiescent states. Units are jiffies, minimum value is one, and maximum value is HZ. + rcutree.kthread_prio= [KNL,BOOT] + Set the SCHED_FIFO priority of the RCU + per-CPU kthreads (rcuc/N). This value is also + used for the priority of the RCU boost threads + (rcub/N). Valid values are 1-99 and the default + is 1 (the least-favored priority). + rcutree.rcu_nocb_leader_stride= [KNL] Set the number of NOCB kthread groups, which defaults to the square root of the number of @@ -3071,6 +3102,15 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. messages. Disable with a value less than or equal to zero. + rcupdate.rcu_self_test= [KNL] + Run the RCU early boot self tests + + rcupdate.rcu_self_test_bh= [KNL] + Run the RCU bh early boot self tests + + rcupdate.rcu_self_test_sched= [KNL] + Run the RCU sched early boot self tests + rdinit= [KNL] Format: <full_path> Run specified binary instead of /init from the ramdisk, @@ -3394,6 +3434,13 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. neutralize any effect of /proc/sys/kernel/sysrq. Useful for debugging. + tcpmhash_entries= [KNL,NET] + Set the number of tcp_metrics_hash slots. + Default value is 8192 or 16384 depending on total + ram pages. This is used to specify the TCP metrics + cache size. See Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt + "tcp_no_metrics_save" section for more details. + tdfx= [HW,DRM] test_suspend= [SUSPEND][,N] @@ -3465,6 +3512,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. e.g. base its process migration decisions on it. Default is on. + topology_updates= [KNL, PPC, NUMA] + Format: {off} + Specify if the kernel should ignore (off) + topology updates sent by the hypervisor to this + LPAR. + tp720= [HW,PS2] tpm_suspend_pcr=[HW,TPM] @@ -3477,7 +3530,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. are saved. trace_buf_size=nn[KMG] - [FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size. + [FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size on each cpu. trace_event=[event-list] [FTRACE] Set and start specified trace events in order @@ -3597,7 +3650,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. usb-storage.delay_use= [UMS] The delay in seconds before a new device is - scanned for Logical Units (default 5). + scanned for Logical Units (default 1). usb-storage.quirks= [UMS] A list of quirks entries to supplement or diff --git a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt index f4f033c8d856..45e777f4e41d 100644 --- a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt +++ b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt @@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ Memory may be allocated or freed before kmemleak is initialised and these actions are stored in an early log buffer. The size of this buffer is configured via the CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_EARLY_LOG_SIZE option. +If CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_DEFAULT_OFF are enabled, the kmemleak is +disabled by default. Passing "kmemleak=on" on the kernel command +line enables the function. + Basic Algorithm --------------- diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt index f87241dfed87..1be59a3a521c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kobject.txt +++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ This should be done only after any attributes or children of the kobject have been initialized properly, as userspace will instantly start to look for them when this call happens. -When the kobject is removed from the kernel (details on how to do that is +When the kobject is removed from the kernel (details on how to do that are below), the uevent for KOBJ_REMOVE will be automatically created by the kobject core, so the caller does not have to worry about doing that by hand. diff --git a/Documentation/kselftest.txt b/Documentation/kselftest.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a87d840bacfe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kselftest.txt @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +Linux Kernel Selftests + +The kernel contains a set of "self tests" under the tools/testing/selftests/ +directory. These are intended to be small unit tests to exercise individual +code paths in the kernel. + +On some systems, hot-plug tests could hang forever waiting for cpu and +memory to be ready to be offlined. A special hot-plug target is created +to run full range of hot-plug tests. In default mode, hot-plug tests run +in safe mode with a limited scope. In limited mode, cpu-hotplug test is +run on a single cpu as opposed to all hotplug capable cpus, and memory +hotplug test is run on 2% of hotplug capable memory instead of 10%. + +Running the selftests (hotplug tests are run in limited mode) +============================================================= + +To build the tests: + $ make -C tools/testing/selftests + + +To run the tests: + $ make -C tools/testing/selftests run_tests + +To build and run the tests with a single command, use: + $ make kselftest + +- note that some tests will require root privileges. + + +Running a subset of selftests +======================================== +You can use the "TARGETS" variable on the make command line to specify +single test to run, or a list of tests to run. + +To run only tests targeted for a single subsystem: + $ make -C tools/testing/selftests TARGETS=ptrace run_tests + +You can specify multiple tests to build and run: + $ make TARGETS="size timers" kselftest + +See the top-level tools/testing/selftests/Makefile for the list of all +possible targets. + + +Running the full range hotplug selftests +======================================== + +To build the hotplug tests: + $ make -C tools/testing/selftests hotplug + +To run the hotplug tests: + $ make -C tools/testing/selftests run_hotplug + +- note that some tests will require root privileges. + + +Contributing new tests +====================== + +In general, the rules for for selftests are + + * Do as much as you can if you're not root; + + * Don't take too long; + + * Don't break the build on any architecture, and + + * Don't cause the top-level "make run_tests" to fail if your feature is + unconfigured. diff --git a/Documentation/locking/lglock.txt b/Documentation/locking/lglock.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a6971e34fabe --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/locking/lglock.txt @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +lglock - local/global locks for mostly local access patterns +------------------------------------------------------------ + +Origin: Nick Piggin's VFS scalability series introduced during + 2.6.35++ [1] [2] +Location: kernel/locking/lglock.c + include/linux/lglock.h +Users: currently only the VFS and stop_machine related code + +Design Goal: +------------ + +Improve scalability of globally used large data sets that are +distributed over all CPUs as per_cpu elements. + +To manage global data structures that are partitioned over all CPUs +as per_cpu elements but can be mostly handled by CPU local actions +lglock will be used where the majority of accesses are cpu local +reading and occasional cpu local writing with very infrequent +global write access. + + +* deal with things locally whenever possible + - very fast access to the local per_cpu data + - reasonably fast access to specific per_cpu data on a different + CPU +* while making global action possible when needed + - by expensive access to all CPUs locks - effectively + resulting in a globally visible critical section. + +Design: +------- + +Basically it is an array of per_cpu spinlocks with the +lg_local_lock/unlock accessing the local CPUs lock object and the +lg_local_lock_cpu/unlock_cpu accessing a remote CPUs lock object +the lg_local_lock has to disable preemption as migration protection so +that the reference to the local CPUs lock does not go out of scope. +Due to the lg_local_lock/unlock only touching cpu-local resources it +is fast. Taking the local lock on a different CPU will be more +expensive but still relatively cheap. + +One can relax the migration constraints by acquiring the current +CPUs lock with lg_local_lock_cpu, remember the cpu, and release that +lock at the end of the critical section even if migrated. This should +give most of the performance benefits without inhibiting migration +though needs careful considerations for nesting of lglocks and +consideration of deadlocks with lg_global_lock. + +The lg_global_lock/unlock locks all underlying spinlocks of all +possible CPUs (including those off-line). The preemption disable/enable +are needed in the non-RT kernels to prevent deadlocks like: + + on cpu 1 + + task A task B + lg_global_lock + got cpu 0 lock + <<<< preempt <<<< + lg_local_lock_cpu for cpu 0 + spin on cpu 0 lock + +On -RT this deadlock scenario is resolved by the arch_spin_locks in the +lglocks being replaced by rt_mutexes which resolve the above deadlock +by boosting the lock-holder. + + +Implementation: +--------------- + +The initial lglock implementation from Nick Piggin used some complex +macros to generate the lglock/brlock in lglock.h - they were later +turned into a set of functions by Andi Kleen [7]. The change to functions +was motivated by the presence of multiple lock users and also by them +being easier to maintain than the generating macros. This change to +functions is also the basis to eliminated the restriction of not +being initializeable in kernel modules (the remaining problem is that +locks are not explicitly initialized - see lockdep-design.txt) + +Declaration and initialization: +------------------------------- + + #include <linux/lglock.h> + + DEFINE_LGLOCK(name) + or: + DEFINE_STATIC_LGLOCK(name); + + lg_lock_init(&name, "lockdep_name_string"); + + on UP this is mapped to DEFINE_SPINLOCK(name) in both cases, note + also that as of 3.18-rc6 all declaration in use are of the _STATIC_ + variant (and it seems that the non-static was never in use). + lg_lock_init is initializing the lockdep map only. + +Usage: +------ + +From the locking semantics it is a spinlock. It could be called a +locality aware spinlock. lg_local_* behaves like a per_cpu +spinlock and lg_global_* like a global spinlock. +No surprises in the API. + + lg_local_lock(*lglock); + access to protected per_cpu object on this CPU + lg_local_unlock(*lglock); + + lg_local_lock_cpu(*lglock, cpu); + access to protected per_cpu object on other CPU cpu + lg_local_unlock_cpu(*lglock, cpu); + + lg_global_lock(*lglock); + access all protected per_cpu objects on all CPUs + lg_global_unlock(*lglock); + + There are no _trylock variants of the lglocks. + +Note that the lg_global_lock/unlock has to iterate over all possible +CPUs rather than the actually present CPUs or a CPU could go off-line +with a held lock [4] and that makes it very expensive. A discussion on +these issues can be found at [5] + +Constraints: +------------ + + * currently the declaration of lglocks in kernel modules is not + possible, though this should be doable with little change. + * lglocks are not recursive. + * suitable for code that can do most operations on the CPU local + data and will very rarely need the global lock + * lg_global_lock/unlock is *very* expensive and does not scale + * on UP systems all lg_* primitives are simply spinlocks + * in PREEMPT_RT the spinlock becomes an rt-mutex and can sleep but + does not change the tasks state while sleeping [6]. + * in PREEMPT_RT the preempt_disable/enable in lg_local_lock/unlock + is downgraded to a migrate_disable/enable, the other + preempt_disable/enable are downgraded to barriers [6]. + The deadlock noted for non-RT above is resolved due to rt_mutexes + boosting the lock-holder in this case which arch_spin_locks do + not do. + +lglocks were designed for very specific problems in the VFS and probably +only are the right answer in these corner cases. Any new user that looks +at lglocks probably wants to look at the seqlock and RCU alternatives as +her first choice. There are also efforts to resolve the RCU issues that +currently prevent using RCU in place of view remaining lglocks. + +Note on brlock history: +----------------------- + +The 'Big Reader' read-write spinlocks were originally introduced by +Ingo Molnar in 2000 (2.4/2.5 kernel series) and removed in 2003. They +later were introduced by the VFS scalability patch set in 2.6 series +again as the "big reader lock" brlock [2] variant of lglock which has +been replaced by seqlock primitives or by RCU based primitives in the +3.13 kernel series as was suggested in [3] in 2003. The brlock was +entirely removed in the 3.13 kernel series. + +Link: 1 http://lkml.org/lkml/2010/8/2/81 +Link: 2 http://lwn.net/Articles/401738/ +Link: 3 http://lkml.org/lkml/2003/3/9/205 +Link: 4 https://lkml.org/lkml/2011/8/24/185 +Link: 5 http://lkml.org/lkml/2011/12/18/189 +Link: 6 https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/projects/rt/ + patch series - lglocks-rt.patch.patch +Link: 7 http://lkml.org/lkml/2012/3/5/26 diff --git a/Documentation/mailbox.txt b/Documentation/mailbox.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1092ad9578da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/mailbox.txt @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + The Common Mailbox Framework + Jassi Brar <jaswinder.singh@linaro.org> + + This document aims to help developers write client and controller +drivers for the API. But before we start, let us note that the +client (especially) and controller drivers are likely going to be +very platform specific because the remote firmware is likely to be +proprietary and implement non-standard protocol. So even if two +platforms employ, say, PL320 controller, the client drivers can't +be shared across them. Even the PL320 driver might need to accommodate +some platform specific quirks. So the API is meant mainly to avoid +similar copies of code written for each platform. Having said that, +nothing prevents the remote f/w to also be Linux based and use the +same api there. However none of that helps us locally because we only +ever deal at client's protocol level. + Some of the choices made during implementation are the result of this +peculiarity of this "common" framework. + + + + Part 1 - Controller Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_controller.h) + + Allocate mbox_controller and the array of mbox_chan. +Populate mbox_chan_ops, except peek_data() all are mandatory. +The controller driver might know a message has been consumed +by the remote by getting an IRQ or polling some hardware flag +or it can never know (the client knows by way of the protocol). +The method in order of preference is IRQ -> Poll -> None, which +the controller driver should set via 'txdone_irq' or 'txdone_poll' +or neither. + + + Part 2 - Client Driver (See include/linux/mailbox_client.h) + + The client might want to operate in blocking mode (synchronously +send a message through before returning) or non-blocking/async mode (submit +a message and a callback function to the API and return immediately). + + +struct demo_client { + struct mbox_client cl; + struct mbox_chan *mbox; + struct completion c; + bool async; + /* ... */ +}; + +/* + * This is the handler for data received from remote. The behaviour is purely + * dependent upon the protocol. This is just an example. + */ +static void message_from_remote(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg) +{ + struct demo_client *dc = container_of(mbox_client, + struct demo_client, cl); + if (dc->async) { + if (is_an_ack(mssg)) { + /* An ACK to our last sample sent */ + return; /* Or do something else here */ + } else { /* A new message from remote */ + queue_req(mssg); + } + } else { + /* Remote f/w sends only ACK packets on this channel */ + return; + } +} + +static void sample_sent(struct mbox_client *cl, void *mssg, int r) +{ + struct demo_client *dc = container_of(mbox_client, + struct demo_client, cl); + complete(&dc->c); +} + +static void client_demo(struct platform_device *pdev) +{ + struct demo_client *dc_sync, *dc_async; + /* The controller already knows async_pkt and sync_pkt */ + struct async_pkt ap; + struct sync_pkt sp; + + dc_sync = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_sync), GFP_KERNEL); + dc_async = kzalloc(sizeof(*dc_async), GFP_KERNEL); + + /* Populate non-blocking mode client */ + dc_async->cl.dev = &pdev->dev; + dc_async->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote; + dc_async->cl.tx_done = sample_sent; + dc_async->cl.tx_block = false; + dc_async->cl.tx_tout = 0; /* doesn't matter here */ + dc_async->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */ + dc_async->async = true; + init_completion(&dc_async->c); + + /* Populate blocking mode client */ + dc_sync->cl.dev = &pdev->dev; + dc_sync->cl.rx_callback = message_from_remote; + dc_sync->cl.tx_done = NULL; /* operate in blocking mode */ + dc_sync->cl.tx_block = true; + dc_sync->cl.tx_tout = 500; /* by half a second */ + dc_sync->cl.knows_txdone = false; /* depending upon protocol */ + dc_sync->async = false; + + /* ASync mailbox is listed second in 'mboxes' property */ + dc_async->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_async->cl, 1); + /* Populate data packet */ + /* ap.xxx = 123; etc */ + /* Send async message to remote */ + mbox_send_message(dc_async->mbox, &ap); + + /* Sync mailbox is listed first in 'mboxes' property */ + dc_sync->mbox = mbox_request_channel(&dc_sync->cl, 0); + /* Populate data packet */ + /* sp.abc = 123; etc */ + /* Send message to remote in blocking mode */ + mbox_send_message(dc_sync->mbox, &sp); + /* At this point 'sp' has been sent */ + + /* Now wait for async chan to be done */ + wait_for_completion(&dc_async->c); +} diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt index 22a969cdd476..7ee2ae6d5451 100644 --- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt @@ -121,22 +121,22 @@ For example, consider the following sequence of events: The set of accesses as seen by the memory system in the middle can be arranged in 24 different combinations: - STORE A=3, STORE B=4, x=LOAD A->3, y=LOAD B->4 - STORE A=3, STORE B=4, y=LOAD B->4, x=LOAD A->3 - STORE A=3, x=LOAD A->3, STORE B=4, y=LOAD B->4 - STORE A=3, x=LOAD A->3, y=LOAD B->2, STORE B=4 - STORE A=3, y=LOAD B->2, STORE B=4, x=LOAD A->3 - STORE A=3, y=LOAD B->2, x=LOAD A->3, STORE B=4 - STORE B=4, STORE A=3, x=LOAD A->3, y=LOAD B->4 + STORE A=3, STORE B=4, y=LOAD A->3, x=LOAD B->4 + STORE A=3, STORE B=4, x=LOAD B->4, y=LOAD A->3 + STORE A=3, y=LOAD A->3, STORE B=4, x=LOAD B->4 + STORE A=3, y=LOAD A->3, x=LOAD B->2, STORE B=4 + STORE A=3, x=LOAD B->2, STORE B=4, y=LOAD A->3 + STORE A=3, x=LOAD B->2, y=LOAD A->3, STORE B=4 + STORE B=4, STORE A=3, y=LOAD A->3, x=LOAD B->4 STORE B=4, ... ... and can thus result in four different combinations of values: - x == 1, y == 2 - x == 1, y == 4 - x == 3, y == 2 - x == 3, y == 4 + x == 2, y == 1 + x == 2, y == 3 + x == 4, y == 1 + x == 4, y == 3 Furthermore, the stores committed by a CPU to the memory system may not be @@ -694,6 +694,24 @@ Please note once again that the stores to 'b' differ. If they were identical, as noted earlier, the compiler could pull this store outside of the 'if' statement. +You must also be careful not to rely too much on boolean short-circuit +evaluation. Consider this example: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + if (a || 1 > 0) + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 1; + +Because the second condition is always true, the compiler can transform +this example as following, defeating control dependency: + + q = ACCESS_ONCE(a); + ACCESS_ONCE(b) = 1; + +This example underscores the need to ensure that the compiler cannot +out-guess your code. More generally, although ACCESS_ONCE() does force +the compiler to actually emit code for a given load, it does not force +the compiler to use the results. + Finally, control dependencies do -not- provide transitivity. This is demonstrated by two related examples, with the initial values of x and y both being zero: @@ -2465,10 +2483,15 @@ functions: Please refer to the PCI specification for more information on interactions between PCI transactions. - (*) readX_relaxed() + (*) readX_relaxed(), writeX_relaxed() - These are similar to readX(), but are not guaranteed to be ordered in any - way. Be aware that there is no I/O read barrier available. + These are similar to readX() and writeX(), but provide weaker memory + ordering guarantees. Specifically, they do not guarantee ordering with + respect to normal memory accesses (e.g. DMA buffers) nor do they guarantee + ordering with respect to LOCK or UNLOCK operations. If the latter is + required, an mmiowb() barrier can be used. Note that relaxed accesses to + the same peripheral are guaranteed to be ordered with respect to each + other. (*) ioreadX(), iowriteX() diff --git a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile index 0f3156888048..f47fe6ba7300 100644 --- a/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/mic/mpssd/Makefile @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ # List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := mpssd +hostprogs-$(CONFIG_X86_64) := mpssd mpssd-objs := mpssd.o sysfs.o diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index eeb5b2e97bed..83bf4986baea 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -2230,11 +2230,8 @@ balance-rr: This mode is the only mode that will permit a single It is possible to adjust TCP/IP's congestion limits by altering the net.ipv4.tcp_reordering sysctl parameter. The - usual default value is 3, and the maximum useful value is 127. - For a four interface balance-rr bond, expect that a single - TCP/IP stream will utilize no more than approximately 2.3 - interface's worth of throughput, even after adjusting - tcp_reordering. + usual default value is 3. But keep in mind TCP stack is able + to automatically increase this when it detects reorders. Note that the fraction of packets that will be delivered out of order is highly variable, and is unlikely to be zero. The level diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index 0307e2875f21..9bffdfc648dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -56,6 +56,13 @@ ip_forward_use_pmtu - BOOLEAN 0 - disabled 1 - enabled +fwmark_reflect - BOOLEAN + Controls the fwmark of kernel-generated IPv4 reply packets that are not + associated with a socket for example, TCP RSTs or ICMP echo replies). + If unset, these packets have a fwmark of zero. If set, they have the + fwmark of the packet they are replying to. + Default: 0 + route/max_size - INTEGER Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel. Increase this when using large numbers of interfaces and/or routes. @@ -376,9 +383,17 @@ tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER may consume significant resources. Cf. tcp_max_orphans. tcp_reordering - INTEGER - Maximal reordering of packets in a TCP stream. + Initial reordering level of packets in a TCP stream. + TCP stack can then dynamically adjust flow reordering level + between this initial value and tcp_max_reordering Default: 3 +tcp_max_reordering - INTEGER + Maximal reordering level of packets in a TCP stream. + 300 is a fairly conservative value, but you might increase it + if paths are using per packet load balancing (like bonding rr mode) + Default: 300 + tcp_retrans_collapse - BOOLEAN Bug-to-bug compatibility with some broken printers. On retransmit try to send bigger packets to work around bugs in @@ -1201,6 +1216,13 @@ conf/all/forwarding - BOOLEAN proxy_ndp - BOOLEAN Do proxy ndp. +fwmark_reflect - BOOLEAN + Controls the fwmark of kernel-generated IPv6 reply packets that are not + associated with a socket for example, TCP RSTs or ICMPv6 echo replies). + If unset, these packets have a fwmark of zero. If set, they have the + fwmark of the packet they are replying to. + Default: 0 + conf/interface/*: Change special settings per interface. @@ -1452,6 +1474,19 @@ suppress_frag_ndisc - INTEGER 1 - (default) discard fragmented neighbor discovery packets 0 - allow fragmented neighbor discovery packets +optimistic_dad - BOOLEAN + Whether to perform Optimistic Duplicate Address Detection (RFC 4429). + 0: disabled (default) + 1: enabled + +use_optimistic - BOOLEAN + If enabled, do not classify optimistic addresses as deprecated during + source address selection. Preferred addresses will still be chosen + before optimistic addresses, subject to other ranking in the source + address selection algorithm. + 0: disabled (default) + 1: enabled + icmp/*: ratelimit - INTEGER Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ipvlan.txt b/Documentation/networking/ipvlan.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cf996394e466 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ipvlan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + IPVLAN Driver HOWTO + +Initial Release: + Mahesh Bandewar <maheshb AT google.com> + +1. Introduction: + This is conceptually very similar to the macvlan driver with one major +exception of using L3 for mux-ing /demux-ing among slaves. This property makes +the master device share the L2 with it's slave devices. I have developed this +driver in conjuntion with network namespaces and not sure if there is use case +outside of it. + + +2. Building and Installation: + In order to build the driver, please select the config item CONFIG_IPVLAN. +The driver can be built into the kernel (CONFIG_IPVLAN=y) or as a module +(CONFIG_IPVLAN=m). + + +3. Configuration: + There are no module parameters for this driver and it can be configured +using IProute2/ip utility. + + ip link add link <master-dev> <slave-dev> type ipvlan mode { l2 | L3 } + + e.g. ip link add link ipvl0 eth0 type ipvlan mode l2 + + +4. Operating modes: + IPvlan has two modes of operation - L2 and L3. For a given master device, +you can select one of these two modes and all slaves on that master will +operate in the same (selected) mode. The RX mode is almost identical except +that in L3 mode the slaves wont receive any multicast / broadcast traffic. +L3 mode is more restrictive since routing is controlled from the other (mostly) +default namespace. + +4.1 L2 mode: + In this mode TX processing happens on the stack instance attached to the +slave device and packets are switched and queued to the master device to send +out. In this mode the slaves will RX/TX multicast and broadcast (if applicable) +as well. + +4.2 L3 mode: + In this mode TX processing upto L3 happens on the stack instance attached +to the slave device and packets are switched to the stack instance of the +master device for the L2 processing and routing from that instance will be +used before packets are queued on the outbound device. In this mode the slaves +will not receive nor can send multicast / broadcast traffic. + + +5. What to choose (macvlan vs. ipvlan)? + These two devices are very similar in many regards and the specific use +case could very well define which device to choose. if one of the following +situations defines your use case then you can choose to use ipvlan - + (a) The Linux host that is connected to the external switch / router has +policy configured that allows only one mac per port. + (b) No of virtual devices created on a master exceed the mac capacity and +puts the NIC in promiscous mode and degraded performance is a concern. + (c) If the slave device is to be put into the hostile / untrusted network +namespace where L2 on the slave could be changed / misused. + + +6. Example configuration: + + +=============================================================+ + | Host: host1 | + | | + | +----------------------+ +----------------------+ | + | | NS:ns0 | | NS:ns1 | | + | | | | | | + | | | | | | + | | ipvl0 | | ipvl1 | | + | +----------#-----------+ +-----------#----------+ | + | # # | + | ################################ | + | # eth0 | + +==============================#==============================+ + + + (a) Create two network namespaces - ns0, ns1 + ip netns add ns0 + ip netns add ns1 + + (b) Create two ipvlan slaves on eth0 (master device) + ip link add link eth0 ipvl0 type ipvlan mode l2 + ip link add link eth0 ipvl1 type ipvlan mode l2 + + (c) Assign slaves to the respective network namespaces + ip link set dev ipvl0 netns ns0 + ip link set dev ipvl1 netns ns1 + + (d) Now switch to the namespace (ns0 or ns1) to configure the slave devices + - For ns0 + (1) ip netns exec ns0 bash + (2) ip link set dev ipvl0 up + (3) ip link set dev lo up + (4) ip -4 addr add 127.0.0.1 dev lo + (5) ip -4 addr add $IPADDR dev ipvl0 + (6) ip -4 route add default via $ROUTER dev ipvl0 + - For ns1 + (1) ip netns exec ns1 bash + (2) ip link set dev ipvl1 up + (3) ip link set dev lo up + (4) ip -4 addr add 127.0.0.1 dev lo + (5) ip -4 addr add $IPADDR dev ipvl1 + (6) ip -4 route add default via $ROUTER dev ipvl1 diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt index 96cccebb839b..0ace6e776ac8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Other ethtool Commands: To enable Flow Director ethtool -K ethX ntuple on To add a filter - Use -U switch. e.g., ethtool -U ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 0x178000a + Use -U switch. e.g., ethtool -U ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 10.0.128.23 action 1 To see the list of filters currently present: ethtool -u ethX diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 2090895b08d4..e655e2453c98 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Synopsys Ethernet driver -Copyright (C) 2007-2013 STMicroelectronics Ltd +Copyright (C) 2007-2014 STMicroelectronics Ltd Author: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com> This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers (Synopsys IP blocks). -Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC +Currently this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC (i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XLINX XC2V3000 FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. @@ -22,6 +22,9 @@ The kernel configuration option is STMMAC_ETH: Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet (1000 Mbit) ---> STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Ethernet driver (STMMAC_ETH) +CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM: is to enable the platform driver. +CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI: is to enable the pci driver. + 2) Driver parameters list: debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all); phyaddr: to manually provide the physical address to the PHY device; @@ -45,10 +48,11 @@ Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using: The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine that there is a packet ready to be transmitted. -Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, an interrupt is -triggered; So the driver will be able to release the socket buffers. By default, the driver sets the NETIF_F_SG bit in the features field of the -net_device structure enabling the scatter/gather feature. +net_device structure enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is true on +chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware. +Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, napi will be +scheduled to release the transmit resources. 4.2) Receive process When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts @@ -58,20 +62,12 @@ This is based on NAPI so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work to be done, and it exits. Then the poll method will be scheduled at some future point. The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket -buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (Zero-copy). +buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy). 4.3) Interrupt Mitigation The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts using NAPI for the reception on chips older than the 3.50. New chips have an HW RX-Watchdog used for this mitigation. - -On Tx-side, the mitigation schema is based on a SW timer that calls the -tx function (stmmac_tx) to reclaim the resource after transmitting the -frames. -Also there is another parameter (like a threshold) used to program -the descriptors avoiding to set the interrupt on completion bit in -when the frame is sent (xmit). - Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool. 4.4) WOL @@ -79,7 +75,7 @@ Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the GMAC core. 4.5) DMA descriptors -Driver handles both normal and enhanced descriptors. The latter has been only +Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and later. STMMAC supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) @@ -91,9 +87,20 @@ In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in the list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, whereas such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. +4.5.1) Extended descriptors + The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload + when it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. + These are not available on GMAC Synopsys chips older than the 3.50. + At probe time the driver will decide if these can be actually used. + This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 because the extra descriptors + are used for saving the hardware timestamps and Extended Status. + 4.6) Ethtool support -Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using: -ethtool -S ethX command. It is possible to dump registers etc. +Ethtool is supported. + +For example, driver statistics (including RMON), internal errors can be taken +using: + # ethtool -S ethX command 4.7) Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. @@ -101,12 +108,11 @@ The GSO has been also added but it's performed in software. LRO is not supported. 4.8) Physical -The driver is compatible with PAL to work with PHY and GPHY devices. +The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with +PHY and GPHY devices. 4.9) Platform information -Several driver's information can be passed through the platform -These are included in the include/linux/stmmac.h header file -and detailed below as well: +Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree. struct plat_stmmacenet_data { char *phy_bus_name; @@ -125,15 +131,18 @@ struct plat_stmmacenet_data { int force_sf_dma_mode; int force_thresh_dma_mode; int riwt_off; + int max_speed; + int maxmtu; void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); void (*bus_setup)(void __iomem *ioaddr); void *(*setup)(struct platform_device *pdev); + void (*free)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); void *custom_cfg; void *custom_data; void *bsp_priv; - }; +}; Where: o phy_bus_name: phy bus name to attach to the stmmac. @@ -258,32 +267,43 @@ and the second one, with a real PHY device attached to the bus, by using the stmmac_mdio_bus_data structure (to provide the id, the reset procedure etc). -4.10) List of source files: - o Kconfig - o Makefile - o stmmac_main.c: main network device driver; - o stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions; - o stmmac_pci: PCI driver; - o stmmac_platform.c: platform driver - o stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support; - o stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts - (only tested on ST40 platforms based); +Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability +register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to +understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually +available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW +capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform. + +4.10) Device-tree support. + +Please see the following document: + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt + +and the stmmac_of_data structure inside the include/linux/stmmac.h header file. + +4.11) This is a summary of the content of some relevant files: + o stmmac_main.c: to implement the main network device driver; + o stmmac_mdio.c: to provide mdio functions; + o stmmac_pci: this the PCI driver; + o stmmac_platform.c: this the platform driver (OF supported) + o stmmac_ethtool.c: to implement the ethtool support; o stmmac.h: private driver structure; o common.h: common definitions and VFTs; o descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; - o dwmac1000_core.c: GMAC core functions; - o dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; - o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC; - o dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code; - o dwmac100_dma.c: dma functions for the MAC chip; + o dwmac1000_core.c: dwmac GiGa core functions; + o dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; + o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the dwmac GiGa; + o dwmac100_core: dwmac 100 core code; + o dwmac100_dma.c: dma functions for the dwmac 100 chip; o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; - o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips; + o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions; o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors; o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors; o chain_mode.c/ring_mode.c:: functions to manage RING/CHAINED modes; o mmc_core.c/mmc.h: Management MAC Counters; - o stmmac_hwtstamp.c: HW timestamp support for PTP - o stmmac_ptp.c: PTP 1588 clock + o stmmac_hwtstamp.c: HW timestamp support for PTP; + o stmmac_ptp.c: PTP 1588 clock; + o dwmac-<XXX>.c: these are for the platform glue-logic file; e.g. dwmac-sti.c + for STMicroelectronics SoCs. 5) Debug Information @@ -298,23 +318,14 @@ to get statistics: e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX (that shows the Management counters (MMC) if supported) or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX -Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS and enabling the -STMMAC_DEBUG_FS option the driver will export the following +Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS the driver will export the following debugfs entries: /sys/kernel/debug/stmmaceth/descriptors_status To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings -Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get -further debug information. - -In the end, there are other macros (that cannot be enabled -via menuconfig) to turn-on the RX/TX DMA debugging, -specific MAC core debug printk etc. Others to enable the -debug in the TX and RX processes. -All these are only useful during the developing stage -and should never enabled inside the code for general usage. -In fact, these can generate an huge amount of debug messages. +Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get further debug +information (please see: NETIF Msg Level). 6) Energy Efficient Ethernet @@ -337,15 +348,7 @@ To enter in Tx LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer that enable and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be transmitted. -7) Extended descriptors -The extended descriptors give us information about the receive Ethernet payload -when it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. -These are not available on GMAC Synopsys chips older than the 3.50. -At probe time the driver will decide if these can be actually used. -This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 because the extra descriptors 6 and 7 -are used for saving the hardware timestamps. - -8) Precision Time Protocol (PTP) +7) Precision Time Protocol (PTP) The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems implemented with technologies such as network @@ -355,7 +358,7 @@ In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002 Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features. IEEE 1588-2008 that can be enabled when configure the Kernel. -9) SGMII/RGMII supports +8) SGMII/RGMII supports New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. This information is available at run-time by looking at the HW capability register. This means that the stmmac can manage @@ -364,8 +367,3 @@ In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. Also thanks to these registers it is possible to look at the Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability. - -10) TODO: - o XGMAC is not supported. - o Complete the TBI & RTBI support. - o extend VLAN support for 3.70a SYNP GMAC. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f981a9295a39 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/switchdev.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +Switch (and switch-ish) device drivers HOWTO +=========================== + +Please note that the word "switch" is here used in very generic meaning. +This include devices supporting L2/L3 but also various flow offloading chips, +including switches embedded into SR-IOV NICs. + +Lets describe a topology a bit. Imagine the following example: + + +----------------------------+ +---------------+ + | SOME switch chip | | CPU | + +----------------------------+ +---------------+ + port1 port2 port3 port4 MNGMNT | PCI-E | + | | | | | +---------------+ + PHY PHY | | | | NIC0 NIC1 + | | | | | | + | | +- PCI-E -+ | | + | +------- MII -------+ | + +------------- MII ------------+ + +In this example, there are two independent lines between the switch silicon +and CPU. NIC0 and NIC1 drivers are not aware of a switch presence. They are +separate from the switch driver. SOME switch chip is by managed by a driver +via PCI-E device MNGMNT. Note that MNGMNT device, NIC0 and NIC1 may be +connected to some other type of bus. + +Now, for the previous example show the representation in kernel: + + +----------------------------+ +---------------+ + | SOME switch chip | | CPU | + +----------------------------+ +---------------+ + sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 MNGMNT | PCI-E | + | | | | | +---------------+ + PHY PHY | | | | eth0 eth1 + | | | | | | + | | +- PCI-E -+ | | + | +------- MII -------+ | + +------------- MII ------------+ + +Lets call the example switch driver for SOME switch chip "SOMEswitch". This +driver takes care of PCI-E device MNGMNT. There is a netdevice instance sw0pX +created for each port of a switch. These netdevices are instances +of "SOMEswitch" driver. sw0pX netdevices serve as a "representation" +of the switch chip. eth0 and eth1 are instances of some other existing driver. + +The only difference of the switch-port netdevice from the ordinary netdevice +is that is implements couple more NDOs: + + ndo_switch_parent_id_get - This returns the same ID for two port netdevices + of the same physical switch chip. This is + mandatory to be implemented by all switch drivers + and serves the caller for recognition of a port + netdevice. + ndo_switch_parent_* - Functions that serve for a manipulation of the switch + chip itself (it can be though of as a "parent" of the + port, therefore the name). They are not port-specific. + Caller might use arbitrary port netdevice of the same + switch and it will make no difference. + ndo_switch_port_* - Functions that serve for a port-specific manipulation. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt index 412f45ca2d73..a5c784c89312 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ SOF_TIMESTAMPING_RAW_HARDWARE: 1.3.3 Timestamp Options -The interface supports one option +The interface supports the options SOF_TIMESTAMPING_OPT_ID: @@ -130,19 +130,36 @@ SOF_TIMESTAMPING_OPT_ID: have multiple concurrent timestamping requests outstanding. Packets can be reordered in the transmit path, for instance in the packet scheduler. In that case timestamps will be queued onto the error - queue out of order from the original send() calls. This option - embeds a counter that is incremented at send() time, to order - timestamps within a flow. + queue out of order from the original send() calls. It is not always + possible to uniquely match timestamps to the original send() calls + based on timestamp order or payload inspection alone, then. + + This option associates each packet at send() with a unique + identifier and returns that along with the timestamp. The identifier + is derived from a per-socket u32 counter (that wraps). For datagram + sockets, the counter increments with each sent packet. For stream + sockets, it increments with every byte. + + The counter starts at zero. It is initialized the first time that + the socket option is enabled. It is reset each time the option is + enabled after having been disabled. Resetting the counter does not + change the identifiers of existing packets in the system. This option is implemented only for transmit timestamps. There, the timestamp is always looped along with a struct sock_extended_err. - The option modifies field ee_info to pass an id that is unique + The option modifies field ee_data to pass an id that is unique among all possibly concurrently outstanding timestamp requests for - that socket. In practice, it is a monotonically increasing u32 - (that wraps). + that socket. + + +SOF_TIMESTAMPING_OPT_CMSG: - In datagram sockets, the counter increments on each send call. In - stream sockets, it increments with every byte. + Support recv() cmsg for all timestamped packets. Control messages + are already supported unconditionally on all packets with receive + timestamps and on IPv6 packets with transmit timestamp. This option + extends them to IPv4 packets with transmit timestamp. One use case + is to correlate packets with their egress device, by enabling socket + option IP_PKTINFO simultaneously. 1.4 Bytestream Timestamps diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping/txtimestamp.c b/Documentation/networking/timestamping/txtimestamp.c index b32fc2a07734..876f71c5625a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping/txtimestamp.c +++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping/txtimestamp.c @@ -46,6 +46,7 @@ #include <netpacket/packet.h> #include <poll.h> #include <stdarg.h> +#include <stdbool.h> #include <stdint.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> @@ -58,6 +59,14 @@ #include <time.h> #include <unistd.h> +/* ugly hack to work around netinet/in.h and linux/ipv6.h conflicts */ +#ifndef in6_pktinfo +struct in6_pktinfo { + struct in6_addr ipi6_addr; + int ipi6_ifindex; +}; +#endif + /* command line parameters */ static int cfg_proto = SOCK_STREAM; static int cfg_ipproto = IPPROTO_TCP; @@ -65,6 +74,8 @@ static int cfg_num_pkts = 4; static int do_ipv4 = 1; static int do_ipv6 = 1; static int cfg_payload_len = 10; +static bool cfg_show_payload; +static bool cfg_do_pktinfo; static uint16_t dest_port = 9000; static struct sockaddr_in daddr; @@ -131,6 +142,30 @@ static void print_timestamp(struct scm_timestamping *tss, int tstype, __print_timestamp(tsname, &tss->ts[0], tskey, payload_len); } +/* TODO: convert to check_and_print payload once API is stable */ +static void print_payload(char *data, int len) +{ + int i; + + if (len > 70) + len = 70; + + fprintf(stderr, "payload: "); + for (i = 0; i < len; i++) + fprintf(stderr, "%02hhx ", data[i]); + fprintf(stderr, "\n"); +} + +static void print_pktinfo(int family, int ifindex, void *saddr, void *daddr) +{ + char sa[INET6_ADDRSTRLEN], da[INET6_ADDRSTRLEN]; + + fprintf(stderr, " pktinfo: ifindex=%u src=%s dst=%s\n", + ifindex, + saddr ? inet_ntop(family, saddr, sa, sizeof(sa)) : "unknown", + daddr ? inet_ntop(family, daddr, da, sizeof(da)) : "unknown"); +} + static void __poll(int fd) { struct pollfd pollfd; @@ -156,10 +191,9 @@ static void __recv_errmsg_cmsg(struct msghdr *msg, int payload_len) cm->cmsg_type == SCM_TIMESTAMPING) { tss = (void *) CMSG_DATA(cm); } else if ((cm->cmsg_level == SOL_IP && - cm->cmsg_type == IP_RECVERR) || - (cm->cmsg_level == SOL_IPV6 && - cm->cmsg_type == IPV6_RECVERR)) { - + cm->cmsg_type == IP_RECVERR) || + (cm->cmsg_level == SOL_IPV6 && + cm->cmsg_type == IPV6_RECVERR)) { serr = (void *) CMSG_DATA(cm); if (serr->ee_errno != ENOMSG || serr->ee_origin != SO_EE_ORIGIN_TIMESTAMPING) { @@ -168,6 +202,16 @@ static void __recv_errmsg_cmsg(struct msghdr *msg, int payload_len) serr->ee_origin); serr = NULL; } + } else if (cm->cmsg_level == SOL_IP && + cm->cmsg_type == IP_PKTINFO) { + struct in_pktinfo *info = (void *) CMSG_DATA(cm); + print_pktinfo(AF_INET, info->ipi_ifindex, + &info->ipi_spec_dst, &info->ipi_addr); + } else if (cm->cmsg_level == SOL_IPV6 && + cm->cmsg_type == IPV6_PKTINFO) { + struct in6_pktinfo *info6 = (void *) CMSG_DATA(cm); + print_pktinfo(AF_INET6, info6->ipi6_ifindex, + NULL, &info6->ipi6_addr); } else fprintf(stderr, "unknown cmsg %d,%d\n", cm->cmsg_level, cm->cmsg_type); @@ -206,7 +250,11 @@ static int recv_errmsg(int fd) if (ret == -1 && errno != EAGAIN) error(1, errno, "recvmsg"); - __recv_errmsg_cmsg(&msg, ret); + if (ret > 0) { + __recv_errmsg_cmsg(&msg, ret); + if (cfg_show_payload) + print_payload(data, cfg_payload_len); + } free(data); return ret == -1; @@ -215,9 +263,9 @@ static int recv_errmsg(int fd) static void do_test(int family, unsigned int opt) { char *buf; - int fd, i, val, total_len; + int fd, i, val = 1, total_len; - if (family == IPPROTO_IPV6 && cfg_proto != SOCK_STREAM) { + if (family == AF_INET6 && cfg_proto != SOCK_STREAM) { /* due to lack of checksum generation code */ fprintf(stderr, "test: skipping datagram over IPv6\n"); return; @@ -239,7 +287,6 @@ static void do_test(int family, unsigned int opt) error(1, errno, "socket"); if (cfg_proto == SOCK_STREAM) { - val = 1; if (setsockopt(fd, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_NODELAY, (char*) &val, sizeof(val))) error(1, 0, "setsockopt no nagle"); @@ -253,7 +300,20 @@ static void do_test(int family, unsigned int opt) } } + if (cfg_do_pktinfo) { + if (family == AF_INET6) { + if (setsockopt(fd, SOL_IPV6, IPV6_RECVPKTINFO, + &val, sizeof(val))) + error(1, errno, "setsockopt pktinfo ipv6"); + } else { + if (setsockopt(fd, SOL_IP, IP_PKTINFO, + &val, sizeof(val))) + error(1, errno, "setsockopt pktinfo ipv4"); + } + } + opt |= SOF_TIMESTAMPING_SOFTWARE | + SOF_TIMESTAMPING_OPT_CMSG | SOF_TIMESTAMPING_OPT_ID; if (setsockopt(fd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_TIMESTAMPING, (char *) &opt, sizeof(opt))) @@ -262,8 +322,6 @@ static void do_test(int family, unsigned int opt) for (i = 0; i < cfg_num_pkts; i++) { memset(&ts_prev, 0, sizeof(ts_prev)); memset(buf, 'a' + i, total_len); - buf[total_len - 2] = '\n'; - buf[total_len - 1] = '\0'; if (cfg_proto == SOCK_RAW) { struct udphdr *udph; @@ -324,11 +382,13 @@ static void __attribute__((noreturn)) usage(const char *filepath) " -4: only IPv4\n" " -6: only IPv6\n" " -h: show this message\n" + " -I: request PKTINFO\n" " -l N: send N bytes at a time\n" " -r: use raw\n" " -R: use raw (IP_HDRINCL)\n" " -p N: connect to port N\n" - " -u: use udp\n", + " -u: use udp\n" + " -x: show payload (up to 70 bytes)\n", filepath); exit(1); } @@ -338,7 +398,7 @@ static void parse_opt(int argc, char **argv) int proto_count = 0; char c; - while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "46hl:p:rRu")) != -1) { + while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "46hIl:p:rRux")) != -1) { switch (c) { case '4': do_ipv6 = 0; @@ -346,6 +406,9 @@ static void parse_opt(int argc, char **argv) case '6': do_ipv4 = 0; break; + case 'I': + cfg_do_pktinfo = true; + break; case 'r': proto_count++; cfg_proto = SOCK_RAW; @@ -367,6 +430,9 @@ static void parse_opt(int argc, char **argv) case 'p': dest_port = strtoul(optarg, NULL, 10); break; + case 'x': + cfg_show_payload = true; + break; case 'h': default: usage(argv[0]); diff --git a/Documentation/nios2/README b/Documentation/nios2/README new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..054a67d55563 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/nios2/README @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Linux on the Nios II architecture +================================= + +This is a port of Linux to Nios II (nios2) processor. + +In order to compile for Nios II, you need a version of GCC with support for the generic +system call ABI. Please see this link for more information on how compiling and booting +software for the Nios II platform: +http://www.rocketboards.org/foswiki/Documentation/NiosIILinuxUserManual + +For reference, please see the following link: +http://www.altera.com/literature/lit-nio2.jsp + +What is Nios II? +================ +Nios II is a 32-bit embedded-processor architecture designed specifically for the +Altera family of FPGAs. In order to support Linux, Nios II needs to be configured +with MMU and hardware multiplier enabled. + +Nios II ABI +=========== +Please refer to chapter "Application Binary Interface" in Nios II Processor Reference +Handbook. diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt index a5da5c7e7128..129f7c0e1483 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/pm_qos_interface.txt @@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ performance expectations by drivers, subsystems and user space applications on one of the parameters. Two different PM QoS frameworks are available: -1. PM QoS classes for cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput. +1. PM QoS classes for cpu_dma_latency, network_latency, network_throughput, +memory_bandwidth. 2. the per-device PM QoS framework provides the API to manage the per-device latency constraints and PM QoS flags. @@ -13,6 +14,7 @@ Each parameters have defined units: * latency: usec * timeout: usec * throughput: kbs (kilo bit / sec) + * memory bandwidth: mbs (mega bit / sec) 1. PM QoS framework diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 397b81593142..44fe1d28a163 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -229,13 +229,13 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h: - if set, the value of child_count is ignored (but still updated) unsigned int disable_depth; - - used for disabling the helper funcions (they work normally if this is + - used for disabling the helper functions (they work normally if this is equal to zero); the initial value of it is 1 (i.e. runtime PM is initially disabled for all devices) int runtime_error; - if set, there was a fatal error (one of the callbacks returned error code - as described in Section 2), so the helper funtions will not work until + as described in Section 2), so the helper functions will not work until this flag is cleared; this is the error code returned by the failing callback @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend() 5. Runtime PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal Initially, the runtime PM is disabled for all devices, which means that the -majority of the runtime PM helper funtions described in Section 4 will return +majority of the runtime PM helper functions described in Section 4 will return -EAGAIN until pm_runtime_enable() is called for the device. In addition to that, the initial runtime PM status of all devices is diff --git a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt index 69663640dea5..2f9c5a5fcb25 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/suspend-and-interrupts.txt @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Calling enable_irq_wake() causes suspend_device_irqs() to treat the given IRQ in a special way. Namely, the IRQ remains enabled, by on the first interrupt it will be disabled, marked as pending and "suspended" so that it will be re-enabled by resume_device_irqs() during the subsequent system resume. Also -the PM core is notified about the event which casues the system suspend in +the PM core is notified about the event which causes the system suspend in progress to be aborted (that doesn't have to happen immediately, but at one of the points where the suspend thread looks for pending wakeup events). diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt index 0e870825c1b9..bbfcd1bbedc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ SNAPSHOT_S2RAM - suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to The device's read() operation can be used to transfer the snapshot image from the kernel. It has the following limitations: - you cannot read() more than one virtual memory page at a time -- read()s across page boundaries are impossible (ie. if ypu read() 1/2 of +- read()s across page boundaries are impossible (ie. if you read() 1/2 of a page in the previous call, you will only be able to read() _at_ _most_ 1/2 of the page in the next call) diff --git a/Documentation/prctl/Makefile b/Documentation/prctl/Makefile index 3e3232dcb2b8..2948b7b124b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/prctl/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/prctl/Makefile @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ # List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := disable-tsc-ctxt-sw-stress-test disable-tsc-on-off-stress-test disable-tsc-test +hostprogs-$(CONFIG_X86) := disable-tsc-ctxt-sw-stress-test disable-tsc-on-off-stress-test disable-tsc-test # Tell kbuild to always build the programs always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4ef2d9755421 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ptp/testptp.mk @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +# PTP 1588 clock support - User space test program +# +# Copyright (C) 2010 OMICRON electronics GmbH +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. + +CC = $(CROSS_COMPILE)gcc +INC = -I$(KBUILD_OUTPUT)/usr/include +CFLAGS = -Wall $(INC) +LDLIBS = -lrt +PROGS = testptp + +all: $(PROGS) + +testptp: testptp.o + +clean: + rm -f testptp.o + +distclean: clean + rm -f $(PROGS) diff --git a/Documentation/ramoops.txt b/Documentation/ramoops.txt index 69b3cac4749d..5d8675615e59 100644 --- a/Documentation/ramoops.txt +++ b/Documentation/ramoops.txt @@ -14,11 +14,19 @@ survive after a restart. 1. Ramoops concepts -Ramoops uses a predefined memory area to store the dump. The start and size of -the memory area are set using two variables: +Ramoops uses a predefined memory area to store the dump. The start and size +and type of the memory area are set using three variables: * "mem_address" for the start * "mem_size" for the size. The memory size will be rounded down to a power of two. + * "mem_type" to specifiy if the memory type (default is pgprot_writecombine). + +Typically the default value of mem_type=0 should be used as that sets the pstore +mapping to pgprot_writecombine. Setting mem_type=1 attempts to use +pgprot_noncached, which only works on some platforms. This is because pstore +depends on atomic operations. At least on ARM, pgprot_noncached causes the +memory to be mapped strongly ordered, and atomic operations on strongly ordered +memory are implementation defined, and won't work on many ARMs such as omaps. The memory area is divided into "record_size" chunks (also rounded down to power of two) and each oops/panic writes a "record_size" chunk of @@ -55,6 +63,7 @@ Setting the ramoops parameters can be done in 2 different manners: static struct ramoops_platform_data ramoops_data = { .mem_size = <...>, .mem_address = <...>, + .mem_type = <...>, .record_size = <...>, .dump_oops = <...>, .ecc = <...>, diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt index 462321c1aeea..08911b5c6b0e 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt @@ -26,11 +26,6 @@ The Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture Kernel Task Structure Register Usage & Stackframes on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture A sample program with comments Compiling programs for debugging on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture -Figuring out gcc compile errors -Debugging Tools -objdump -strace -Performance Debugging Debugging under VM s/390 & z/Architecture IO Overview Debugging IO on s/390 & z/Architecture under VM @@ -114,28 +109,25 @@ s/390 z/Architecture 16-17 16-17 Address Space Control - 00 Primary Space Mode when DAT on - The linux kernel currently runs in this mode, CR1 is affiliated with - this mode & points to the primary segment table origin etc. - - 01 Access register mode this mode is used in functions to - copy data between kernel & user space. - - 10 Secondary space mode not used in linux however CR7 the - register affiliated with this mode is & this & normally - CR13=CR7 to allow us to copy data between kernel & user space. - We do this as follows: - We set ar2 to 0 to designate its - affiliated gpr ( gpr2 )to point to primary=kernel space. - We set ar4 to 1 to designate its - affiliated gpr ( gpr4 ) to point to secondary=home=user space - & then essentially do a memcopy(gpr2,gpr4,size) to - copy data between the address spaces, the reason we use home space for the - kernel & don't keep secondary space free is that code will not run in - secondary space. - - 11 Home Space Mode all user programs run in this mode. - it is affiliated with CR13. + 00 Primary Space Mode: + The register CR1 contains the primary address-space control ele- + ment (PASCE), which points to the primary space region/segment + table origin. + + 01 Access register mode + + 10 Secondary Space Mode: + The register CR7 contains the secondary address-space control + element (SASCE), which points to the secondary space region or + segment table origin. + + 11 Home Space Mode: + The register CR13 contains the home space address-space control + element (HASCE), which points to the home space region/segment + table origin. + + See "Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture" below + for more information about address space usage in Linux. 18-19 18-19 Condition codes (CC) @@ -249,9 +241,9 @@ currently 4TB of physical memory currently on z/Architecture. Address Spaces on Linux for s/390 & z/Architecture ================================================== -Our addressing scheme is as follows - +Our addressing scheme is basically as follows: + Primary Space Home Space Himem 0x7fffffff 2GB on s/390 ***************** **************** currently 0x3ffffffffff (2^42)-1 * User Stack * * * on z/Architecture. ***************** * * @@ -264,9 +256,46 @@ on z/Architecture. ***************** * * * Sections * * * 0x00000000 ***************** **************** -This also means that we need to look at the PSW problem state bit -or the addressing mode to decide whether we are looking at -user or kernel space. +This also means that we need to look at the PSW problem state bit and the +addressing mode to decide whether we are looking at user or kernel space. + +User space runs in primary address mode (or access register mode within +the vdso code). + +The kernel usually also runs in home space mode, however when accessing +user space the kernel switches to primary or secondary address mode if +the mvcos instruction is not available or if a compare-and-swap (futex) +instruction on a user space address is performed. + +When also looking at the ASCE control registers, this means: + +User space: +- runs in primary or access register mode +- cr1 contains the user asce +- cr7 contains the user asce +- cr13 contains the kernel asce + +Kernel space: +- runs in home space mode +- cr1 contains the user or kernel asce + -> the kernel asce is loaded when a uaccess requires primary or + secondary address mode +- cr7 contains the user or kernel asce, (changed with set_fs()) +- cr13 contains the kernel asce + +In case of uaccess the kernel changes to: +- primary space mode in case of a uaccess (copy_to_user) and uses + e.g. the mvcp instruction to access user space. However the kernel + will stay in home space mode if the mvcos instruction is available +- secondary space mode in case of futex atomic operations, so that the + instructions come from primary address space and data from secondary + space + +In case of KVM, the kernel runs in home space mode, but cr1 gets switched +to contain the gmap asce before the SIE instruction gets executed. When +the SIE instruction is finished, cr1 will be switched back to contain the +user asce. + Virtual Addresses on s/390 & z/Architecture =========================================== @@ -706,376 +735,7 @@ Debugging with optimisation has since much improved after fixing some bugs, please make sure you are using gdb-5.0 or later developed after Nov'2000. -Figuring out gcc compile errors -=============================== -If you are getting a lot of syntax errors compiling a program & the problem -isn't blatantly obvious from the source. -It often helps to just preprocess the file, this is done with the -E -option in gcc. -What this does is that it runs through the very first phase of compilation -( compilation in gcc is done in several stages & gcc calls many programs to -achieve its end result ) with the -E option gcc just calls the gcc preprocessor (cpp). -The c preprocessor does the following, it joins all the files #included together -recursively ( #include files can #include other files ) & also the c file you wish to compile. -It puts a fully qualified path of the #included files in a comment & it -does macro expansion. -This is useful for debugging because -1) You can double check whether the files you expect to be included are the ones -that are being included ( e.g. double check that you aren't going to the i386 asm directory ). -2) Check that macro definitions aren't clashing with typedefs, -3) Check that definitions aren't being used before they are being included. -4) Helps put the line emitting the error under the microscope if it contains macros. - -For convenience the Linux kernel's makefile will do preprocessing automatically for you -by suffixing the file you want built with .i ( instead of .o ) - -e.g. -from the linux directory type -make arch/s390/kernel/signal.i -this will build - -s390-gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/home1/barrow/linux/include -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer --fno-strict-aliasing -D__SMP__ -pipe -fno-strength-reduce -E arch/s390/kernel/signal.c -> arch/s390/kernel/signal.i - -Now look at signal.i you should see something like. - - -# 1 "/home1/barrow/linux/include/asm/types.h" 1 -typedef unsigned short umode_t; -typedef __signed__ char __s8; -typedef unsigned char __u8; -typedef __signed__ short __s16; -typedef unsigned short __u16; - -If instead you are getting errors further down e.g. -unknown instruction:2515 "move.l" or better still unknown instruction:2515 -"Fixme not implemented yet, call Martin" you are probably are attempting to compile some code -meant for another architecture or code that is simply not implemented, with a fixme statement -stuck into the inline assembly code so that the author of the file now knows he has work to do. -To look at the assembly emitted by gcc just before it is about to call gas ( the gnu assembler ) -use the -S option. -Again for your convenience the Linux kernel's Makefile will hold your hand & -do all this donkey work for you also by building the file with the .s suffix. -e.g. -from the Linux directory type -make arch/s390/kernel/signal.s - -s390-gcc -D__KERNEL__ -I/home1/barrow/linux/include -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer --fno-strict-aliasing -D__SMP__ -pipe -fno-strength-reduce -S arch/s390/kernel/signal.c --o arch/s390/kernel/signal.s - - -This will output something like, ( please note the constant pool & the useful comments -in the prologue to give you a hand at interpreting it ). - -.LC54: - .string "misaligned (__u16 *) in __xchg\n" -.LC57: - .string "misaligned (__u32 *) in __xchg\n" -.L$PG1: # Pool sys_sigsuspend -.LC192: - .long -262401 -.LC193: - .long -1 -.LC194: - .long schedule-.L$PG1 -.LC195: - .long do_signal-.L$PG1 - .align 4 -.globl sys_sigsuspend - .type sys_sigsuspend,@function -sys_sigsuspend: -# leaf function 0 -# automatics 16 -# outgoing args 0 -# need frame pointer 0 -# call alloca 0 -# has varargs 0 -# incoming args (stack) 0 -# function length 168 - STM 8,15,32(15) - LR 0,15 - AHI 15,-112 - BASR 13,0 -.L$CO1: AHI 13,.L$PG1-.L$CO1 - ST 0,0(15) - LR 8,2 - N 5,.LC192-.L$PG1(13) - -Adding -g to the above output makes the output even more useful -e.g. typing -make CC:="s390-gcc -g" kernel/sched.s - -which compiles. -s390-gcc -g -D__KERNEL__ -I/home/barrow/linux-2.3/include -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -fno-strict-aliasing -pipe -fno-strength-reduce -S kernel/sched.c -o kernel/sched.s - -also outputs stabs ( debugger ) info, from this info you can find out the -offsets & sizes of various elements in structures. -e.g. the stab for the structure -struct rlimit { - unsigned long rlim_cur; - unsigned long rlim_max; -}; -is -.stabs "rlimit:T(151,2)=s8rlim_cur:(0,5),0,32;rlim_max:(0,5),32,32;;",128,0,0,0 -from this stab you can see that -rlimit_cur starts at bit offset 0 & is 32 bits in size -rlimit_max starts at bit offset 32 & is 32 bits in size. - - -Debugging Tools: -================ - -objdump -======= -This is a tool with many options the most useful being ( if compiled with -g). -objdump --source <victim program or object file> > <victims debug listing > - - -The whole kernel can be compiled like this ( Doing this will make a 17MB kernel -& a 200 MB listing ) however you have to strip it before building the image -using the strip command to make it a more reasonable size to boot it. - -A source/assembly mixed dump of the kernel can be done with the line -objdump --source vmlinux > vmlinux.lst -Also, if the file isn't compiled -g, this will output as much debugging information -as it can (e.g. function names). This is very slow as it spends lots -of time searching for debugging info. The following self explanatory line should be used -instead if the code isn't compiled -g, as it is much faster: -objdump --disassemble-all --syms vmlinux > vmlinux.lst - -As hard drive space is valuable most of us use the following approach. -1) Look at the emitted psw on the console to find the crash address in the kernel. -2) Look at the file System.map ( in the linux directory ) produced when building -the kernel to find the closest address less than the current PSW to find the -offending function. -3) use grep or similar to search the source tree looking for the source file - with this function if you don't know where it is. -4) rebuild this object file with -g on, as an example suppose the file was -( /arch/s390/kernel/signal.o ) -5) Assuming the file with the erroneous function is signal.c Move to the base of the -Linux source tree. -6) rm /arch/s390/kernel/signal.o -7) make /arch/s390/kernel/signal.o -8) watch the gcc command line emitted -9) type it in again or alternatively cut & paste it on the console adding the -g option. -10) objdump --source arch/s390/kernel/signal.o > signal.lst -This will output the source & the assembly intermixed, as the snippet below shows -This will unfortunately output addresses which aren't the same -as the kernel ones you should be able to get around the mental arithmetic -by playing with the --adjust-vma parameter to objdump. - - - - -static inline void spin_lock(spinlock_t *lp) -{ - a0: 18 34 lr %r3,%r4 - a2: a7 3a 03 bc ahi %r3,956 - __asm__ __volatile(" lhi 1,-1\n" - a6: a7 18 ff ff lhi %r1,-1 - aa: 1f 00 slr %r0,%r0 - ac: ba 01 30 00 cs %r0,%r1,0(%r3) - b0: a7 44 ff fd jm aa <sys_sigsuspend+0x2e> - saveset = current->blocked; - b4: d2 07 f0 68 mvc 104(8,%r15),972(%r4) - b8: 43 cc - return (set->sig[0] & mask) != 0; -} - -6) If debugging under VM go down to that section in the document for more info. - - -I now have a tool which takes the pain out of --adjust-vma -& you are able to do something like -make /arch/s390/kernel/traps.lst -& it automatically generates the correctly relocated entries for -the text segment in traps.lst. -This tool is now standard in linux distro's in scripts/makelst - -strace: -------- -Q. What is it ? -A. It is a tool for intercepting calls to the kernel & logging them -to a file & on the screen. - -Q. What use is it ? -A. You can use it to find out what files a particular program opens. - - -Example 1 ---------- -If you wanted to know does ping work but didn't have the source -strace ping -c 1 127.0.0.1 -& then look at the man pages for each of the syscalls below, -( In fact this is sometimes easier than looking at some spaghetti -source which conditionally compiles for several architectures ). -Not everything that it throws out needs to make sense immediately. - -Just looking quickly you can see that it is making up a RAW socket -for the ICMP protocol. -Doing an alarm(10) for a 10 second timeout -& doing a gettimeofday call before & after each read to see -how long the replies took, & writing some text to stdout so the user -has an idea what is going on. - -socket(PF_INET, SOCK_RAW, IPPROTO_ICMP) = 3 -getuid() = 0 -setuid(0) = 0 -stat("/usr/share/locale/C/libc.cat", 0xbffff134) = -1 ENOENT (No such file or directory) -stat("/usr/share/locale/libc/C", 0xbffff134) = -1 ENOENT (No such file or directory) -stat("/usr/local/share/locale/C/libc.cat", 0xbffff134) = -1 ENOENT (No such file or directory) -getpid() = 353 -setsockopt(3, SOL_SOCKET, SO_BROADCAST, [1], 4) = 0 -setsockopt(3, SOL_SOCKET, SO_RCVBUF, [49152], 4) = 0 -fstat(1, {st_mode=S_IFCHR|0620, st_rdev=makedev(3, 1), ...}) = 0 -mmap(0, 4096, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_PRIVATE|MAP_ANONYMOUS, -1, 0) = 0x40008000 -ioctl(1, TCGETS, {B9600 opost isig icanon echo ...}) = 0 -write(1, "PING 127.0.0.1 (127.0.0.1): 56 d"..., 42PING 127.0.0.1 (127.0.0.1): 56 data bytes -) = 42 -sigaction(SIGINT, {0x8049ba0, [], SA_RESTART}, {SIG_DFL}) = 0 -sigaction(SIGALRM, {0x8049600, [], SA_RESTART}, {SIG_DFL}) = 0 -gettimeofday({948904719, 138951}, NULL) = 0 -sendto(3, "\10\0D\201a\1\0\0\17#\2178\307\36"..., 64, 0, {sin_family=AF_INET, -sin_port=htons(0), sin_addr=inet_addr("127.0.0.1")}, 16) = 64 -sigaction(SIGALRM, {0x8049600, [], SA_RESTART}, {0x8049600, [], SA_RESTART}) = 0 -sigaction(SIGALRM, {0x8049ba0, [], SA_RESTART}, {0x8049600, [], SA_RESTART}) = 0 -alarm(10) = 0 -recvfrom(3, "E\0\0T\0005\0\0@\1|r\177\0\0\1\177"..., 192, 0, -{sin_family=AF_INET, sin_port=htons(50882), sin_addr=inet_addr("127.0.0.1")}, [16]) = 84 -gettimeofday({948904719, 160224}, NULL) = 0 -recvfrom(3, "E\0\0T\0006\0\0\377\1\275p\177\0"..., 192, 0, -{sin_family=AF_INET, sin_port=htons(50882), sin_addr=inet_addr("127.0.0.1")}, [16]) = 84 -gettimeofday({948904719, 166952}, NULL) = 0 -write(1, "64 bytes from 127.0.0.1: icmp_se"..., -5764 bytes from 127.0.0.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=28.0 ms - -Example 2 ---------- -strace passwd 2>&1 | grep open -produces the following output -open("/etc/ld.so.cache", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/opt/kde/lib/libc.so.5", O_RDONLY) = -1 ENOENT (No such file or directory) -open("/lib/libc.so.5", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/dev", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/var/run/utmp", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/etc/passwd", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/etc/shadow", O_RDONLY) = 3 -open("/etc/login.defs", O_RDONLY) = 4 -open("/dev/tty", O_RDONLY) = 4 - -The 2>&1 is done to redirect stderr to stdout & grep is then filtering this input -through the pipe for each line containing the string open. - - -Example 3 ---------- -Getting sophisticated -telnetd crashes & I don't know why - -Steps ------ -1) Replace the following line in /etc/inetd.conf -telnet stream tcp nowait root /usr/sbin/in.telnetd -h -with -telnet stream tcp nowait root /blah - -2) Create the file /blah with the following contents to start tracing telnetd -#!/bin/bash -/usr/bin/strace -o/t1 -f /usr/sbin/in.telnetd -h -3) chmod 700 /blah to make it executable only to root -4) -killall -HUP inetd -or ps aux | grep inetd -get inetd's process id -& kill -HUP inetd to restart it. - -Important options ------------------ --o is used to tell strace to output to a file in our case t1 in the root directory --f is to follow children i.e. -e.g in our case above telnetd will start the login process & subsequently a shell like bash. -You will be able to tell which is which from the process ID's listed on the left hand side -of the strace output. --p<pid> will tell strace to attach to a running process, yup this can be done provided - it isn't being traced or debugged already & you have enough privileges, -the reason 2 processes cannot trace or debug the same program is that strace -becomes the parent process of the one being debugged & processes ( unlike people ) -can have only one parent. - - -However the file /t1 will get big quite quickly -to test it telnet 127.0.0.1 - -now look at what files in.telnetd execve'd -413 execve("/usr/sbin/in.telnetd", ["/usr/sbin/in.telnetd", "-h"], [/* 17 vars */]) = 0 -414 execve("/bin/login", ["/bin/login", "-h", "localhost", "-p"], [/* 2 vars */]) = 0 - -Whey it worked!. - - -Other hints: ------------- -If the program is not very interactive ( i.e. not much keyboard input ) -& is crashing in one architecture but not in another you can do -an strace of both programs under as identical a scenario as you can -on both architectures outputting to a file then. -do a diff of the two traces using the diff program -i.e. -diff output1 output2 -& maybe you'll be able to see where the call paths differed, this -is possibly near the cause of the crash. - -More info ---------- -Look at man pages for strace & the various syscalls -e.g. man strace, man alarm, man socket. - - -Performance Debugging -===================== -gcc is capable of compiling in profiling code just add the -p option -to the CFLAGS, this obviously affects program size & performance. -This can be used by the gprof gnu profiling tool or the -gcov the gnu code coverage tool ( code coverage is a means of testing -code quality by checking if all the code in an executable in exercised by -a tester ). - - -Using top to find out where processes are sleeping in the kernel ----------------------------------------------------------------- -To do this copy the System.map from the root directory where -the linux kernel was built to the /boot directory on your -linux machine. -Start top -Now type fU<return> -You should see a new field called WCHAN which -tells you where each process is sleeping here is a typical output. - - 6:59pm up 41 min, 1 user, load average: 0.00, 0.00, 0.00 -28 processes: 27 sleeping, 1 running, 0 zombie, 0 stopped -CPU states: 0.0% user, 0.1% system, 0.0% nice, 99.8% idle -Mem: 254900K av, 45976K used, 208924K free, 0K shrd, 28636K buff -Swap: 0K av, 0K used, 0K free 8620K cached - - PID USER PRI NI SIZE RSS SHARE WCHAN STAT LIB %CPU %MEM TIME COMMAND - 750 root 12 0 848 848 700 do_select S 0 0.1 0.3 0:00 in.telnetd - 767 root 16 0 1140 1140 964 R 0 0.1 0.4 0:00 top - 1 root 8 0 212 212 180 do_select S 0 0.0 0.0 0:00 init - 2 root 9 0 0 0 0 down_inte SW 0 0.0 0.0 0:00 kmcheck - -The time command ----------------- -Another related command is the time command which gives you an indication -of where a process is spending the majority of its time. -e.g. -time ping -c 5 nc -outputs -real 0m4.054s -user 0m0.010s -sys 0m0.010s Debugging under VM ================== diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt index 3cc9c7843e15..8cac6492aade 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/libsas.txt @@ -226,9 +226,6 @@ static int register_sas_ha(struct my_sas_ha *my_ha) my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_dev_found = my_dev_found; my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_dev_gone = my_dev_gone; - my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_max_execute_num = lldd_max_execute_num; (1) - - my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_queue_size = ha_can_queue; my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_execute_task = my_execute_task; my_ha->sas_ha.lldd_abort_task = my_abort_task; @@ -247,28 +244,6 @@ static int register_sas_ha(struct my_sas_ha *my_ha) return sas_register_ha(&my_ha->sas_ha); } -(1) This is normally a LLDD parameter, something of the -lines of a task collector. What it tells the SAS Layer is -whether the SAS layer should run in Direct Mode (default: -value 0 or 1) or Task Collector Mode (value greater than 1). - -In Direct Mode, the SAS Layer calls Execute Task as soon as -it has a command to send to the SDS, _and_ this is a single -command, i.e. not linked. - -Some hardware (e.g. aic94xx) has the capability to DMA more -than one task at a time (interrupt) from host memory. Task -Collector Mode is an optional feature for HAs which support -this in their hardware. (Again, it is completely optional -even if your hardware supports it.) - -In Task Collector Mode, the SAS Layer would do _natural_ -coalescing of tasks and at the appropriate moment it would -call your driver to DMA more than one task in a single HA -interrupt. DMBS may want to use this by insmod/modprobe -setting the lldd_max_execute_num to something greater than -1. - (2) SAS 1.1 does not define I_T Nexus Reset TMF. Events @@ -325,71 +300,22 @@ PHYE_SPINUP_HOLD -- SATA is present, COMWAKE not sent. The Execute Command SCSI RPC: - int (*lldd_execute_task)(struct sas_task *, int num, - unsigned long gfp_flags); + int (*lldd_execute_task)(struct sas_task *, gfp_t gfp_flags); -Used to queue a task to the SAS LLDD. @task is the tasks to -be executed. @num should be the number of tasks being -queued at this function call (they are linked listed via -task::list), @gfp_mask should be the gfp_mask defining the -context of the caller. +Used to queue a task to the SAS LLDD. @task is the task to be executed. +@gfp_mask is the gfp_mask defining the context of the caller. This function should implement the Execute Command SCSI RPC, -or if you're sending a SCSI Task as linked commands, you -should also use this function. -That is, when lldd_execute_task() is called, the command(s) +That is, when lldd_execute_task() is called, the command go out on the transport *immediately*. There is *no* queuing of any sort and at any level in a SAS LLDD. -The use of task::list is two-fold, one for linked commands, -the other discussed below. - -It is possible to queue up more than one task at a time, by -initializing the list element of struct sas_task, and -passing the number of tasks enlisted in this manner in num. - Returns: -SAS_QUEUE_FULL, -ENOMEM, nothing was queued; 0, the task(s) were queued. -If you want to pass num > 1, then either -A) you're the only caller of this function and keep track - of what you've queued to the LLDD, or -B) you know what you're doing and have a strategy of - retrying. - -As opposed to queuing one task at a time (function call), -batch queuing of tasks, by having num > 1, greatly -simplifies LLDD code, sequencer code, and _hardware design_, -and has some performance advantages in certain situations -(DBMS). - -The LLDD advertises if it can take more than one command at -a time at lldd_execute_task(), by setting the -lldd_max_execute_num parameter (controlled by "collector" -module parameter in aic94xx SAS LLDD). - -You should leave this to the default 1, unless you know what -you're doing. - -This is a function of the LLDD, to which the SAS layer can -cater to. - -int lldd_queue_size - The host adapter's queue size. This is the maximum -number of commands the lldd can have pending to domain -devices on behalf of all upper layers submitting through -lldd_execute_task(). - -You really want to set this to something (much) larger than -1. - -This _really_ has absolutely nothing to do with queuing. -There is no queuing in SAS LLDDs. - struct sas_task { dev -- the device this task is destined to - list -- must be initialized (INIT_LIST_HEAD) task_proto -- _one_ of enum sas_proto scatter -- pointer to scatter gather list array num_scatter -- number of elements in scatter diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt index da162f7fd5f5..5a9879bad073 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/osd.txt @@ -184,8 +184,7 @@ Any problems, questions, bug reports, lonely OSD nights, please email: More up-to-date information can be found on: http://open-osd.org -Boaz Harrosh <bharrosh@panasas.com> -Benny Halevy <bhalevy@panasas.com> +Boaz Harrosh <ooo@electrozaur.com> References ========== diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt index a0c85110a07e..8638f61c8c9d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ ways. - eh_strategy_handler() callback This is one big callback which should perform whole error - handling. As such, it should do all choirs SCSI midlayer + handling. As such, it should do all chores the SCSI midlayer performs during recovery. This will be discussed in [2-2]. Once recovery is complete, SCSI EH resumes normal operation by @@ -428,7 +428,7 @@ scmd->allowed. scsi_unjam_host() and it is responsible for whole recovery process. On completion, the handler should have made lower layers forget about all failed scmds and either ready for new commands or offline. Also, -it should perform SCSI EH maintenance choirs to maintain integrity of +it should perform SCSI EH maintenance chores to maintain integrity of SCSI midlayer. IOW, of the steps described in [2-1-2], all steps except for #1 must be implemented by eh_strategy_handler(). diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index d6a9bdeee7f2..731bc4f4c5e6 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ scsi_add_host() ----> scsi_scan_host() -------+ | slave_alloc() - slave_configure() --> scsi_adjust_queue_depth() + slave_configure() --> scsi_change_queue_depth() | slave_alloc() slave_configure() @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ scsi_scan_host() -------+ ------------------------------------------------------------ If the LLD wants to adjust the default queue settings, it can invoke -scsi_adjust_queue_depth() in its slave_configure() routine. +scsi_change_queue_depth() in its slave_configure() routine. *** For scsi devices that the mid level tries to scan but do not respond, a slave_alloc(), slave_destroy() pair is called. @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ LLD mid level LLD scsi_add_device() ------+ | slave_alloc() - slave_configure() [--> scsi_adjust_queue_depth()] + slave_configure() [--> scsi_change_queue_depth()] ------------------------------------------------------------ In a similar fashion, an LLD may become aware that a SCSI device has been @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ init_this_scsi_driver() ----+ | scsi_register() | slave_alloc() - slave_configure() --> scsi_adjust_queue_depth() + slave_configure() --> scsi_change_queue_depth() slave_alloc() *** slave_destroy() *** | @@ -271,9 +271,9 @@ init_this_scsi_driver() ----+ slave_destroy() *** ------------------------------------------------------------ -The mid level invokes scsi_adjust_queue_depth() with tagged queuing off and -"cmd_per_lun" for that host as the queue length. These settings can be -overridden by a slave_configure() supplied by the LLD. +The mid level invokes scsi_change_queue_depth() with "cmd_per_lun" for that +host as the queue length. These settings can be overridden by a +slave_configure() supplied by the LLD. *** For scsi devices that the mid level tries to scan but do not respond, a slave_alloc(), slave_destroy() pair is called. @@ -366,13 +366,11 @@ is initialized. The functions below are listed alphabetically and their names all start with "scsi_". Summary: - scsi_activate_tcq - turn on tag command queueing scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance scsi_add_host - perform sysfs registration and set up transport class - scsi_adjust_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device + scsi_change_queue_depth - change the queue depth on a SCSI device scsi_bios_ptable - return copy of block device's partition table scsi_block_requests - prevent further commands being queued to given host - scsi_deactivate_tcq - turn off tag command queueing scsi_host_alloc - return a new scsi_host instance whose refcount==1 scsi_host_get - increments Scsi_Host instance's refcount scsi_host_put - decrements Scsi_Host instance's refcount (free if 0) @@ -390,24 +388,6 @@ Summary: Details: /** - * scsi_activate_tcq - turn on tag command queueing ("ordered" task attribute) - * @sdev: device to turn on TCQ for - * @depth: queue depth - * - * Returns nothing - * - * Might block: no - * - * Notes: Eventually, it is hoped depth would be the maximum depth - * the device could cope with and the real queue depth - * would be adjustable from 0 to depth. - * - * Defined (inline) in: include/scsi/scsi_tcq.h - **/ -void scsi_activate_tcq(struct scsi_device *sdev, int depth) - - -/** * scsi_add_device - creates new scsi device (lu) instance * @shost: pointer to scsi host instance * @channel: channel number (rarely other than 0) @@ -456,11 +436,8 @@ int scsi_add_host(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct device * dev) /** - * scsi_adjust_queue_depth - allow LLD to change queue depth on a SCSI device + * scsi_change_queue_depth - allow LLD to change queue depth on a SCSI device * @sdev: pointer to SCSI device to change queue depth on - * @tagged: 0 - no tagged queuing - * MSG_SIMPLE_TAG - simple tagged queuing - * MSG_ORDERED_TAG - ordered tagged queuing * @tags Number of tags allowed if tagged queuing enabled, * or number of commands the LLD can queue up * in non-tagged mode (as per cmd_per_lun). @@ -471,15 +448,12 @@ int scsi_add_host(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct device * dev) * * Notes: Can be invoked any time on a SCSI device controlled by this * LLD. [Specifically during and after slave_configure() and prior to - * slave_destroy().] Can safely be invoked from interrupt code. Actual - * queue depth change may be delayed until the next command is being - * processed. See also scsi_activate_tcq() and scsi_deactivate_tcq(). + * slave_destroy().] Can safely be invoked from interrupt code. * * Defined in: drivers/scsi/scsi.c [see source code for more notes] * **/ -void scsi_adjust_queue_depth(struct scsi_device * sdev, int tagged, - int tags) +int scsi_change_queue_depth(struct scsi_device *sdev, int tags) /** @@ -515,20 +489,6 @@ void scsi_block_requests(struct Scsi_Host * shost) /** - * scsi_deactivate_tcq - turn off tag command queueing - * @sdev: device to turn off TCQ for - * @depth: queue depth (stored in sdev) - * - * Returns nothing - * - * Might block: no - * - * Defined (inline) in: include/scsi/scsi_tcq.h - **/ -void scsi_deactivate_tcq(struct scsi_device *sdev, int depth) - - -/** * scsi_host_alloc - create a scsi host adapter instance and perform basic * initialization. * @sht: pointer to scsi host template @@ -1254,7 +1214,7 @@ of interest: for disk firmware uploads. cmd_per_lun - maximum number of commands that can be queued on devices controlled by the host. Overridden by LLD calls to - scsi_adjust_queue_depth(). + scsi_change_queue_depth(). unchecked_isa_dma - 1=>only use bottom 16 MB of ram (ISA DMA addressing restriction), 0=>can use full 32 bit (or better) DMA address space @@ -1294,7 +1254,7 @@ struct scsi_cmnd Instances of this structure convey SCSI commands to the LLD and responses back to the mid level. The SCSI mid level will ensure that no more SCSI commands become queued against the LLD than are indicated by -scsi_adjust_queue_depth() (or struct Scsi_Host::cmd_per_lun). There will +scsi_change_queue_depth() (or struct Scsi_Host::cmd_per_lun). There will be at least one instance of struct scsi_cmnd available for each SCSI device. Members of interest: cmnd - array containing SCSI command diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt index f346abbdd6ff..0d5bdb153d3b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt @@ -506,9 +506,11 @@ user does not request data that far.) DEBUGGING HINTS -To enable debugging messages, edit st.c and #define DEBUG 1. As seen -above, debugging can be switched off with an ioctl if debugging is -compiled into the driver. The debugging output is not voluminous. +Debugging code is now compiled in by default but debugging is turned off +with the kernel module parameter debug_flag defaulting to 0. Debugging +can still be switched on and off with an ioctl. To enable debug at +module load time add debug_flag=1 to the module load options, the +debugging output is not voluminous. If the tape seems to hang, I would be very interested to hear where the driver is waiting. With the command 'ps -l' you can see the state diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/wd719x.txt b/Documentation/scsi/wd719x.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0816b0220238 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/scsi/wd719x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +Driver for Western Digital WD7193, WD7197 and WD7296 SCSI cards +--------------------------------------------------------------- + +The card requires firmware that can be cut out of the Windows NT driver that +can be downloaded from WD at: +http://support.wdc.com/product/download.asp?groupid=801&sid=27&lang=en + +There is no license anywhere in the file or on the page - so the firmware +probably cannot be added to linux-firmware. + +This script downloads and extracts the firmware, creating wd719x-risc.bin and +d719x-wcs.bin files. Put them in /lib/firmware/. + +#!/bin/sh +wget http://support.wdc.com/download/archive/pciscsi.exe +lha xi pciscsi.exe pci-scsi.exe +lha xi pci-scsi.exe nt/wd7296a.sys +rm pci-scsi.exe +dd if=wd7296a.sys of=wd719x-risc.bin bs=1 skip=5760 count=14336 +dd if=wd7296a.sys of=wd719x-wcs.bin bs=1 skip=20096 count=514 +rm wd7296a.sys diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ControlNames.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ControlNames.txt index fea65bb6269e..79a6127863ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ControlNames.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ControlNames.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ This document describes standard names of mixer controls. -Syntax: SOURCE [DIRECTION] FUNCTION +Syntax: [LOCATION] SOURCE [CHANNEL] [DIRECTION] FUNCTION DIRECTION: <nothing> (both directions) @@ -14,12 +14,29 @@ FUNCTION: Volume Route (route control, hardware specific) +CHANNEL: + <nothing> (channel independent, or applies to all channels) + Front + Surround (rear left/right in 4.0/5.1 surround) + CLFE + Center + LFE + Side (side left/right for 7.1 surround) + +LOCATION: (physical location of source) + Front + Rear + Dock (docking station) + Internal + SOURCE: Master Master Mono Hardware Master Speaker (internal speaker) + Bass Speaker (internal LFE speaker) Headphone + Line Out Beep (beep generator) Phone Phone Input @@ -27,14 +44,14 @@ SOURCE: Synth FM Mic - Line + Headset Mic (mic part of combined headset jack - 4-pin headphone + mic) + Headphone Mic (mic part of either/or - 3-pin headphone or mic) + Line (input only, use "Line Out" for output) CD Video Zoom Video Aux PCM - PCM Front - PCM Rear PCM Pan Loopback Analog Loopback (D/A -> A/D loopback) @@ -47,8 +64,13 @@ SOURCE: Music I2S IEC958 + HDMI + SPDIF (output only) + SPDIF In + Digital In + HDMI/DP (either HDMI or DisplayPort) -Exceptions: +Exceptions (deprecated): [Digital] Capture Source [Digital] Capture Switch (aka input gain switch) [Digital] Capture Volume (aka input gain volume) diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index a5e754714344..5a3163cac6c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -113,14 +113,10 @@ AD1984 AD1986A ======= - 6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default) 3stack 3-stack, shared surrounds laptop 2-channel only (FSC V2060, Samsung M50) - laptop-eapd 2-channel with EAPD (ASUS A6J) - laptop-automute 2-channel with EAPD and HP-automute (Lenovo N100) - ultra 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung Ultra tablet PC) - samsung 2-channel with EAPD (Samsung R65) - samsung-p50 2-channel with HP-automute (Samsung P50) + laptop-imic 2-channel with built-in mic + eapd Turn on EAPD constantly AD1988/AD1988B/AD1989A/AD1989B ============================== diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt index 7fcd1ad96fcc..7f8a0d325905 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Procfile.txt @@ -101,10 +101,6 @@ card*/pcm*/xrun_debug bit 0 = Enable XRUN/jiffies debug messages bit 1 = Show stack trace at XRUN / jiffies check bit 2 = Enable additional jiffies check - bit 3 = Log hwptr update at each period interrupt - bit 4 = Log hwptr update at each snd_pcm_update_hw_ptr() - bit 5 = Show last 10 positions on error - bit 6 = Do above only once When the bit 0 is set, the driver will show the messages to kernel log when an xrun is detected. The debug message is @@ -121,15 +117,6 @@ card*/pcm*/xrun_debug buggy) hardware that doesn't give smooth pointer updates. This feature is enabled via the bit 2. - Bits 3 and 4 are for logging the hwptr records. Note that - these will give flood of kernel messages. - - When bit 5 is set, the driver logs the last 10 xrun errors and - the proc file shows each jiffies, position, period_size, - buffer_size, old_hw_ptr, and hw_ptr_base values. - - When bit 6 is set, the full xrun log is shown only once. - card*/pcm*/sub*/info The general information of this PCM sub-stream. @@ -146,6 +133,10 @@ card*/pcm*/sub*/sw_params card*/pcm*/sub*/prealloc The buffer pre-allocation information. +card*/pcm*/sub*/xrun_injection + Triggers an XRUN to the running stream when any value is + written to this proc file. Used for fault injection. + This entry is write-only. AC97 Codec Information ---------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 57baff5bdb80..b5d0c8501a18 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -54,8 +54,9 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - overflowuid - panic - panic_on_oops -- panic_on_unrecovered_nmi - panic_on_stackoverflow +- panic_on_unrecovered_nmi +- panic_on_warn - pid_max - powersave-nap [ PPC only ] - printk @@ -527,19 +528,6 @@ the recommended setting is 60. ============================================================== -panic_on_unrecovered_nmi: - -The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is -to continue operation. For many environments such as scientific -computing it is preferable that the box is taken out and the error -dealt with than an uncorrected parity/ECC error get propagated. - -A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons -such as power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like -the existing panic controls already in that directory. - -============================================================== - panic_on_oops: Controls the kernel's behaviour when an oops or BUG is encountered. @@ -563,6 +551,30 @@ This file shows up if CONFIG_DEBUG_STACKOVERFLOW is enabled. ============================================================== +panic_on_unrecovered_nmi: + +The default Linux behaviour on an NMI of either memory or unknown is +to continue operation. For many environments such as scientific +computing it is preferable that the box is taken out and the error +dealt with than an uncorrected parity/ECC error get propagated. + +A small number of systems do generate NMI's for bizarre random reasons +such as power management so the default is off. That sysctl works like +the existing panic controls already in that directory. + +============================================================== + +panic_on_warn: + +Calls panic() in the WARN() path when set to 1. This is useful to avoid +a kernel rebuild when attempting to kdump at the location of a WARN(). + +0: only WARN(), default behaviour. + +1: call panic() after printing out WARN() location. + +============================================================== + perf_cpu_time_max_percent: Hints to the kernel how much CPU time it should be allowed to diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt index 04892b821157..666594b43cff 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt @@ -120,10 +120,14 @@ seconds. warnings -------- -This controls console messages from the networking stack that can occur because -of problems on the network like duplicate address or bad checksums. Normally, -this should be enabled, but if the problem persists the messages can be -disabled. +This sysctl is now unused. + +This was used to control console messages from the networking stack that +occur because of problems on the network like duplicate address or bad +checksums. + +These messages are now emitted at KERN_DEBUG and can generally be enabled +and controlled by the dynamic_debug facility. netdev_budget ------------- @@ -138,6 +142,28 @@ netdev_max_backlog Maximum number of packets, queued on the INPUT side, when the interface receives packets faster than kernel can process them. +netdev_rss_key +-------------- + +RSS (Receive Side Scaling) enabled drivers use a 40 bytes host key that is +randomly generated. +Some user space might need to gather its content even if drivers do not +provide ethtool -x support yet. + +myhost:~# cat /proc/sys/net/core/netdev_rss_key +84:50:f4:00:a8:15:d1:a7:e9:7f:1d:60:35:c7:47:25:42:97:74:ca:56:bb:b6:a1:d8: ... (52 bytes total) + +File contains nul bytes if no driver ever called netdev_rss_key_fill() function. +Note: +/proc/sys/net/core/netdev_rss_key contains 52 bytes of key, +but most drivers only use 40 bytes of it. + +myhost:~# ethtool -x eth0 +RX flow hash indirection table for eth0 with 8 RX ring(s): + 0: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +RSS hash key: +84:50:f4:00:a8:15:d1:a7:e9:7f:1d:60:35:c7:47:25:42:97:74:ca:56:bb:b6:a1:d8:43:e3:c9:0c:fd:17:55:c2:3a:4d:69:ed:f1:42:89 + netdev_tstamp_prequeue ---------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt b/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5518465290bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/target/tcmu-design.txt @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ +Contents: + +1) TCM Userspace Design + a) Background + b) Benefits + c) Design constraints + d) Implementation overview + i. Mailbox + ii. Command ring + iii. Data Area + e) Device discovery + f) Device events + g) Other contingencies +2) Writing a user pass-through handler + a) Discovering and configuring TCMU uio devices + b) Waiting for events on the device(s) + c) Managing the command ring +3) Command filtering and pass_level +4) A final note + + +TCM Userspace Design +-------------------- + +TCM is another name for LIO, an in-kernel iSCSI target (server). +Existing TCM targets run in the kernel. TCMU (TCM in Userspace) +allows userspace programs to be written which act as iSCSI targets. +This document describes the design. + +The existing kernel provides modules for different SCSI transport +protocols. TCM also modularizes the data storage. There are existing +modules for file, block device, RAM or using another SCSI device as +storage. These are called "backstores" or "storage engines". These +built-in modules are implemented entirely as kernel code. + +Background: + +In addition to modularizing the transport protocol used for carrying +SCSI commands ("fabrics"), the Linux kernel target, LIO, also modularizes +the actual data storage as well. These are referred to as "backstores" +or "storage engines". The target comes with backstores that allow a +file, a block device, RAM, or another SCSI device to be used for the +local storage needed for the exported SCSI LUN. Like the rest of LIO, +these are implemented entirely as kernel code. + +These backstores cover the most common use cases, but not all. One new +use case that other non-kernel target solutions, such as tgt, are able +to support is using Gluster's GLFS or Ceph's RBD as a backstore. The +target then serves as a translator, allowing initiators to store data +in these non-traditional networked storage systems, while still only +using standard protocols themselves. + +If the target is a userspace process, supporting these is easy. tgt, +for example, needs only a small adapter module for each, because the +modules just use the available userspace libraries for RBD and GLFS. + +Adding support for these backstores in LIO is considerably more +difficult, because LIO is entirely kernel code. Instead of undertaking +the significant work to port the GLFS or RBD APIs and protocols to the +kernel, another approach is to create a userspace pass-through +backstore for LIO, "TCMU". + + +Benefits: + +In addition to allowing relatively easy support for RBD and GLFS, TCMU +will also allow easier development of new backstores. TCMU combines +with the LIO loopback fabric to become something similar to FUSE +(Filesystem in Userspace), but at the SCSI layer instead of the +filesystem layer. A SUSE, if you will. + +The disadvantage is there are more distinct components to configure, and +potentially to malfunction. This is unavoidable, but hopefully not +fatal if we're careful to keep things as simple as possible. + +Design constraints: + +- Good performance: high throughput, low latency +- Cleanly handle if userspace: + 1) never attaches + 2) hangs + 3) dies + 4) misbehaves +- Allow future flexibility in user & kernel implementations +- Be reasonably memory-efficient +- Simple to configure & run +- Simple to write a userspace backend + + +Implementation overview: + +The core of the TCMU interface is a memory region that is shared +between kernel and userspace. Within this region is: a control area +(mailbox); a lockless producer/consumer circular buffer for commands +to be passed up, and status returned; and an in/out data buffer area. + +TCMU uses the pre-existing UIO subsystem. UIO allows device driver +development in userspace, and this is conceptually very close to the +TCMU use case, except instead of a physical device, TCMU implements a +memory-mapped layout designed for SCSI commands. Using UIO also +benefits TCMU by handling device introspection (e.g. a way for +userspace to determine how large the shared region is) and signaling +mechanisms in both directions. + +There are no embedded pointers in the memory region. Everything is +expressed as an offset from the region's starting address. This allows +the ring to still work if the user process dies and is restarted with +the region mapped at a different virtual address. + +See target_core_user.h for the struct definitions. + +The Mailbox: + +The mailbox is always at the start of the shared memory region, and +contains a version, details about the starting offset and size of the +command ring, and head and tail pointers to be used by the kernel and +userspace (respectively) to put commands on the ring, and indicate +when the commands are completed. + +version - 1 (userspace should abort if otherwise) +flags - none yet defined. +cmdr_off - The offset of the start of the command ring from the start +of the memory region, to account for the mailbox size. +cmdr_size - The size of the command ring. This does *not* need to be a +power of two. +cmd_head - Modified by the kernel to indicate when a command has been +placed on the ring. +cmd_tail - Modified by userspace to indicate when it has completed +processing of a command. + +The Command Ring: + +Commands are placed on the ring by the kernel incrementing +mailbox.cmd_head by the size of the command, modulo cmdr_size, and +then signaling userspace via uio_event_notify(). Once the command is +completed, userspace updates mailbox.cmd_tail in the same way and +signals the kernel via a 4-byte write(). When cmd_head equals +cmd_tail, the ring is empty -- no commands are currently waiting to be +processed by userspace. + +TCMU commands start with a common header containing "len_op", a 32-bit +value that stores the length, as well as the opcode in the lowest +unused bits. Currently only two opcodes are defined, TCMU_OP_PAD and +TCMU_OP_CMD. When userspace encounters a command with PAD opcode, it +should skip ahead by the bytes in "length". (The kernel inserts PAD +entries to ensure each CMD entry fits contigously into the circular +buffer.) + +When userspace handles a CMD, it finds the SCSI CDB (Command Data +Block) via tcmu_cmd_entry.req.cdb_off. This is an offset from the +start of the overall shared memory region, not the entry. The data +in/out buffers are accessible via tht req.iov[] array. Note that +each iov.iov_base is also an offset from the start of the region. + +TCMU currently does not support BIDI operations. + +When completing a command, userspace sets rsp.scsi_status, and +rsp.sense_buffer if necessary. Userspace then increments +mailbox.cmd_tail by entry.hdr.length (mod cmdr_size) and signals the +kernel via the UIO method, a 4-byte write to the file descriptor. + +The Data Area: + +This is shared-memory space after the command ring. The organization +of this area is not defined in the TCMU interface, and userspace +should access only the parts referenced by pending iovs. + + +Device Discovery: + +Other devices may be using UIO besides TCMU. Unrelated user processes +may also be handling different sets of TCMU devices. TCMU userspace +processes must find their devices by scanning sysfs +class/uio/uio*/name. For TCMU devices, these names will be of the +format: + +tcm-user/<hba_num>/<device_name>/<subtype>/<path> + +where "tcm-user" is common for all TCMU-backed UIO devices. <hba_num> +and <device_name> allow userspace to find the device's path in the +kernel target's configfs tree. Assuming the usual mount point, it is +found at: + +/sys/kernel/config/target/core/user_<hba_num>/<device_name> + +This location contains attributes such as "hw_block_size", that +userspace needs to know for correct operation. + +<subtype> will be a userspace-process-unique string to identify the +TCMU device as expecting to be backed by a certain handler, and <path> +will be an additional handler-specific string for the user process to +configure the device, if needed. The name cannot contain ':', due to +LIO limitations. + +For all devices so discovered, the user handler opens /dev/uioX and +calls mmap(): + +mmap(NULL, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0) + +where size must be equal to the value read from +/sys/class/uio/uioX/maps/map0/size. + + +Device Events: + +If a new device is added or removed, a notification will be broadcast +over netlink, using a generic netlink family name of "TCM-USER" and a +multicast group named "config". This will include the UIO name as +described in the previous section, as well as the UIO minor +number. This should allow userspace to identify both the UIO device and +the LIO device, so that after determining the device is supported +(based on subtype) it can take the appropriate action. + + +Other contingencies: + +Userspace handler process never attaches: + +- TCMU will post commands, and then abort them after a timeout period + (30 seconds.) + +Userspace handler process is killed: + +- It is still possible to restart and re-connect to TCMU + devices. Command ring is preserved. However, after the timeout period, + the kernel will abort pending tasks. + +Userspace handler process hangs: + +- The kernel will abort pending tasks after a timeout period. + +Userspace handler process is malicious: + +- The process can trivially break the handling of devices it controls, + but should not be able to access kernel memory outside its shared + memory areas. + + +Writing a user pass-through handler (with example code) +------------------------------------------------------- + +A user process handing a TCMU device must support the following: + +a) Discovering and configuring TCMU uio devices +b) Waiting for events on the device(s) +c) Managing the command ring: Parsing operations and commands, + performing work as needed, setting response fields (scsi_status and + possibly sense_buffer), updating cmd_tail, and notifying the kernel + that work has been finished + +First, consider instead writing a plugin for tcmu-runner. tcmu-runner +implements all of this, and provides a higher-level API for plugin +authors. + +TCMU is designed so that multiple unrelated processes can manage TCMU +devices separately. All handlers should make sure to only open their +devices, based opon a known subtype string. + +a) Discovering and configuring TCMU UIO devices: + +(error checking omitted for brevity) + +int fd, dev_fd; +char buf[256]; +unsigned long long map_len; +void *map; + +fd = open("/sys/class/uio/uio0/name", O_RDONLY); +ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf)); +close(fd); +buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */ + +/* we only want uio devices whose name is a format we expect */ +if (strncmp(buf, "tcm-user", 8)) + exit(-1); + +/* Further checking for subtype also needed here */ + +fd = open(/sys/class/uio/%s/maps/map0/size, O_RDONLY); +ret = read(fd, buf, sizeof(buf)); +close(fd); +str_buf[ret-1] = '\0'; /* null-terminate and chop off the \n */ + +map_len = strtoull(buf, NULL, 0); + +dev_fd = open("/dev/uio0", O_RDWR); +map = mmap(NULL, map_len, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, dev_fd, 0); + + +b) Waiting for events on the device(s) + +while (1) { + char buf[4]; + + int ret = read(dev_fd, buf, 4); /* will block */ + + handle_device_events(dev_fd, map); +} + + +c) Managing the command ring + +#include <linux/target_core_user.h> + +int handle_device_events(int fd, void *map) +{ + struct tcmu_mailbox *mb = map; + struct tcmu_cmd_entry *ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail; + int did_some_work = 0; + + /* Process events from cmd ring until we catch up with cmd_head */ + while (ent != (void *)mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_head) { + + if (tcmu_hdr_get_op(&ent->hdr) == TCMU_OP_CMD) { + uint8_t *cdb = (void *)mb + ent->req.cdb_off; + bool success = true; + + /* Handle command here. */ + printf("SCSI opcode: 0x%x\n", cdb[0]); + + /* Set response fields */ + if (success) + ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_NO_SENSE; + else { + /* Also fill in rsp->sense_buffer here */ + ent->rsp.scsi_status = SCSI_CHECK_CONDITION; + } + } + else { + /* Do nothing for PAD entries */ + } + + /* update cmd_tail */ + mb->cmd_tail = (mb->cmd_tail + tcmu_hdr_get_len(&ent->hdr)) % mb->cmdr_size; + ent = (void *) mb + mb->cmdr_off + mb->cmd_tail; + did_some_work = 1; + } + + /* Notify the kernel that work has been finished */ + if (did_some_work) { + uint32_t buf = 0; + + write(fd, &buf, 4); + } + + return 0; +} + + +Command filtering and pass_level +-------------------------------- + +TCMU supports a "pass_level" option with valid values of 0 or 1. When +the value is 0 (the default), nearly all SCSI commands received for +the device are passed through to the handler. This allows maximum +flexibility but increases the amount of code required by the handler, +to support all mandatory SCSI commands. If pass_level is set to 1, +then only IO-related commands are presented, and the rest are handled +by LIO's in-kernel command emulation. The commands presented at level +1 include all versions of: + +READ +WRITE +WRITE_VERIFY +XDWRITEREAD +WRITE_SAME +COMPARE_AND_WRITE +SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE +UNMAP + + +A final note +------------ + +Please be careful to return codes as defined by the SCSI +specifications. These are different than some values defined in the +scsi/scsi.h include file. For example, CHECK CONDITION's status code +is 2, not 1. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt index 4da42616939f..8408e040f06f 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt @@ -234,6 +234,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: will be displayed on the same line as the function that is returning registers. + If the callback registered to be traced by a function with + the "ip modify" attribute (thus the regs->ip can be changed), + an 'I' will be displayed on the same line as the function that + can be overridden. + function_profile_enabled: When set it will enable all functions with either the function @@ -680,9 +685,11 @@ The above is mostly meaningful for kernel developers. needs to be fixed to be only relative to the same CPU. The marks are determined by the difference between this current trace and the next trace. - '!' - greater than preempt_mark_thresh (default 100) - '+' - greater than 1 microsecond - ' ' - less than or equal to 1 microsecond. + '$' - greater than 1 second + '#' - greater than 1000 microsecond + '!' - greater than 100 microsecond + '+' - greater than 10 microsecond + ' ' - less than or equal to 10 microsecond. The rest is the same as the 'trace' file. @@ -1951,6 +1958,8 @@ want, depending on your needs. + means that the function exceeded 10 usecs. ! means that the function exceeded 100 usecs. + # means that the function exceeded 1000 usecs. + $ means that the function exceeded 1 sec. - The task/pid field displays the thread cmdline and pid which diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt index 4cf53e406613..635e57493709 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_configfs.txt @@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ functions and binds them. This way the whole gadget is bound. configured, so config_groups for particular functions are defined in the functions implementation files drivers/usb/gadget/f_*.c. -5. Funciton's code is written in such a way that it uses +5. Function's code is written in such a way that it uses usb_get_function_instance(), which, in turn, calls request_module. So, provided that modprobe works, modules for particular functions diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index 7b90fe034c4b..b5f83911732a 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -47,14 +47,15 @@ dynamic PM is implemented in the USB subsystem, although system PM is covered to some extent (see Documentation/power/*.txt for more information about system PM). -Note: Dynamic PM support for USB is present only if the kernel was -built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled (which depends on -CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME). System PM support is present only if the kernel -was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND or CONFIG_HIBERNATION enabled. - -(Starting with the 3.10 kernel release, dynamic PM support for USB is -present whenever the kernel was built with CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME enabled. -The CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND option has been eliminated.) +System PM support is present only if the kernel was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND +or CONFIG_HIBERNATION enabled. Dynamic PM support for USB is present whenever +the kernel was built with CONFIG_PM enabled. + +[Historically, dynamic PM support for USB was present only if the +kernel had been built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled (which depended on +CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME). Starting with the 3.10 kernel release, dynamic PM support +for USB was present whenever the kernel was built with CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME +enabled. The CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND option had been eliminated.] What is Remote Wakeup? diff --git a/Documentation/vDSO/Makefile b/Documentation/vDSO/Makefile index 2b99e57207c1..ee075c3d2124 100644 --- a/Documentation/vDSO/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/vDSO/Makefile @@ -10,3 +10,6 @@ always := $(hostprogs-y) HOSTCFLAGS := -I$(objtree)/usr/include -std=gnu99 HOSTCFLAGS_vdso_standalone_test_x86.o := -fno-asynchronous-unwind-tables -fno-stack-protector HOSTLOADLIBES_vdso_standalone_test_x86 := -nostdlib +ifeq ($(CONFIG_X86_32),y) +HOSTLOADLIBES_vdso_standalone_test_x86 += -lgcc_s +endif diff --git a/Documentation/vDSO/vdso_standalone_test_x86.c b/Documentation/vDSO/vdso_standalone_test_x86.c index d46240265c50..93b0ebf8cc38 100644 --- a/Documentation/vDSO/vdso_standalone_test_x86.c +++ b/Documentation/vDSO/vdso_standalone_test_x86.c @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ static inline void linux_exit(int code) x86_syscall3(__NR_exit, code, 0, 0); } -void to_base10(char *lastdig, uint64_t n) +void to_base10(char *lastdig, time_t n) { while (n) { *lastdig = (n % 10) + '0'; diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 index a74eeccfe700..4c84ec853265 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 @@ -43,3 +43,5 @@ 42 -> Leadtek Winfast PxPVR2200 [107d:6f21] 43 -> Hauppauge ImpactVCB-e [0070:7133] 44 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Dual Express2 [18ac:db98] + 45 -> DVBSky T9580 [4254:9580] + 46 -> DVBSky T980C [4254:980c] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index bc3351bb48b4..3700edb81db2 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -93,3 +93,4 @@ 92 -> PCTV DVB-S2 Stick (461e) (em28178) 93 -> KWorld USB ATSC TV Stick UB435-Q V3 (em2874) [1b80:e34c] 94 -> PCTV tripleStick (292e) (em28178) + 95 -> Leadtek VC100 (em2861) [0413:6f07] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 8df17d063499..a93d86455233 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -191,3 +191,4 @@ 190 -> Asus My Cinema PS3-100 [1043:48cd] 191 -> Hawell HW-9004V1 192 -> AverMedia AverTV Satellite Hybrid+FM A706 [1461:2055] +193 -> WIS Voyager or compatible [1905:7007] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt index daa9e2ac162c..84f41cf1f3e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/soc-camera.txt @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ they are transferred over a media bus. Soc-camera provides support to conveniently manage these formats. A table of standard transformations is maintained by soc-camera core, which describes, what FOURCC pixel format will be obtained, if a media-bus pixel format is stored in memory according to -certain rules. E.g. if V4L2_MBUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8 data is sampled with 8 bits per +certain rules. E.g. if MEDIA_BUS_FMT_YUYV8_2X8 data is sampled with 8 bits per sample and stored in memory in the little-endian order with no gaps between bytes, data in memory will represent the V4L2_PIX_FMT_YUYV FOURCC format. These standard transformations will be used by soc-camera or by camera host drivers to diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/vivid.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/vivid.txt index eeb11a28e4fc..e5a940e3d304 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/vivid.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/vivid.txt @@ -221,12 +221,11 @@ ccs_out_mode: specify the allowed video output crop/compose/scaling combination key, not quality. multiplanar: select whether each device instance supports multi-planar formats, - and thus the V4L2 multi-planar API. By default the first device instance - is single-planar, the second multi-planar, and it keeps alternating. + and thus the V4L2 multi-planar API. By default device instances are + single-planar. This module option can override that for each instance. Values are: - 0: use alternating single and multi-planar devices. 1: this is a single-planar instance. 2: this is a multi-planar instance. @@ -975,9 +974,8 @@ is set, then the alpha component is only used for the color red and set to 0 otherwise. The driver has to be configured to support the multiplanar formats. By default -the first driver instance is single-planar, the second is multi-planar, and it -keeps alternating. This can be changed by setting the multiplanar module option, -see section 1 for more details on that option. +the driver instances are single-planar. This can be changed by setting the +multiplanar module option, see section 1 for more details on that option. If the driver instance is using the multiplanar formats/API, then the first single planar format (YUYV) and the multiplanar NV16M and NV61M formats the @@ -1021,7 +1019,7 @@ the output overlay for the video output, turn on video looping and capture to see the blended framebuffer overlay that's being written to by the second instance. This setup would require the following commands: - $ sudo modprobe vivid n_devs=2 node_types=0x10101,0x1 multiplanar=1,1 + $ sudo modprobe vivid n_devs=2 node_types=0x10101,0x1 $ v4l2-ctl -d1 --find-fb /dev/fb1 is the framebuffer associated with base address 0x12800000 $ sudo v4l2-ctl -d2 --set-fbuf fb=1 diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index bdd4bb97fff7..f2d3a100fe38 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ The intent of this file is to give a brief summary of hugetlbpage support in the Linux kernel. This support is built on top of multiple page size support -that is provided by most modern architectures. For example, i386 -architecture supports 4K and 4M (2M in PAE mode) page sizes, ia64 +that is provided by most modern architectures. For example, x86 CPUs normally +support 4K and 2M (1G if architecturally supported) page sizes, ia64 architecture supports multiple page sizes 4K, 8K, 64K, 256K, 1M, 4M, 16M, 256M and ppc64 supports 4K and 16M. A TLB is a cache of virtual-to-physical translations. Typically this is a very scarce resource on processor. @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ This command mounts a (pseudo) filesystem of type hugetlbfs on the directory /mnt/huge. Any files created on /mnt/huge uses huge pages. The uid and gid options sets the owner and group of the root of the file system. By default the uid and gid of the current process are taken. The mode option sets the -mode of root of file system to value & 0777. This value is given in octal. +mode of root of file system to value & 01777. This value is given in octal. By default the value 0755 is picked. The size option sets the maximum value of memory (huge pages) allowed for that filesystem (/mnt/huge). The size is rounded down to HPAGE_SIZE. The option nr_inodes sets the maximum number of diff --git a/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4472ed2ad921 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/x86/intel_mpx.txt @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ +1. Intel(R) MPX Overview +======================== + +Intel(R) Memory Protection Extensions (Intel(R) MPX) is a new capability +introduced into Intel Architecture. Intel MPX provides hardware features +that can be used in conjunction with compiler changes to check memory +references, for those references whose compile-time normal intentions are +usurped at runtime due to buffer overflow or underflow. + +For more information, please refer to Intel(R) Architecture Instruction +Set Extensions Programming Reference, Chapter 9: Intel(R) Memory Protection +Extensions. + +Note: Currently no hardware with MPX ISA is available but it is always +possible to use SDE (Intel(R) Software Development Emulator) instead, which +can be downloaded from +http://software.intel.com/en-us/articles/intel-software-development-emulator + + +2. How to get the advantage of MPX +================================== + +For MPX to work, changes are required in the kernel, binutils and compiler. +No source changes are required for applications, just a recompile. + +There are a lot of moving parts of this to all work right. The following +is how we expect the compiler, application and kernel to work together. + +1) Application developer compiles with -fmpx. The compiler will add the + instrumentation as well as some setup code called early after the app + starts. New instruction prefixes are noops for old CPUs. +2) That setup code allocates (virtual) space for the "bounds directory", + points the "bndcfgu" register to the directory and notifies the kernel + (via the new prctl(PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT)) that the app will be using + MPX. +3) The kernel detects that the CPU has MPX, allows the new prctl() to + succeed, and notes the location of the bounds directory. Userspace is + expected to keep the bounds directory at that locationWe note it + instead of reading it each time because the 'xsave' operation needed + to access the bounds directory register is an expensive operation. +4) If the application needs to spill bounds out of the 4 registers, it + issues a bndstx instruction. Since the bounds directory is empty at + this point, a bounds fault (#BR) is raised, the kernel allocates a + bounds table (in the user address space) and makes the relevant entry + in the bounds directory point to the new table. +5) If the application violates the bounds specified in the bounds registers, + a separate kind of #BR is raised which will deliver a signal with + information about the violation in the 'struct siginfo'. +6) Whenever memory is freed, we know that it can no longer contain valid + pointers, and we attempt to free the associated space in the bounds + tables. If an entire table becomes unused, we will attempt to free + the table and remove the entry in the directory. + +To summarize, there are essentially three things interacting here: + +GCC with -fmpx: + * enables annotation of code with MPX instructions and prefixes + * inserts code early in the application to call in to the "gcc runtime" +GCC MPX Runtime: + * Checks for hardware MPX support in cpuid leaf + * allocates virtual space for the bounds directory (malloc() essentially) + * points the hardware BNDCFGU register at the directory + * calls a new prctl(PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT) to notify the kernel to + start managing the bounds directories +Kernel MPX Code: + * Checks for hardware MPX support in cpuid leaf + * Handles #BR exceptions and sends SIGSEGV to the app when it violates + bounds, like during a buffer overflow. + * When bounds are spilled in to an unallocated bounds table, the kernel + notices in the #BR exception, allocates the virtual space, then + updates the bounds directory to point to the new table. It keeps + special track of the memory with a VM_MPX flag. + * Frees unused bounds tables at the time that the memory they described + is unmapped. + + +3. How does MPX kernel code work +================================ + +Handling #BR faults caused by MPX +--------------------------------- + +When MPX is enabled, there are 2 new situations that can generate +#BR faults. + * new bounds tables (BT) need to be allocated to save bounds. + * bounds violation caused by MPX instructions. + +We hook #BR handler to handle these two new situations. + +On-demand kernel allocation of bounds tables +-------------------------------------------- + +MPX only has 4 hardware registers for storing bounds information. If +MPX-enabled code needs more than these 4 registers, it needs to spill +them somewhere. It has two special instructions for this which allow +the bounds to be moved between the bounds registers and some new "bounds +tables". + +#BR exceptions are a new class of exceptions just for MPX. They are +similar conceptually to a page fault and will be raised by the MPX +hardware during both bounds violations or when the tables are not +present. The kernel handles those #BR exceptions for not-present tables +by carving the space out of the normal processes address space and then +pointing the bounds-directory over to it. + +The tables need to be accessed and controlled by userspace because +the instructions for moving bounds in and out of them are extremely +frequent. They potentially happen every time a register points to +memory. Any direct kernel involvement (like a syscall) to access the +tables would obviously destroy performance. + +Why not do this in userspace? MPX does not strictly require anything in +the kernel. It can theoretically be done completely from userspace. Here +are a few ways this could be done. We don't think any of them are practical +in the real-world, but here they are. + +Q: Can virtual space simply be reserved for the bounds tables so that we + never have to allocate them? +A: MPX-enabled application will possibly create a lot of bounds tables in + process address space to save bounds information. These tables can take + up huge swaths of memory (as much as 80% of the memory on the system) + even if we clean them up aggressively. In the worst-case scenario, the + tables can be 4x the size of the data structure being tracked. IOW, a + 1-page structure can require 4 bounds-table pages. An X-GB virtual + area needs 4*X GB of virtual space, plus 2GB for the bounds directory. + If we were to preallocate them for the 128TB of user virtual address + space, we would need to reserve 512TB+2GB, which is larger than the + entire virtual address space today. This means they can not be reserved + ahead of time. Also, a single process's pre-popualated bounds directory + consumes 2GB of virtual *AND* physical memory. IOW, it's completely + infeasible to prepopulate bounds directories. + +Q: Can we preallocate bounds table space at the same time memory is + allocated which might contain pointers that might eventually need + bounds tables? +A: This would work if we could hook the site of each and every memory + allocation syscall. This can be done for small, constrained applications. + But, it isn't practical at a larger scale since a given app has no + way of controlling how all the parts of the app might allocate memory + (think libraries). The kernel is really the only place to intercept + these calls. + +Q: Could a bounds fault be handed to userspace and the tables allocated + there in a signal handler intead of in the kernel? +A: mmap() is not on the list of safe async handler functions and even + if mmap() would work it still requires locking or nasty tricks to + keep track of the allocation state there. + +Having ruled out all of the userspace-only approaches for managing +bounds tables that we could think of, we create them on demand in +the kernel. + +Decoding MPX instructions +------------------------- + +If a #BR is generated due to a bounds violation caused by MPX. +We need to decode MPX instructions to get violation address and +set this address into extended struct siginfo. + +The _sigfault feild of struct siginfo is extended as follow: + +87 /* SIGILL, SIGFPE, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS */ +88 struct { +89 void __user *_addr; /* faulting insn/memory ref. */ +90 #ifdef __ARCH_SI_TRAPNO +91 int _trapno; /* TRAP # which caused the signal */ +92 #endif +93 short _addr_lsb; /* LSB of the reported address */ +94 struct { +95 void __user *_lower; +96 void __user *_upper; +97 } _addr_bnd; +98 } _sigfault; + +The '_addr' field refers to violation address, and new '_addr_and' +field refers to the upper/lower bounds when a #BR is caused. + +Glibc will be also updated to support this new siginfo. So user +can get violation address and bounds when bounds violations occur. + +Cleanup unused bounds tables +---------------------------- + +When a BNDSTX instruction attempts to save bounds to a bounds directory +entry marked as invalid, a #BR is generated. This is an indication that +no bounds table exists for this entry. In this case the fault handler +will allocate a new bounds table on demand. + +Since the kernel allocated those tables on-demand without userspace +knowledge, it is also responsible for freeing them when the associated +mappings go away. + +Here, the solution for this issue is to hook do_munmap() to check +whether one process is MPX enabled. If yes, those bounds tables covered +in the virtual address region which is being unmapped will be freed also. + +Adding new prctl commands +------------------------- + +Two new prctl commands are added to enable and disable MPX bounds tables +management in kernel. + +155 #define PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT 43 +156 #define PR_MPX_DISABLE_MANAGEMENT 44 + +Runtime library in userspace is responsible for allocation of bounds +directory. So kernel have to use XSAVE instruction to get the base +of bounds directory from BNDCFG register. + +But XSAVE is expected to be very expensive. In order to do performance +optimization, we have to get the base of bounds directory and save it +into struct mm_struct to be used in future during PR_MPX_ENABLE_MANAGEMENT +command execution. + + +4. Special rules +================ + +1) If userspace is requesting help from the kernel to do the management +of bounds tables, it may not create or modify entries in the bounds directory. + +Certainly users can allocate bounds tables and forcibly point the bounds +directory at them through XSAVE instruction, and then set valid bit +of bounds entry to have this entry valid. But, the kernel will decline +to assist in managing these tables. + +2) Userspace may not take multiple bounds directory entries and point +them at the same bounds table. + +This is allowed architecturally. See more information "Intel(R) Architecture +Instruction Set Extensions Programming Reference" (9.3.4). + +However, if users did this, the kernel might be fooled in to unmaping an +in-use bounds table since it does not recognize sharing. |